CN103249292B - Electronic component mounting apparatus and electronic component mounting method - Google Patents
Electronic component mounting apparatus and electronic component mounting method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CN103249292B CN103249292B CN201310049297.6A CN201310049297A CN103249292B CN 103249292 B CN103249292 B CN 103249292B CN 201310049297 A CN201310049297 A CN 201310049297A CN 103249292 B CN103249292 B CN 103249292B
- Authority
- CN
- China
- Prior art keywords
- electronic component
- unit
- substrate
- holding
- electronic
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Active
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 97
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 312
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 82
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 82
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 8
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 claims description 192
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 claims description 75
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 claims description 14
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 claims description 9
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims description 9
- 230000005611 electricity Effects 0.000 claims 2
- WABPQHHGFIMREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N lead(0) Chemical compound [Pb] WABPQHHGFIMREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 abstract description 113
- 210000000078 claw Anatomy 0.000 description 156
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 135
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 134
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 89
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 79
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 73
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 58
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 43
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 40
- 239000011295 pitch Substances 0.000 description 40
- 229910000679 solder Inorganic materials 0.000 description 30
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 20
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 19
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 17
- 238000012840 feeding operation Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000005476 soldering Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000001179 sorption measurement Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000000429 assembly Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000000712 assembly Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000008602 contraction Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- GUIJLPKNGJMXKV-AZUAARDMSA-N rod-188 Chemical compound C1=CC(C)=CC=C1S(=O)(=O)N1[C@@H]([C@H]2OC(=O)CC2)C2=CC=CC=C2CC1 GUIJLPKNGJMXKV-AZUAARDMSA-N 0.000 description 4
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000007723 transport mechanism Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001678 irradiating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005304 joining Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010561 standard procedure Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007664 blowing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037237 body shape Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003985 ceramic capacitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 1
- -1 inductors Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007689 inspection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010030 laminating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012805 post-processing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003672 processing method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011179 visual inspection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002699 waste material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003466 welding Methods 0.000 description 1
Landscapes
- Supply And Installment Of Electrical Components (AREA)
Abstract
本发明提供一种电子部件安装装置以及电子部件安装方法,其可以高效且高精度地安装引线型电子部件。该电子部件安装装置利用在水平面上移动的搭载头,将电子部件向基板的搭载位置上移送并安装,具有:电子部件供给单元,其对电子部件进行供给;搭载头主体,其具有对从电子部件供给单元供给的电子部件的主体进行保持的吸嘴、对吸嘴进行上下移动及旋转驱动的吸嘴驱动部、对吸嘴及吸嘴驱动部进行支撑的搭载头支撑体;以及控制部,其对搭载头主体以及电子部件供给单元的动作进行控制,控制部,在该电子部件为向基板的插入孔中插入引线的引线型电子部件的情况下,基于该引线型电子部件的引线长度,确定利用搭载头主体将该电子部件向基板上安装的条件。
The present invention provides an electronic component mounting device and an electronic component mounting method capable of mounting lead-type electronic components efficiently and with high precision. This electronic component mounting apparatus uses a mounting head that moves on a horizontal plane to transfer and mount electronic components to a mounting position on a substrate, and includes: an electronic component supply unit that supplies electronic components; a suction nozzle that holds the main body of the electronic component supplied by the component supply unit, a suction nozzle drive unit that moves up and down and rotates the suction nozzle, a mounting head support that supports the suction nozzle and the suction nozzle drive unit; and a control unit, It controls the operation of the mounting head main body and the electronic component supply unit. When the electronic component is a lead type electronic component in which a lead wire is inserted into an insertion hole of the substrate, based on the lead length of the lead type electronic component, Conditions for mounting the electronic component on the substrate by the head main body are determined.
Description
技术领域technical field
本发明涉及一种利用吸嘴保持电子部件而移动,并将其向基板The invention relates to a method of using a suction nozzle to hold an electronic component and move it to a substrate
上安装的电子部件安装装置以及电子部件安装方法。An electronic component mounting device for mounting on top, and an electronic component mounting method.
背景技术Background technique
向基板上搭载电子部件的电子部件安装装置,具备具有吸嘴的搭载头,利用该吸嘴保持电子部件并向基板上搭载。电子部件安装装置通过使搭载头的吸嘴沿与基板的表面正交的方向移动,从而对位于电子部件供给装置中的部件进行吸附,然后,使搭载头沿与基板的表面平行的方向相对地移动,在到达所吸附的部件的搭载位置后,通过使搭载头的吸嘴沿与基板的表面正交的方向移动而接近基板,从而将所吸附的电子部件向基板上搭载。An electronic component mounting apparatus for mounting an electronic component on a substrate includes a mounting head having a suction nozzle, and the electronic component is held by the suction nozzle and mounted on the substrate. The electronic component mounting device moves the suction nozzle of the mounting head in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the substrate to absorb the components in the electronic component supply device, and then makes the mounting head face to face in a direction parallel to the surface of the substrate. After reaching the mounting position of the suctioned component, the suction nozzle of the mounting head moves in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the substrate to approach the substrate, thereby mounting the suctioned electronic component on the substrate.
在这里,作为向基板安装的电子部件,除了搭载于基板上的搭载型电子部件以外,还存在具有主体以及与主体连结的引线的引线型电子部件。在本发明中,引线型电子部件是通过将引线向在基板上形成的孔中插入而进行安装的部件。另外,在本发明中,将不向插入孔(基板孔)中插入而搭载于基板上的电子部件,例如SOP、QFP等,作为搭载型电子部件。作为将引线型电子部件向基板上安装的电子部件安装装置,存在例如专利文献1及2所记载的装置。在专利文献1中记载了一种电子部件安装机,其具有部件组装机,该部件组装机用于安装下述两种电子部件,即,由吸附搭载头吸附的搭载型电子部件、以及由夹持搭载头夹持而向基板插入后进行钉牢(clinch)的引线型电子部件。在专利文献2中记载了一种电子部件安装装置,其一体地构成有对搭载型电子部件进行安装的搭载头和对引线型电子部件进行安装的插入搭载头。Here, as electronic components mounted on a substrate, there are lead-type electronic components having a main body and leads connected to the main body, in addition to mount-type electronic components mounted on a substrate. In the present invention, a lead type electronic component is a component that is mounted by inserting a lead wire into a hole formed in a substrate. In addition, in the present invention, electronic components that are mounted on a substrate without being inserted into insertion holes (substrate holes), such as SOPs and QFPs, are referred to as mounted electronic components. As an electronic component mounting apparatus for mounting lead-type electronic components on a substrate, there are, for example, those described in Patent Documents 1 and 2. As shown in FIG. In Patent Document 1, an electronic component mounting machine is described, which has a component mounting machine for mounting the following two types of electronic components, that is, a mountable electronic component that is sucked by a suction mounting head, and a mountable electronic component that is sucked by a clip. A leaded electronic component that is clamped by a mounting head, inserted into a substrate, and then clinched. Patent Document 2 describes an electronic component mounting device integrally configured with a mounting head for mounting a mount-type electronic component and an insertion mounting head for mounting a lead-type electronic component.
专利文献1:日本特开平5-335782号公报Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5-335782
专利文献2:日本特开平9-83121号公报Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-83121
通过使用专利文献1及2中记载的装置,可以将引线型电子部件向基板搭载。在这里,专利文献1及2所记载的装置是混合搭载专用安装装置,其一体地具有分别用于插入轴向引线型电子部件的专用的夹持搭载头、和用于将搭载型电子部件向基板搭载的专用的吸附搭载头,可以将搭载型电子部件和引线型电子部件这两者向基板安装。在这里,专利文献1及2所记载的混合搭载专用安装装置,无法利用上述吸附搭载头将引线型电子部件向插入孔(基板孔)中插入,另外,无法利用上述夹持搭载头将搭载型电子部件向基板搭载。即,它们是搭载头针对搭载型电子部件以及引线型电子部件的部件种类不具有互换性的装置。因此,与安装在安装装置上的搭载头的种类对应而可以搭载的电子部件的种类受到限定,并且由于具有多种搭载头,所以成为非常昂贵的装置。By using the devices described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, lead type electronic components can be mounted on a substrate. Here, the devices described in Patent Documents 1 and 2 are dedicated mounting devices for mixed mounting, which integrally have a dedicated clamping and mounting head for inserting axial lead type electronic components, and a mounting head for inserting the mounted electronic components to the mounting device. The dedicated suction mounting head for substrate mounting can mount both mount-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components on the substrate. Here, the mounting devices for hybrid mounting described in Patent Documents 1 and 2 cannot insert lead-type electronic components into the insertion holes (substrate holes) by using the above-mentioned suction mounting heads, and cannot insert lead-type electronic components into the insertion holes (substrate holes) by using the above-mentioned clamping mounting heads. Electronic components are mounted on the substrate. That is, these are devices in which the mounting head is not compatible with the component types of the mount-type electronic component and the lead-type electronic component. Therefore, the types of electronic components that can be mounted corresponding to the types of mounting heads mounted on the mounting device are limited, and since there are many types of mounting heads, it becomes a very expensive device.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本发明就是鉴于上述情况而提出的,其目的在于,提供一种可以高效且高精度地安装引线型电子部件的电子部件安装装置以及电子部件安装方法。The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide an electronic component mounting device and an electronic component mounting method capable of efficiently and accurately mounting lead type electronic components.
本发明就是鉴于上述情况而提出的,提供一种电子部件安装装置以及电子部件安装方法,其中,该电子部件安装装置使由空气压力驱动的包含吸附吸嘴以及抓持吸嘴的吸嘴可拆卸,可以对搭载型电子部件进行保持并向基板上搭载,该电子部件安装装置的特征在于,利用该电子部件安装装置的吸嘴对引线型电子部件的主体进行保持,基于所保持的引线型电子部件的引线长度,确定将引线型电子部件向基板安装的条件,该电子部件安装装置不仅可以利用一个搭载头进行搭载型电子部件的基板搭载,还可以将引线型电子部件向基板插入,从而具有互换性,特别地,可以在将引线型电子部件的引线向基板插入时,使控制最优化。The present invention is made in view of the above circumstances, and provides an electronic component mounting device and an electronic component mounting method, wherein the electronic component mounting device detachably includes a suction nozzle and a gripping nozzle driven by air pressure. The mounting type electronic component can be held and mounted on the substrate. The electronic component mounting device is characterized in that the main body of the lead type electronic component is held by the suction nozzle of the electronic component mounting device. Based on the held lead type electronic The lead wire length of the component determines the conditions for mounting lead-type electronic components on the substrate. This electronic component mounting device can not only mount the mount-type electronic components on the substrate with one mounting head, but also insert the lead-type electronic components into the substrate. Interchangeability, in particular, makes it possible to optimize control when inserting leads of lead-type electronic components into substrates.
为了解决上述课题,实现目的,本发明提供一种电子部件安装装置,其利用在水平面上移动的搭载头,将电子部件向基板的搭载位置上移送并进行安装,其特征在于,具有:电子部件供给单元,其对所述电子部件进行供给;搭载头主体,其具有对从所述电子部件供给单元供给的电子部件的主体进行保持的吸嘴、对所述吸嘴进行上下移动及旋转驱动的吸嘴驱动部、以及对所述吸嘴及所述吸嘴驱动部进行支撑的搭载头支撑体;以及控制部,其对所述搭载头主体以及所述电子部件供给单元的动作进行控制,所述控制部,在该电子部件为向所述基板的插入孔中插入引线的引线型电子部件的情况下,基于该引线型电子部件的引线长度,确定利用所述搭载头主体将该电子部件向所述基板上安装的条件。In order to solve the above-mentioned problems and achieve the purpose, the present invention provides an electronic component mounting device, which uses a mounting head that moves on a horizontal plane to transfer and mount electronic components to a mounting position on a substrate, and is characterized in that it has: A supply unit that supplies the electronic components; a head body that has a suction nozzle for holding the main body of the electronic component supplied from the electronic component supply unit, and a mechanism for moving and rotating the suction nozzle up and down. a nozzle drive unit, a mounting head support supporting the nozzle and the nozzle drive unit; and a control unit that controls the operations of the head body and the electronic component supply unit, In the case where the electronic component is a lead-type electronic component in which leads are inserted into the insertion holes of the substrate, based on the length of the leads of the lead-type electronic component, it is determined that the electronic component is inserted into the electronic component by the head main body. conditions on which the substrate is mounted.
另外,优选所述控制部,在由所述吸嘴保持的所述电子部件为所述引线型电子部件,从所述引线的前端至所述基板的距离大于或等于阈值的情况下,使与所述基板垂直的方向的移动速度为第1速度,在所述电子部件为所述引线型电子部件,从所述引线的前端至所述基板的距离小于阈值的情况下,使与所述基板垂直的方向的移动速度为比所述第1速度慢的第2速度。In addition, it is preferable that the control unit, when the electronic component held by the suction nozzle is the lead type electronic component, and the distance from the tip of the lead to the substrate is greater than or equal to a threshold, The moving speed in the direction perpendicular to the substrate is a first speed, and when the electronic component is the lead type electronic component, and the distance from the tip of the lead to the substrate is smaller than a threshold value, the distance between the substrate and the substrate is The moving speed in the vertical direction is a second speed slower than the first speed.
另外,优选所述控制部使以所述第2速度移动的距离,与所述引线的长度相对应地变化。In addition, it is preferable that the control unit changes the moving distance at the second speed in accordance with the length of the lead wire.
另外,优选所述控制部对从所述电子部件供给单元供给的电子部件是所述引线型电子部件、还是不向所述基板的所述插入孔中插入引线的搭载型电子部件进行判定,所述控制部在所述电子部件为所述搭载型电子部件,所述搭载型电子部件的下侧的端部至所述基板的距离大于或等于阈值的情况下,使与所述基板垂直的方向的移动速度为第1速度,在所述电子部件为所述搭载型电子部件,从所述搭载型电子部件的下侧的所述端部至所述基板的距离小于阈值的情况下,使与所述基板垂直的方向的移动速度为比所述第2速度快而比所述第1速度慢的第3速度。In addition, it is preferable that the control unit judges whether the electronic component supplied from the electronic component supply unit is the lead type electronic component or a mountable electronic component in which a lead wire is not inserted into the insertion hole of the substrate. When the electronic component is the on-board electronic component and the distance from the lower end of the on-board electronic component to the substrate is greater than or equal to a threshold value, the control unit sets a direction perpendicular to the substrate to The moving speed is the first speed. When the electronic component is the on-board electronic component, and the distance from the end of the underside of the on-board electronic component to the substrate is less than a threshold value, the The moving speed in the direction perpendicular to the substrate is a third speed that is faster than the second speed and slower than the first speed.
另外,优选所述控制部判定是否已对由所述吸嘴保持的所述引线型电子部件的所述引线进行成型,在对所述引线型电子部件的引线进行了成型,且从所述搭载型电子部件的下侧的端部至所述基板的距离小于阈值的情况下,使与所述基板垂直的方向的移动速度为比所述第2速度慢的第4速度。In addition, it is preferable that the control unit judges whether or not the lead wires of the lead-type electronic component held by the suction nozzle have been molded, and when the lead wires of the lead-type electronic component are molded, and from the mounted When the distance from the lower end of the electronic component to the substrate is smaller than a threshold value, the moving speed in a direction perpendicular to the substrate is set to a fourth speed slower than the second speed.
另外,优选所述电子部件供给单元具有第1部件供给部以及第2部件供给部,所述第1部件供给部对所述引线型电子部件进行供给,所述第2部件供给部对不向所述基板的所述插入孔中插入引线的搭载型电子部件进行供给。In addition, it is preferable that the electronic component supply unit includes a first component supply unit that supplies the lead-type electronic components, and a second component supply unit that supplies the lead-type electronic components. The electronic component is supplied with a lead wire inserted into the insertion hole of the substrate.
另外,优选所述第1部件供给部包含径向供给器。In addition, it is preferable that the first component supply unit includes a radial feeder.
另外,优选所述第1部件供给部包含碗式供给器。Moreover, it is preferable that the said 1st component supply part contains a bowl type feeder.
另外,优选所述第2部件供给部为芯片部件供给器。Moreover, it is preferable that the said 2nd component supply part is a chip component feeder.
另外,优选所述电子部件供给单元具有第1部件供给部以及第2部件供给部,所述第1部件供给部包含径向供给器,所述第2部件供给部包含碗式供给器。In addition, it is preferable that the electronic component supply unit includes a first component supply unit including a radial feeder, and a second component supply unit including a bowl feeder.
另外,优选所述第1部件供给部包含芯片部件供给器。In addition, it is preferable that the first component supply unit includes a chip component feeder.
另外,优选所述第1部件供给部配置在隔着用于配置所述基板的位置而与所述第2部件供给部相对的位置。In addition, it is preferable that the first component supply unit is disposed at a position facing the second component supply unit across a position where the substrate is disposed.
另外,优选还具有更换吸嘴保持机构,其对可向所述搭载头上安装的吸嘴进行更换,所述控制部与所述搭载头的吸嘴所保持的电子部件相对应,而利用所述更换吸嘴保持机构对所述吸嘴进行更换。In addition, it is preferable to further include a replacement nozzle holding mechanism for replacing a nozzle that can be attached to the mounting head, and the control unit corresponds to the electronic component held by the nozzle of the mounting head, and uses the The suction nozzle is replaced by the replacement suction nozzle holding mechanism.
为了解决上述课题,实现目的,本发明提供一种电子部件安装方法,在该方法中,在利用具有吸嘴的搭载头主体保持电子部件的同时,对所述搭载头主体进行移送,将电子部件向基板上安装,其特征在于,具有下述步骤:部件供给步骤,在该步骤中,向保持位置供给电子部件;确定步骤,在该步骤中,在该电子部件为向所述基板的插入孔中插入引线的引线型电子部件的情况下,基于该引线型电子部件的所述引线的长度,确定利用所述搭载头主体将该电子部件向基板上安装的条件;保持步骤,在该步骤中,利用所述吸嘴对供给至所述保持位置的所述电子部件进行保持;以及安装步骤,在该步骤中,基于所述确定步骤中确定的条件,将所述吸嘴所保持的所述电子部件向所述基板上安装。In order to solve the above-mentioned problems and achieve the purpose, the present invention provides an electronic component mounting method. In this method, while the electronic component is held by the mounting head body having a suction nozzle, the mounting head body is transferred, and the electronic component The mounting on the substrate is characterized in that it has the following steps: a component supply step, in which step, the electronic component is supplied to the holding position; and a determination step, in which the electronic component is an insertion hole into the substrate In the case of a lead-type electronic component in which a lead is inserted, based on the length of the lead of the lead-type electronic component, the conditions for mounting the electronic component on the substrate using the mounting head main body are determined; the holding step, in this step , using the suction nozzle to hold the electronic component supplied to the holding position; and a mounting step in which, based on the condition determined in the determining step, the electronic component held by the suction nozzle is Electronic components are mounted on the substrate.
另外,优选在所述确定步骤中,在所述电子部件为所述引线型电子部件的情况下,从所述引线的前端至所述基板的距离为大于或等于阈值的范围时,使与所述基板垂直的方向的移动速度为第1速度,从所述引线的前端至所述基板的距离小于阈值时,使与所述基板垂直的方向的移动速度为比所述第1速度慢的第2速度。In addition, it is preferable that in the determining step, when the electronic component is the lead type electronic component, when the distance from the tip of the lead to the substrate is within a range greater than or equal to a threshold value, the The moving speed in the direction perpendicular to the substrate is a first speed, and when the distance from the front end of the lead to the substrate is less than a threshold value, the moving speed in the direction perpendicular to the substrate is a first speed slower than the first speed. 2 speeds.
另外,优选在所述确定步骤中,与所述引线的长度相对应地确定以所述第2速度移动的距离。In addition, it is preferable that in the determining step, the distance moved at the second speed is determined corresponding to the length of the lead wire.
优选在所述确定步骤中,对从所述电子部件供给单元供给的电子部件是所述引线型电子部件、还是不向所述基板的所述插入孔中插入引线的搭载型电子部件进行判定,在所述电子部件为所述搭载型电子部件,从所述搭载型电子部件的下侧的端部至所述基板的距离为大于或等于阈值的范围时,使与所述基板垂直的方向的移动速度为所述第1速度,在所述电子部件为所述搭载型电子部件,从所述搭载型电子部件的下侧的所述端部至所述基板的距离小于阈值的情况下,使与所述基板垂直的方向的移动速度为比所述第2速度快而比所述第1速度慢的第3速度。Preferably, in the determining step, it is determined whether the electronic component supplied from the electronic component supply unit is the lead type electronic component or a mountable electronic component in which a lead is not inserted into the insertion hole of the substrate, When the electronic component is the on-board electronic component, and the distance from the lower end of the on-board electronic component to the substrate is greater than or equal to a threshold value, the distance in the direction perpendicular to the substrate is The moving speed is the first speed, and when the electronic component is the mounted electronic component, and the distance from the end portion on the lower side of the mounted electronic component to the substrate is smaller than a threshold value, A moving speed in a direction perpendicular to the substrate is a third speed that is faster than the second speed and slower than the first speed.
发明的效果The effect of the invention
本发明具有下述效果,即,可以高效且高精度地安装引线型电子部件。The present invention has the effect that lead type electronic components can be mounted efficiently and with high precision.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1是表示电子部件安装装置的概略结构的示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of an electronic component mounting device.
图2是表示电子部件安装装置的框体的概略结构的斜视图。2 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a housing of the electronic component mounting device.
图3A是图2所示的框体的正视图。Fig. 3A is a front view of the frame shown in Fig. 2 .
图3B是图2所示的框体的俯视图。FIG. 3B is a plan view of the frame shown in FIG. 2 .
图3C是图2所示的框体的右侧视图。FIG. 3C is a right side view of the frame shown in FIG. 2 .
图3D是图2所示的框体的左侧视图。FIG. 3D is a left side view of the frame shown in FIG. 2 .
图3E是图2所示的框体的后视图。FIG. 3E is a rear view of the frame shown in FIG. 2 .
图4是表示框体的罩的概略结构的说明图。FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cover of a frame.
图5是表示框体的锁止机构的概略结构的说明图。FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a lock mechanism of a housing.
图6是表示电子部件安装装置的概略结构的示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of an electronic component mounting device.
图7是表示前侧收容器的概略结构的示意图。Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of the front container.
图8是表示后侧收容器的概略结构的示意图。Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of the rear container.
图9是表示后侧的部件供给单元的其他例子的概略结构的示意图。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of a rear-side component supply unit.
图10是表示电子部件安装装置的搭载头的概略结构的示意图。10 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mounting head of the electronic component mounting apparatus.
图11是表示电子部件安装装置的搭载头的概略结构的示意图。11 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mounting head of the electronic component mounting apparatus.
图12是表示电子部件保持带的一个例子的概略结构的示意图。FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of an example of an electronic component holding tape.
图13是表示电子部件保持带的其他例子的概略结构的示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of the electronic component holding tape.
图14是表示后侧的部件供给单元的电子部件供给装置的概略结构的斜视图。14 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the electronic component supply device of the component supply unit on the rear side.
图15是从与图14不同的方向观察图14所示的电子部件供给装置的斜视图。Fig. 15 is a perspective view of the electronic component supply device shown in Fig. 14 viewed from a different direction from Fig. 14 .
图16是表示部件供给单元的电子部件供给装置的概略结构的说明图。16 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of an electronic component supply device of a component supply unit.
图17是表示电子部件供给装置的夹持单元的概略结构的说明图。17 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a holding unit of the electronic component supply device.
图18是表示电子部件供给装置的供给器单元的概略结构的说明图。18 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a feeder unit of the electronic component supply apparatus.
图19是表示供给器单元的前端支撑部的概略结构的说明图。Fig. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a front end support portion of the feeder unit.
图20是表示供给器单元的保持带进给爪单元的概略结构的说明图。Fig. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a holding tape feed claw unit of the feeder unit.
图21是用于说明供给器单元的动作的说明图。Fig. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the feeder unit.
图22是表示电子部件供给装置的切断单元的概略结构的说明图。22 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cutting unit of the electronic component supply device.
图23是表示电子部件供给装置的切断单元的概略结构的说明图。23 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cutting unit of the electronic component supply device.
图24是表示电子部件供给装置的切断单元的概略结构的说明图。FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cutting unit of the electronic component supply apparatus.
图25是表示切断单元的其他例子的概略结构的斜视图。Fig. 25 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of another example of a cutting unit.
图26是表示从其他方向观察图25所示的切断单元的概略结构的斜视图。Fig. 26 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the cutting unit shown in Fig. 25 viewed from another direction.
图27是表示图25所示的切断单元和框体之间的关系的斜视图。Fig. 27 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the cutting unit and the housing shown in Fig. 25 .
图28是表示切断单元的其他例子的概略结构的斜视图。Fig. 28 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of another example of a cutting unit.
图29是用于说明图25所示的切断单元的动作的说明图。Fig. 29 is an explanatory view for explaining the operation of the cutting unit shown in Fig. 25 .
图30是用于说明图25所示的切断单元的动作的说明图。Fig. 30 is an explanatory view for explaining the operation of the cutting unit shown in Fig. 25 .
图31A是表示切断单元的保持机构的概略结构的说明图。Fig. 31A is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a holding mechanism of a cutting unit.
图31B是表示切断单元的保持机构的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。Fig. 31B is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of the holding mechanism of the cutting unit.
图32是表示电子部件供给装置的供给器单元的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。32 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of the feeder unit of the electronic component supply apparatus.
图33是表示从其他方向观察图32所示的供给器单元的概略结构的斜视图。Fig. 33 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 viewed from another direction.
图34是表示图32所示的供给器单元的概略结构的正视图。Fig. 34 is a front view showing a schematic configuration of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 .
图35是表示图32所示的供给器单元的概略结构的俯视图。Fig. 35 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 .
图36是表示图32所示的供给器单元的其他状态的概略结构的正视图。Fig. 36 is a front view showing a schematic configuration of another state of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 .
图37是表示图32所示的供给器单元的其他状态的概略结构的俯视图。Fig. 37 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of another state of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 .
图38是表示图32所示的供给器单元的概略结构的说明图。Fig. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 .
图39是表示图32所示的供给器单元的其他状态的概略结构的说明图。Fig. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another state of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 .
图40是表示图32所示的供给器单元的联动机构的概略结构的说明图。Fig. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of an interlocking mechanism of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 .
图41是表示框体的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of a housing.
图42是用于说明图32所示的供给器单元的动作的说明图。Fig. 42 is an explanatory view for explaining the operation of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 .
图43是用于说明图32所示的供给器单元的动作的说明图。Fig. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 .
图44是表示部件供给装置的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。Fig. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of the component supply device.
图45是将图44的一部分放大表示的说明图。FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged part of FIG. 44 .
图46是表示部件供给装置的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。Fig. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of the components supply device.
图47是将图46的一部分放大表示的说明图。FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged part of FIG. 46 .
图48是表示部件供给装置的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。Fig. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of the components supply device.
图49是将图48的一部分放大表示的说明图。FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged part of FIG. 48 .
图50是表示碗式供给器组合体的概略结构的斜视图。Fig. 50 is a perspective view showing a schematic structure of the bowl feeder assembly.
图51是表示图50所示的碗式供给器组合体的概略结构的斜视图。Fig. 51 is a perspective view showing a schematic structure of the bowl feeder assembly shown in Fig. 50 .
图52是表示部件供给单元的其他例子的侧视图。Fig. 52 is a side view showing another example of a component supply unit.
图53是表示部件供给单元的其他例子的俯视图。Fig. 53 is a plan view showing another example of the component supply unit.
图54是表示从图52所示的部件供给单元中将收容碗拆卸后的状态的侧视图。Fig. 54 is a side view showing a state in which the storage bowl is removed from the component supply unit shown in Fig. 52 .
图55是表示图53所示的部件供给单元的电子部件供给装置的收容碗和振动部的支撑部之间的关系的说明图。FIG. 55 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the storage bowl of the electronic component supply device of the component supply unit shown in FIG. 53 and the support portion of the vibration unit.
图56是表示图55所示的收容碗的概略结构的说明图。Fig. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of the storage bowl shown in Fig. 55 .
图57A是表示图53所示的部件供给单元的电子部件供给装置的支撑机构的概略结构的斜视图。57A is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a support mechanism of the electronic component supply device of the component supply unit shown in FIG. 53 .
图57B是表示图57A所示的支撑机构的概略结构的正视图。Fig. 57B is a front view showing a schematic structure of the support mechanism shown in Fig. 57A.
图58A是表示图57A所示的支撑机构的其他状态的斜视图。Fig. 58A is a perspective view showing another state of the support mechanism shown in Fig. 57A.
图58B是表示图58A所示的支撑机构的概略结构的正视图。Fig. 58B is a front view showing a schematic structure of the support mechanism shown in Fig. 58A.
图59是表示图53所示的部件供给单元的驱动装置的概略结构的俯视图。Fig. 59 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of a drive device of the component supply unit shown in Fig. 53 .
图60是表示图59所示的驱动装置的概略结构的斜视图。Fig. 60 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the driving device shown in Fig. 59 .
图61是将图59所示的驱动装置的概略结构放大表示的放大俯视图。Fig. 61 is an enlarged plan view showing an enlarged schematic configuration of the driving device shown in Fig. 59 .
图62是表示图59所示的驱动装置的概略结构的侧视图。Fig. 62 is a side view showing a schematic configuration of the driving device shown in Fig. 59 .
图63是表示图59所示的驱动装置的概略结构的侧视剖面图。Fig. 63 is a side sectional view showing a schematic configuration of the driving device shown in Fig. 59 .
图64是用于说明图59所示的驱动装置的动作的说明图。FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the driving device shown in FIG. 59 .
图65是将电子部件供给装置的一部分放大表示的斜视图。Fig. 65 is a perspective view enlarging a part of the electronic component supply device.
图66是将电子部件供给装置的一部分放大表示的斜视图。Fig. 66 is a perspective view enlarging a part of the electronic component supply device.
图67A是将电子部件供给装置的一部分放大表示的斜视图。Fig. 67A is a perspective view showing an enlarged part of the electronic component supply device.
图67B是从其他方向表示图67A所示的电子部件供给装置的一部分的斜视图。Fig. 67B is a perspective view showing a part of the electronic component supply device shown in Fig. 67A from another direction.
图68是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状的识别动作的说明图。FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recognition operation of the shape of the electronic component by the electronic component mounting device.
图69是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状的识别动作的说明图。69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recognition operation of the shape of the electronic component of the electronic component mounting device.
图70是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状的识别动作的说明图。FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recognition operation of the shape of the electronic component by the electronic component mounting device.
图71是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状的识别动作的说明图。FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recognition operation of the shape of the electronic component by the electronic component mounting device.
图72是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状的识别动作的说明图。FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recognition operation of the shape of the electronic component by the electronic component mounting device.
图73是表示识别动作的检测结果的一个例子的示意图。FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing an example of detection results of recognition actions.
图74是表示识别动作的检测结果的一个例子的示意图。FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing an example of detection results of recognition actions.
图75是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状的识别动作的说明图。75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recognition operation of the shape of the electronic component by the electronic component mounting device.
图76是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图77是表示操作画面的一个例子的说明图。Fig. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an operation screen.
图78是表示操作画面的一部分的说明图。Fig. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the operation screen.
图79A是表示部件供给角度的一个例子的说明图。Fig. 79A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a component supply angle.
图79B是表示部件供给角度的一个例子的说明图。Fig. 79B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a component supply angle.
图80是表示操作画面的一个例子的说明图。FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an operation screen.
图81是表示操作画面的一个例子的说明图。FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an operation screen.
图82是表示操作画面的一部分的说明图。Fig. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the operation screen.
图83A是表示电子部件的测定位置的一个例子的说明图。FIG. 83A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of measurement positions of electronic components.
图83B是表示电子部件的测定位置的一个例子的说明图。FIG. 83B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of measurement positions of electronic components.
图83C是表示电子部件的测定位置的一个例子的说明图。FIG. 83C is an explanatory diagram showing an example of measurement positions of electronic components.
图83D是表示电子部件的测定位置的一个例子的说明图。FIG. 83D is an explanatory diagram showing an example of measurement positions of electronic components.
图84是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。Fig. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图85是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。Fig. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图86是用于说明电子部件安装装置的动作的说明图。Fig. 86 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图87是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。Fig. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图88是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。Fig. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图89是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。Fig. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图90是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图91是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图92A是用于说明电子部件安装装置的动作的说明图。FIG. 92A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图92B是用于说明电子部件安装装置的动作的说明图。FIG. 92B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图93是表示吸嘴的一个例子的说明图。Fig. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a suction nozzle.
图94是用于说明图93的吸嘴的保持动作的说明图。Fig. 94 is an explanatory view for explaining the holding operation of the suction nozzle of Fig. 93 .
图95A是表示吸嘴的一个例子的说明图。Fig. 95A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a suction nozzle.
图95B是表示吸嘴的一个例子的说明图。Fig. 95B is an explanatory view showing an example of a suction nozzle.
图95C是表示吸嘴的一个例子的说明图。Fig. 95C is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a suction nozzle.
图95D是表示吸嘴的一个例子的说明图。Fig. 95D is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a suction nozzle.
图96是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图97是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图98是用于说明电子部件安装装置的动作的说明图。FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the electronic component mounting apparatus.
图99是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图100是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图101是表示引线型电子部件的一个例子的说明图。FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a lead type electronic component.
图102是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。Fig. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图103是表示吸嘴的移动速度和时间之间的关系的说明图。Fig. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the moving speed of the suction nozzle and time.
图104是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。Fig. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图105是表示吸嘴的移动速度和时间之间的关系的说明图。Fig. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the moving speed of the suction nozzle and time.
图106是用于说明电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的说明图。FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting apparatus.
图107是用于说明电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的说明图。FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting apparatus.
图108是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。Fig. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图109是表示吸嘴的移动速度和时间之间的关系的说明图。Fig. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the moving speed of the suction nozzle and time.
图110是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
图111是表示电子部件安装系统的概略结构的示意图。FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of the electronic component mounting system.
图112是表示电子部件安装系统的动作的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting system.
符号的说明Explanation of symbols
1安装系统,2图案形成装置,4回流处理装置,6、7输送装置,8基板,10电子部件安装装置,11框体,11a主体,11b、11f、11r罩,11c开口,11d罩支撑部,11e锁止机构,12基板输送部,14、14f、14r部件供给单元,15搭载头,16XY移动机构,17VCS单元,18更换吸嘴保持机构,19部件储存部,20控制装置,22X轴驱动部,24Y轴驱动部,30搭载头主体,31搭载头支撑体,32吸嘴,34吸嘴驱动部,38激光识别装置,40操作部,42显示部,44前侧收容器,46后侧收容器,48、49连接器,60控制部,62搭载头控制部,64部件供给控制部,70电子部件保持带,72保持带主体,80电子部件,82主体(电子部件主体),84引线,90碗式供给器组合体,100、100a、200、402、404、406电子部件供给装置,102支撑台,110框体,112夹持单元,114供给器单元,116、116a切断单元,118空气压力调整部,120引导槽,302列表,304搭载顺序列表,400收容碗供给器单元,408驱动装置,410固定部,420、420a、420b、420c收容碗,422、422a、422b、422c导轨,424、424a、424b、424c支撑机构,426、426a、426b、426c连结部,580a、580b、580c起始端侧部件检测传感器,582a、582b、582c保持位置侧部件检测传感器,590送风部1 mounting system, 2 pattern forming device, 4 reflow processing device, 6, 7 conveying device, 8 substrate, 10 electronic component mounting device, 11 housing, 11a main body, 11b, 11f, 11r cover, 11c opening, 11d cover support part , 11e locking mechanism, 12 substrate transport unit, 14, 14f, 14r component supply unit, 15 loading head, 16XY moving mechanism, 17VCS unit, 18 replacement nozzle holding mechanism, 19 component storage unit, 20 control device, 22X axis drive Part, 24 Y-axis driving part, 30 Mounting head main body, 31 Mounting head support body, 32 Suction nozzle, 34 Suction nozzle driving part, 38 Laser recognition device, 40 Operation part, 42 Display part, 44 Front storage container, 46 Rear side Container, 48, 49 Connector, 60 Control Unit, 62 Mounting Head Control Unit, 64 Parts Supply Control Unit, 70 Electronic Part Holding Band, 72 Holding Band Main Body, 80 Electronic Part, 82 Main Body (Electronic Part Main Body), 84 Lead Wire , 90 bowl feeder assembly, 100, 100a, 200, 402, 404, 406 electronic component supply device, 102 support table, 110 frame, 112 clamping unit, 114 feeder unit, 116, 116a cutting unit, 118 Air pressure adjustment part, 120 guide groove, 302 list, 304 loading order list, 400 storage bowl feeder unit, 408 drive unit, 410 fixing part, 420, 420a, 420b, 420c storage bowl, 422, 422a, 422b, 422c guide rail , 424, 424a, 424b, 424c supporting mechanism, 426, 426a, 426b, 426c connecting part, 580a, 580b, 580c start side part detection sensor, 582a, 582b, 582c holding position side part detection sensor, 590 air supply part
具体实施方式detailed description
下面,参照附图,对本发明进行详细说明。此外,本发明并不由下述用于实施发明的方式(以下称为实施方式)限定。另外,在下述实施方式中的构成要素中,包含本领域技术人员可以容易想到的要素、实质上相同的要素等所谓等同范围内的要素。另外,在下述实施方式中公开的构成要素可以适当组合。Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. In addition, this invention is not limited by the form (henceforth embodiment) for carrying out the invention mentioned below. In addition, the constituent elements in the following embodiments include elements within the so-called equivalent range, such as elements that can be easily conceived by those skilled in the art, substantially the same elements, and the like. In addition, components disclosed in the following embodiments may be appropriately combined.
下面,基于附图,对本发明所涉及的电子部件安装装置以及电子部件安装方法的实施方式进行详细说明。此外,本发明并不受本实施方式限定。图1是表示电子部件安装装置的概略结构的示意图。Hereinafter, embodiments of the electronic component mounting apparatus and electronic component mounting method according to the present invention will be described in detail based on the drawings. In addition, this invention is not limited by this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of an electronic component mounting device.
图1所示的电子部件安装装置10是向基板8上搭载电子部件的装置。电子部件安装装置10具有:框体11、基板输送部12、部件供给单元14f、14r、搭载头15、XY移动机构16、VCS单元17、更换吸嘴保持机构18、部件储存部19、控制装置20、操作部40以及显示部42。此外,XY移动机构16具有X轴驱动部22以及Y轴驱动部24。在这里,本实施方式的电子部件安装装置10如图1所示,以基板输送部12为中心而在前侧和后侧分别具有部件供给单元14f、14r。在电子部件安装装置10中,部件供给单元14f配置在电子部件安装装置10的前侧,部件供给单元14r配置在电子部件安装装置10的后侧。另外,下面在不特别地区分2个部件供给单元14f、14r的情况下,统称为部件供给单元14。An electronic component mounting apparatus 10 shown in FIG. 1 is an apparatus for mounting electronic components on a substrate 8 . The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 has: a housing 11, a substrate transport unit 12, component supply units 14f, 14r, a mounting head 15, an XY moving mechanism 16, a VCS unit 17, a replacement nozzle holding mechanism 18, a component storage unit 19, and a control device. 20. An operation unit 40 and a display unit 42. In addition, the XY movement mechanism 16 has an X-axis drive unit 22 and a Y-axis drive unit 24 . Here, as shown in FIG. 1 , the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment includes component supply units 14 f and 14 r on the front side and the rear side of the board conveyance unit 12 , respectively. In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , the component supply unit 14 f is arranged on the front side of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , and the component supply unit 14 r is arranged on the rear side of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 . In addition, below, when not distinguishing especially two component supply units 14f and 14r, it is collectively called the component supply unit 14.
图2是表示电子部件安装装置的框体的概略结构的斜视图。图3A是图2所示的框体的正视图。图3B是图2所示的框体的俯视图。图3C是图2所示的框体的右侧视图。图3D是图2所示的框体的左侧视图。图3E是图2所示的框体的后视图。图4是表示框体的罩的概略结构的说明图。图5是表示框体的锁止机构的概略结构的说明图。此外,在图3A至图3E中,省略部件供给单元14f、14r的图示,以更易于理解地示出框体11。2 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a housing of the electronic component mounting device. Fig. 3A is a front view of the frame shown in Fig. 2 . FIG. 3B is a plan view of the frame shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 3C is a right side view of the frame shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 3D is a left side view of the frame shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 3E is a rear view of the frame shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cover of a frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a lock mechanism of a housing. In addition, in FIGS. 3A to 3E , illustration of the component supply units 14 f and 14 r is omitted in order to show the housing 11 more easily.
框体11如图3A至图3E所示,具有主体11a和罩11bf、11br。主体11a是收容构成电子部件安装装置10的各部分的箱体。主体11a在前侧配置罩11bf、操作部40、显示部42、前侧收容器44以及连接器48,在后侧形成罩11br、后侧收容器46以及连接器49。主体11a在2个侧面上分别形成2个开口11c,它们用于将基板8向装置内搬入及排出。本实施方式的操作部40具有键盘40a和鼠标40b。本实施方式的显示部42具有触摸面板42a和图像监视器42b。此外,触摸面板42a也成为操作部40的一部分。前侧收容器44和后侧收容器46分别是对部件供给单元14f、14r进行支撑的部件。前侧收容器44和后侧收容器46的详细构造在后面记述。连接器48与后述的部件供给单元14f的各部分的配线连接。另外,连接器49与后述的部件供给单元14r的各部分的配线连接。在这里,作为配线,具有传递电气信号的配线及供给空气的管路。The housing 11 has a main body 11a and covers 11bf and 11br as shown in FIGS. 3A to 3E . The main body 11 a is a case for accommodating various parts constituting the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 . In the main body 11a, a cover 11bf, an operation unit 40, a display unit 42, a front container 44, and a connector 48 are disposed on the front side, and a cover 11br, a rear container 46, and a connector 49 are formed on the rear side. Two openings 11c are formed on two side surfaces of the main body 11a, and these are used to carry the substrate 8 into and out of the apparatus. The operation unit 40 of this embodiment has a keyboard 40a and a mouse 40b. The display unit 42 of this embodiment has a touch panel 42a and an image monitor 42b. In addition, the touch panel 42 a also becomes a part of the operation unit 40 . The front side container 44 and the rear side container 46 are components which support the component supply units 14f and 14r, respectively. The detailed structures of the front container 44 and the rear container 46 will be described later. The connector 48 is connected to the wiring of each part of the component supply unit 14f described later. Moreover, the connector 49 is connected to the wiring of each part of the components supply unit 14r mentioned later. Here, as the wiring, there are wiring for transmitting electrical signals and piping for supplying air.
下面,对罩11bf、11br进行说明。此外,罩11bf、11br仅配置位置在前侧和后侧这一点不同,而结构相同。下面,在不特别地区分的情况下,称为罩11b而进行说明。罩11bf是在主体11a的前侧的一部分上设置的围板,配置在铅垂方向上侧。罩11br是在主体11a的后侧的一部分上设置的围板,配置在铅垂方向上侧。罩11b具有覆盖主体11a的正面或者背面的一部分和上表面的一部分的形状,剖面成为L字状。罩11b如图4所示,可以相对于主体11a开闭。通过使罩11b成为打开状态,可以对配置在主体11a内部的各部分进行作业。罩11b的上表面的前端与主体11a连结,以连结部分为支点转动。另外,罩11b由罩支撑部11d支撑。罩支撑部11d是伸缩的棒状部件,一侧端部与主体11a连结,另一侧端部与罩11b连结。罩支撑部11d与罩11b的开闭对应地进行伸缩。另外,在罩支撑部11d上设置有锁止机构11e,其将罩支撑部11d的伸缩锁止。锁止机构11e通过成为锁止状态,使罩支撑部11d成为无法伸缩的状态,通过成为解锁状态,使罩支撑部11d成为可以伸缩的状态。如果锁止机构11e成为锁止状态,则罩11b被固定在当前位置。由此,可以抑制打开状态的罩11b因自重而关闭。Next, the covers 11bf and 11br will be described. In addition, the covers 11bf and 11br differ only in that the arrangement positions are on the front side and the rear side, but have the same structure. Hereinafter, when not distinguishing in particular, it calls it the cover 11b, and demonstrates. The cover 11bf is a panel provided on a part of the front side of the main body 11a, and is arranged on the upper side in the vertical direction. The cover 11br is a shroud provided on a part of the rear side of the main body 11a, and is arranged on the upper side in the vertical direction. The cover 11b has a shape covering a part of the front or back and a part of the upper surface of the main body 11a, and has an L-shaped cross section. The cover 11b can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 11a, as shown in FIG. By making the cover 11b into an open state, it is possible to work on each part arranged inside the main body 11a. The front end of the upper surface of the cover 11b is connected to the main body 11a, and turns around the connection part as a fulcrum. In addition, the cover 11b is supported by the cover support part 11d. The cover support portion 11d is a stretchable rod-shaped member, one end thereof is connected to the main body 11a, and the other end thereof is connected to the cover 11b. The cover support part 11d expands and contracts according to opening and closing of the cover 11b. Moreover, the cover support part 11d is provided with the lock mechanism 11e which locks expansion-contraction of the cover support part 11d. The lock mechanism 11e makes the cover support part 11d into a non-stretchable state by being in a locked state, and makes the cover support part 11d a stretchable state by being in an unlocked state. When the lock mechanism 11e is in the locked state, the cover 11b is fixed at the current position. Thereby, the cover 11b in an open state can be suppressed from being closed by its own weight.
回到图1,继续对电子部件安装装置10进行说明。基板8只要是用于搭载电子部件的部件即可,其结构不特别地限定。本实施方式的基板8是板状部件,表面设置有配线图案。在设置于基板8上的配线图案的表面,附着作为利用回流将板状部件的配线图案和电子部件接合的接合部件的焊料。另外,在基板8上,还形成用于插入电子部件的通孔(插入孔、基板孔)。Returning to FIG. 1 , the description of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 will be continued. The structure of the substrate 8 is not particularly limited as long as it is a component for mounting electronic components. The substrate 8 of this embodiment is a plate-shaped member, and a wiring pattern is provided on the surface. On the surface of the wiring pattern provided on the substrate 8 , solder is attached as a joining member for joining the wiring pattern of the plate-like member and the electronic component by reflow. In addition, through-holes (insertion holes, substrate holes) for inserting electronic components are also formed on the substrate 8 .
基板输送部12是将基板8沿图中X轴方向输送的输送机构。基板输送部12具有:沿X轴方向延伸的导轨;以及输送机构,其对基板8进行支撑,使基板8沿导轨移动。基板输送部12以使得基板8的搭载对象面与搭载头15相对的朝向,利用输送机构使基板8沿导轨移动,从而将基板8沿X轴方向输送。基板输送部12将由向电子部件安装装置10供给的设备供给来的基板8,输送至导轨上的规定位置。搭载头15在上述规定位置处,将电子部件向基板8的表面搭载。基板输送部12在向输送至上述规定位置的基板8上搭载电子部件后,将基板8向进行下一个工序的装置处输送。此外,作为基板输送部12的输送机构,可以使用各种结构。例如,可以使用将输送机构一体化的传送带方式的输送机构,在这种方式的输送机构中,将沿基板8的输送方向配置的导轨和沿上述导轨旋转的环形带组合,在将基板8搭载在上述环形带上的状态下进行输送。The substrate transport unit 12 is a transport mechanism that transports the substrate 8 in the X-axis direction in the drawing. The substrate conveyance unit 12 includes: a guide rail extending in the X-axis direction; and a conveyance mechanism that supports the substrate 8 and moves the substrate 8 along the guide rail. The substrate transport unit 12 transports the substrate 8 along the X-axis direction by moving the substrate 8 along the guide rails with the transport mechanism in such a direction that the mounting target surface of the substrate 8 faces the mounting head 15 . The board|substrate conveyance part 12 conveys the board|substrate 8 supplied by the equipment supplied to the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, to a predetermined position on the rail. The mounting head 15 mounts the electronic component on the surface of the substrate 8 at the above predetermined position. The substrate conveyance part 12 conveys the board|substrate 8 to the apparatus which performs a next process after mounting electronic components on the board|substrate 8 conveyed to the said predetermined position. In addition, various configurations can be used as the transport mechanism of the substrate transport unit 12 . For example, it is possible to use a conveyor-type conveyance mechanism that integrates the conveyance mechanism. In this conveyance mechanism, a guide rail arranged along the conveyance direction of the substrate 8 is combined with an endless belt rotating along the above-mentioned guide rail, and the substrate 8 is mounted on the conveyor belt. It is conveyed in the state on the above-mentioned endless belt.
图6是表示电子部件安装装置的概略结构的示意图。图7是表示前侧收容器的概略结构的示意图。图8是表示后侧收容器的概略结构的示意图。电子部件安装装置10如图6所示,在前侧配置部件供给单元14f,在后侧配置部件供给单元14r。前侧的部件供给单元14f和后侧的部件供给单元14r分别具有电子部件供给装置,它们保持多个向基板8上搭载的电子部件,如图6所示,可以向搭载头15供给,即,可以以由搭载头15进行保持(吸附或者抓持)的状态向保持位置供给电子部件。本实施方式的部件供给单元14f、14r均供给具有主体和与主体连结的引线的引线型电子部件。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of an electronic component mounting device. Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of the front container. Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of the rear container. In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, as shown in FIG. 6, a component supply unit 14f is arranged on the front side, and a component supply unit 14r is arranged on the rear side. The component supply unit 14f on the front side and the component supply unit 14r on the rear side each have an electronic component supply device, and they hold a plurality of electronic components mounted on the substrate 8, and as shown in FIG. The electronic component can be supplied to the holding position in a state held (attracted or gripped) by the mounting head 15 . The component supply units 14f and 14r of the present embodiment both supply lead type electronic components having a main body and lead wires connected to the main body.
前侧的部件供给单元14f具有2个碗式供给器组合体90。碗式供给器组合体90具有多个作为碗式供给器的部件供给装置,从各部件供给装置向保持位置(吸附位置,抓持位置)供给电子部件。由各部件供给装置供给至保持位置的电子部件,通过搭载头15向基板8安装。对于碗式供给器组合体90,在后面记述。The component supply unit 14f on the front side has two bowl feeder assemblies 90 . The bowl feeder assembly 90 has a plurality of component supply devices serving as bowl feeders, and electronic components are supplied from each component supply device to a holding position (suction position, grip position). The electronic components supplied to the holding positions by the respective component supply devices are mounted on the substrate 8 by the mounting head 15 . The bowl feeder assembly 90 will be described later.
部件供给单元14f的2个碗式供给器组合体90设置在前侧收容器44上。如图7所示,前侧收容器44具有支撑板44a。支撑板44a由螺栓等固定在主体11a内部的规定位置处。支撑板44a对2个碗式供给器组合体90进行支撑。支撑板44a的基板输送部12侧的端部配置有定位轴44b。定位轴44b支撑碗式供给器组合体90,对碗式供给器组合体90进行定位。另外,在支撑板44a的与基板输送部12侧的相反侧的端部上,形成有2个凹部44c。凹部44c也分别使碗式供给器组合体90的一部分插入,对碗式供给器组合体90进行定位。The two bowl feeder assemblies 90 of the component supply unit 14 f are installed on the front side container 44 . As shown in FIG. 7, the front side container 44 has the support plate 44a. The support plate 44a is fixed at a predetermined position inside the main body 11a by bolts or the like. The support plate 44a supports the two bowl feeder assemblies 90 . The positioning shaft 44b is arranged at the end portion of the support plate 44a on the side of the substrate transport unit 12 . The positioning shaft 44b supports the bowl feeder assembly 90 and positions the bowl feeder assembly 90 . In addition, two concave portions 44c are formed on the end portion of the support plate 44a on the side opposite to the substrate transport unit 12 side. The recessed part 44c also inserts a part of the bowl feeder assembly 90, and positions the bowl feeder assembly 90, respectively.
后侧的部件供给单元14r具有多个电子部件供给装置(以下简称为“部件供给装置”)100。电子部件供给装置100是径向供给器,向保持位置(吸附位置、抓持位置)供给电子部件。由各部件供给装置100供给至保持位置的电子部件,通过搭载头15向基板8安装。The component supply unit 14 r on the rear side has a plurality of electronic component supply devices (hereinafter simply referred to as “component supply devices”) 100 . The electronic component supply device 100 is a radial feeder, and supplies electronic components to holding positions (suction positions, gripping positions). The electronic components supplied to the holding positions by the respective component supply devices 100 are mounted on the substrate 8 by the mounting head 15 .
部件供给装置100使用在保持带上粘贴多个径向引线型电子部件的引线而构成的电子部件保持带,向搭载头15供给径向引线型电子部件。部件供给装置100是保持带供给器,其保持电子部件保持带,对所保持的电子部件保持带进行输送,将所保持的径向引线型电子部件移动至可以利用搭载头15的吸嘴对电子部件进行保持的保持区域(吸附位置、抓持位置、保持位置)。部件供给装置100通过将移动至保持区域的径向引线型电子部件的引线切断并分离,从而可以使由该保持带固定引线的径向引线型电子部件成为可以保持在规定位置处的状态,可以利用搭载头15的吸嘴对该径向引线型电子部件进行保持(吸附、抓持)。对于部件供给装置100在后面记述。此外,多个部件供给装置100可以分别供给不同品种的电子部件,也可以供给多种电子部件。The component supply apparatus 100 supplies radial lead type electronic components to the mounting head 15 using an electronic component holding tape in which leads of a plurality of radial lead type electronic components are pasted on the holding tape. The component supply device 100 is a holding tape feeder that holds an electronic component holding tape, conveys the held electronic component holding tape, and moves the held radial lead type electronic The holding area where the part is held (suction position, grip position, holding position). The component supply apparatus 100 cuts and separates the lead wires of the radial lead type electronic components that have moved to the holding area, so that the radial lead type electronic components whose leads are fixed by the holding belt can be held at predetermined positions. The radial lead type electronic component is held (adsorbed, gripped) by the suction nozzle of the mounting head 15 . The components supply device 100 will be described later. In addition, the plurality of component supply apparatuses 100 may supply electronic components of different types, respectively, or may supply multiple types of electronic components.
多个电子部件供给装置100设置在后侧收容器46上。后侧收容器46是对多个电子部件供给装置100进行支撑的机构,如图8所示,具有:第1固定板46a和第2固定板46b、锁止轴46c、驱动气缸46d以及位置标签46e。第1固定板46a是在ZX平面上延伸的板状部件,沿X方向形成有直列状的孔。孔是可以使在电子部件供给装置100上形成的凸起插入的孔。第1固定板46a通过使在电子部件供给装置100上形成的凸起插入孔中,从而对电子部件供给装置100进行定位。第2固定板46b是配置在铅垂方向下侧的面、即支撑电子部件供给装置100的面上的板状部件。第2固定板46b在远离基板输送部12的一侧的端面上形成凹凸。第2固定板46b通过使在电子部件供给装置100上形成的凸起插入凹凸中,从而对电子部件供给装置100进行定位。锁止轴46c配置在与第2固定板46b相比更远离基板输送部12的一侧。锁止轴46c通过被电子部件供给装置100的夹持单元112夹持,而对电子部件供给装置100进行支撑、定位。驱动气缸46d是可以向铅垂方向上侧凸出的活塞,通过对设置在对应位置上的电子部件供给装置100的规定位置进行按压,从而向电子部件供给装置100的保持位置输送电子部件。位置标签46e是可以通过眼睛观察而识别后侧收容器46中的收容器位置的引导标识。操作人员通过对位置标签46e进行确认而向规定的位置设置电子部件供给装置100,从而可以在期望的位置上设置电子部件供给装置100。A plurality of electronic component supply devices 100 are installed on the rear side container 46 . The rear container 46 is a mechanism for supporting a plurality of electronic component supply devices 100, and as shown in FIG. 46e. The first fixing plate 46a is a plate-shaped member extending on the ZX plane, and has holes formed in a row along the X direction. The holes are holes into which protrusions formed on the electronic component supply apparatus 100 can be inserted. The first fixing plate 46 a positions the electronic component supply apparatus 100 by inserting protrusions formed on the electronic component supply apparatus 100 into the holes. The second fixing plate 46 b is a plate-shaped member arranged on the lower surface in the vertical direction, that is, the surface supporting the electronic component supply device 100 . The second fixing plate 46 b is formed with irregularities on the end surface on the side away from the substrate transfer unit 12 . The second fixing plate 46 b positions the electronic component supply apparatus 100 by inserting protrusions formed on the electronic component supply apparatus 100 into the unevenness. The lock shaft 46c is arranged on a side farther from the substrate transfer unit 12 than the second fixing plate 46b. The locking shaft 46c is clamped by the clamping unit 112 of the electronic component supply device 100 to support and position the electronic component supply device 100 . The driving cylinder 46d is a piston that can protrude upward in the vertical direction, and conveys the electronic component to the holding position of the electronic component supply device 100 by pressing a predetermined position of the electronic component supply device 100 provided at the corresponding position. The position label 46e is a guide mark that can recognize the position of the container in the rear side container 46 by visual inspection. The operator can install the electronic component supply apparatus 100 at a desired position by installing the electronic component supply apparatus 100 at a predetermined position by checking the position label 46e.
图9是表示后侧的部件供给单元的其他例子的概略结构的示意图。部件供给单元14也可以在安装多个下述电子部件供给装置100的基础上,具有下述电子部件供给装置100a,其中,该电子部件供给装置100安装通过将多个径向引线型电子部件(径向部件)固定在保持带主体中而形成的电子部件保持带(径向部件保持带),在保持位置(第2保持位置)将该电子部件保持带保持的引线型电子部件的引线切断,而可以利用搭载头上具有的吸附吸嘴或者抓持吸嘴,对位于该保持位置的引线型电子部件进行保持,该电子部件供给装置100a安装通过将多个搭载型电子部件固定于保持带主体中而形成的电子部件保持带(芯片部件保持带),在保持位置(第1保持位置)将该电子部件保持带所保持的搭载型电子部件从保持带主体进行剥离,利用搭载头上具有的吸附吸嘴或者抓持吸嘴,对位于该保持位置的搭载型电子部件进行保持。在部件供给单元14中,也可以作为其他电子部件供给装置100a而在后侧收容器46上设置杆式供给器或托盘式供给器。图9所示的多个部件供给装置100、100a保持在支撑台(收容器)102上。支撑台102具有与上述的后侧收容器46相同的结构。另外,支撑台102除了部件供给装置100、100a之外,还可以搭载其他装置(例如,测量装置或照相机等)。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of a rear-side component supply unit. The component supply unit 14 may also have the following electronic component supply device 100a on the basis of mounting a plurality of the following electronic component supply devices 100, wherein the electronic component supply device 100 mounts a plurality of radial lead type electronic components ( Radial component) The electronic component holding tape (radial component holding tape) formed by being fixed in the holding tape main body, the lead wire of the lead type electronic component held by the electronic component holding tape is cut at the holding position (second holding position), However, the lead-type electronic components at the holding position can be held by using the suction nozzles or gripping nozzles on the mounting head. The electronic component holding tape (chip component holding tape) formed in the process is peeled off from the main body of the holding tape at the holding position (the first holding position) to hold the mounted electronic component held by the electronic component holding tape. The suction nozzle or the grip nozzle holds the mounted electronic component at the holding position. In the component supply unit 14 , a rod feeder or a tray feeder may be provided on the rear side container 46 as another electronic component supply device 100 a. The plurality of component supply devices 100 , 100 a shown in FIG. 9 are held on a support stand (receptacle) 102 . The support stand 102 has the same structure as the above-mentioned rear container 46 . In addition, other devices (for example, a measuring device, a camera, etc.) may be mounted on the support stand 102 in addition to the component supply devices 100 and 100a.
在部件供给单元14中,保持于支撑台102上的多个部件供给装置100、100a,由进行搭载的电子部件的种类、保持电子部件的机构或者供给机构不同的多种部件供给装置100、100a构成。另外,部件供给单元14也可以具有多个相同种类的部件供给装置100、100a。另外,优选部件供给单元14具有可相对于装置主体拆卸的结构。In the component supply unit 14, a plurality of component supply devices 100, 100a held on the support table 102, a plurality of types of component supply devices 100, 100a having different types of electronic components to be mounted, mechanisms for holding electronic components, or supply mechanisms constitute. In addition, the component supply unit 14 may have a plurality of components supply devices 100 and 100a of the same type. In addition, it is preferable that the component supply unit 14 has a detachable structure with respect to the apparatus main body.
电子部件供给装置100a使用在保持带上粘接进行基板搭载的芯片型电子部件而构成的电子部件保持带,向搭载头15供给电子部件。此外,电子部件保持带在保持带上形成多个储存室,在该储存室中储存电子部件。电子部件供给装置100a是下述的保持带供给器,其对电子部件保持带进行保持,将所保持的电子部件保持带进行输送,使储存室移动至可以利用搭载头15的吸嘴吸附电子部件的保持区域。此外,通过使储存室移动至保持区域,可以成为收容在该储存室中的电子部件在规定位置露出的状态,可以利用搭载头15的吸嘴吸附、抓持该电子部件。电子部件供给装置100a并不限定于保持带供给器,可以采用供给芯片型电子部件的各种芯片部件供给器。作为芯片部件供给器,例如可以使用杆式供给器、保持带供给器、散装(bulk)供给器。The electronic component supply apparatus 100 a supplies electronic components to the mounting head 15 using an electronic component holding tape configured by bonding chip-type electronic components to be mounted on a substrate on the holding tape. In addition, the electronic component holding tape forms a plurality of storage chambers on the holding tape, and electronic components are stored in the storage chambers. The electronic component supply apparatus 100a is a holding tape feeder that holds the electronic component holding tape, conveys the held electronic component holding tape, and moves the storage chamber to the point where the electronic component can be picked up by the suction nozzle of the mounting head 15. the holding area. Furthermore, by moving the storage chamber to the holding area, the electronic component housed in the storage chamber can be exposed at a predetermined position, and the electronic component can be sucked and gripped by the suction nozzle of the mounting head 15 . The electronic component supply apparatus 100a is not limited to a holding tape feeder, and various chip component feeders that supply chip-type electronic components can be employed. As the chip component feeder, for example, a rod feeder, a holding tape feeder, and a bulk feeder can be used.
搭载头15利用吸嘴对在部件供给单元14f上保持的电子部件(碗式供给器单元所保持的引线型电子部件)、或者在部件供给单元14r上保持的电子部件(电子部件供给装置100所保持的径向引线型电子部件(引线型电子部件、插入型电子部件))进行保持(吸附或者抓持),将所保持的电子部件向利用基板输送部12移动至规定位置的基板8上进行安装。另外,搭载头15在部件供给单元14r具有电子部件供给装置100a的情况下,将在电子部件供给装置100a上保持的芯片型电子部件(搭载型电子部件)向基板8上搭载(安装)。此外,对于搭载头15的结构在后面记述。此外,芯片型电子部件(搭载型电子部件)是不具有插入在基板上形成的插入孔(通孔)的引线的无引线电子部件。作为搭载型电子部件,如上所述例示了SOP、QFP等。芯片型电子部件向基板上安装时,无需将引线插入插入孔中。The mounting head 15 uses suction nozzles to hold the electronic components held on the component supply unit 14f (lead-type electronic components held by the bowl feeder unit) or the electronic components held on the component supply unit 14r (supplied by the electronic component supply apparatus 100). The held radial lead type electronic components (lead type electronic components, plug-in type electronic components) are held (adsorbed or gripped), and the held electronic components are moved to the substrate 8 that is moved to a predetermined position by the substrate transfer unit 12. Install. Moreover, the mounting head 15 mounts (mounts) a chip-type electronic component (mounted electronic component) held by the electronic component supply device 100 a on the substrate 8 when the component supply unit 14 r has the electronic component supply device 100 a. In addition, the structure of the mounting head 15 will be described later. In addition, a chip-type electronic component (mount-type electronic component) is a leadless electronic component that does not have leads inserted into insertion holes (through holes) formed on a substrate. As the mount-type electronic component, SOP, QFP, etc. are illustrated as mentioned above. When the chip-type electronic component is mounted on the substrate, it is not necessary to insert the lead wires into the insertion holes.
XY移动机构16是使搭载头15沿图1、图2中的X轴方向以及Y轴方向、即在与基板8的表面平行的面上移动的移动机构,具有X轴驱动部22和Y轴驱动部24。X轴驱动部22与搭载头15连结,使搭载头15沿X轴方向移动。Y轴驱动部24经由X轴驱动部22与搭载头15连结,通过使X轴驱动部22沿Y轴方向移动,从而使搭载头15沿Y轴方向移动。XY移动机构16通过使搭载头15沿XY轴方向移动,从而可以使搭载头15向与基板8相对的位置,或者与部件供给单元14f、14r相对的位置移动。另外,XY移动机构16通过使搭载头15移动,从而对搭载头15和基板8之间的相对位置进行调整。由此,可以使搭载头15所保持的电子部件向基板8表面的任意位置移动,可以将电子部件向基板8表面的任意位置搭载。即,XY移动机构16是使搭载头15在水平面(XY平面)上移动,将位于部件供给单元14f、14r的电子部件供给装置中的电子部件向基板8的规定位置(搭载位置、安装位置)输送的输送单元。此外,作为X轴驱动部22,可以使用使搭载头15向规定方向移动的各种机构。作为Y轴驱动部24,可以使用使X轴驱动部22向规定方向移动的各种机构。作为使对象物向规定方向移动的机构,例如可以使用线性电动机、齿条齿轮、使用滚珠丝杠的输送机构、利用传送带的输送机构等。The XY moving mechanism 16 is a moving mechanism that moves the mounting head 15 along the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction in FIGS. drive part 24. The X-axis driving unit 22 is connected to the mounting head 15 and moves the mounting head 15 in the X-axis direction. The Y-axis driving unit 24 is connected to the mounting head 15 via the X-axis driving unit 22 , and moves the mounting head 15 in the Y-axis direction by moving the X-axis driving unit 22 in the Y-axis direction. The XY moving mechanism 16 can move the mounting head 15 to a position facing the substrate 8 or to a position facing the component supply units 14 f and 14 r by moving the mounting head 15 in the XY axis direction. In addition, the XY moving mechanism 16 adjusts the relative position between the mounting head 15 and the substrate 8 by moving the mounting head 15 . Thereby, the electronic component held by the mounting head 15 can be moved to an arbitrary position on the surface of the substrate 8 , and the electronic component can be mounted on an arbitrary position on the surface of the substrate 8 . That is, the XY moving mechanism 16 moves the mounting head 15 on the horizontal plane (XY plane), and moves the electronic components in the electronic component supply device located in the component supply units 14f and 14r to predetermined positions (mounting positions, mounting positions) on the substrate 8 . Delivery unit for delivery. In addition, various mechanisms for moving the mounting head 15 in a predetermined direction can be used as the X-axis drive unit 22 . Various mechanisms for moving the X-axis drive unit 22 in a predetermined direction can be used as the Y-axis drive unit 24 . As a mechanism for moving an object in a predetermined direction, for example, a linear motor, a rack and pinion, a conveyance mechanism using a ball screw, a conveyance mechanism using a conveyor belt, or the like can be used.
VCS单元17、更换吸嘴保持机构18以及部件储存部19,在XY平面中配置在与搭载头15的可动区域重合的位置,且在Z方向上的位置与搭载头15相比更靠近铅垂方向下侧的位置处。在本实施方式中,VCS单元17、更换吸嘴保持机构18以及部件储存部19,在基板输送部12和部件供给单元14r之间相邻配置。The VCS unit 17, the replacement nozzle holding mechanism 18, and the parts storage unit 19 are arranged at positions overlapping with the movable area of the mounting head 15 in the XY plane, and are closer to the lead than the mounting head 15 in the Z direction. at the lower side of the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the VCS unit 17, the replacement nozzle holding mechanism 18, and the component storage unit 19 are arranged adjacently between the substrate transport unit 12 and the component supply unit 14r.
VCS单元(部件状态检测部、状态检测部)17是图像识别装置,具有对搭载头15的吸嘴附近进行拍摄的照相机及对拍摄区域进行照明的照明单元。VCS单元17对由搭载头15的吸嘴吸附的电子部件的形状以及由吸嘴保持的电子部件的保持状态进行识别。更具体地说,如果使搭载头15移动至与VCS单元17相对的位置,则VCS单元17从铅垂方向下侧对搭载头15的吸嘴进行拍摄,通过对拍摄到的图像进行解析,从而对由吸嘴吸附的电子部件的形状及由吸嘴保持的电子部件的保持状态进行识别。VCS单元17将取得的信息向控制装置20发送。The VCS unit (component state detection unit, state detection unit) 17 is an image recognition device and includes a camera for imaging the vicinity of the suction nozzle of the mounting head 15 and an illumination unit for illuminating the imaging area. The VCS unit 17 recognizes the shape of the electronic component picked up by the suction nozzle of the mounting head 15 and the holding state of the electronic component held by the suction nozzle. More specifically, when the mounting head 15 is moved to a position facing the VCS unit 17, the VCS unit 17 photographs the suction nozzles of the mounting head 15 from the lower side in the vertical direction, and analyzes the captured image, thereby The shape of the electronic component picked up by the suction nozzle and the holding state of the electronic component held by the suction nozzle are recognized. The VCS unit 17 transmits the obtained information to the control device 20 .
更换吸嘴保持机构18是保持多种吸嘴的机构。更换吸嘴保持机构18以可以使搭载头15拆卸更换吸嘴的状态,保持多种吸嘴。在这里,本实施方式的更换吸嘴保持机构18保持有:吸附吸嘴,其通过进行吸引而保持电子部件;以及抓持吸嘴,其通过进行抓持而保持电子部件。搭载头15通过变更利用更换吸嘴保持机构18进行安装的吸嘴,向所安装的吸嘴供给空气压力而驱动,从而可以以适当的条件(吸引或者抓持)对要保持的电子部件进行保持。The replacement nozzle holding mechanism 18 is a mechanism for holding various types of nozzles. The replacement nozzle holding mechanism 18 holds various types of nozzles in a state where the mounting head 15 can be detached and replaced. Here, the replacement nozzle holding mechanism 18 of the present embodiment holds: a suction nozzle that holds an electronic component by suction; and a gripping nozzle that holds an electronic component by gripping. The mounting head 15 can hold the electronic component to be held under an appropriate condition (suction or grip) by changing the nozzle to be mounted by changing the nozzle holding mechanism 18, and supplying air pressure to the mounted nozzle to drive it. .
部件储存部19是储存由搭载头15利用吸嘴进行保持且没有安装在基板8上的电子部件的箱体。即,在电子部件安装装置10中,成为将没有安装在基板8上的电子部件进行废弃的废弃箱。电子部件安装装置10在由搭载头15保持的电子部件中存在不向基板8安装的电子部件的情况下,使搭载头15向与部件储存部19相对的位置移动,通过将所保持的电子部件释放,从而将电子部件放入部件储存部19。The component storage unit 19 is a box for storing electronic components held by the mounting head 15 using suction nozzles and not mounted on the substrate 8 . That is, in the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, it becomes a waste box which discards the electronic component which is not mounted on the board|substrate 8. As shown in FIG. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 moves the mounting head 15 to a position facing the component storage part 19 when there is an electronic component not to be mounted on the substrate 8 among the electronic components held by the mounting head 15, and the held electronic components release, and the electronic component is put into the component storage part 19 .
控制装置20对电子部件安装装置10的各部分进行控制。控制装置20是各种控制部的集合体。操作部40是作业人员输入操作的输入设备,具有键盘40a、鼠标40b以及触摸面板42a。操作部40将检测出的各种输入向控制装置20发送。显示部42是向作业人员显示各种信息的画面,具有触摸面板42a和图像监视器42b。显示部42基于从控制装置20输入的图像信号,在触摸面板42a和图像监视器42b上显示各种图像。The control device 20 controls each part of the electronic component mounting device 10 . The control device 20 is an aggregate of various control units. The operation unit 40 is an input device for an operator to input an operation, and has a keyboard 40a, a mouse 40b, and a touch panel 42a. The operation unit 40 transmits various detected inputs to the control device 20 . The display part 42 is a screen which displays various information to an operator, and has a touch panel 42a and an image monitor 42b. The display unit 42 displays various images on the touch panel 42 a and the image monitor 42 b based on image signals input from the control device 20 .
此外,本实施方式的电子部件安装装置10设置了1个搭载头,但也可以与部件供给单元14f、14r分别对应而设置2个搭载头。在此情况下,设置2个X轴驱动部,通过使2个搭载头分别沿XY方向移动,从而可以使2个搭载头独立移动。电子部件安装装置10通过具有2个搭载头,从而可以对1个基板8交替地搭载电子部件。如上述所示,通过利用2个搭载头交替地搭载电子部件,从而可以在一个搭载头将电子部件向基板8搭载的期间,使另一个搭载头对位于部件供给装置中的电子部件进行保持。由此,可以进一步缩短没有向基板8搭载电子部件的时间,可以高效地搭载电子部件。另外,还优选电子部件安装装置10平行地配置2个基板输送部12。如果电子部件安装装置10利用2个基板输送部12使2个基板交替地向电子部件搭载位置移动,并利用上述2个搭载头15交替地进行部件搭载,则可以更高效地向基板搭载电子部件。In addition, although the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 of this embodiment provided one mounting head, you may provide two mounting heads corresponding to each of component supply units 14f and 14r. In this case, two X-axis drive units are provided, and by moving the two mounting heads in the XY direction, the two mounting heads can be independently moved. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can alternately mount electronic components on one substrate 8 by having two mounting heads. As described above, by alternately mounting electronic components with the two mounting heads, while one mounting head is mounting the electronic components on the substrate 8, the other mounting head can hold the electronic components in the component supply apparatus. Thereby, the time during which electronic components are not mounted on the substrate 8 can be further shortened, and the electronic components can be mounted efficiently. Moreover, it is also preferable that the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 arranges two board|substrate conveyance parts 12 in parallel. If the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 uses the two substrate transfer units 12 to alternately move the two substrates to the electronic component mounting position, and alternately performs component mounting using the above-mentioned two mounting heads 15, the electronic components can be mounted on the substrate more efficiently. .
下面,使用图10及图11,对搭载头15的结构进行说明。图10是表示电子部件安装装置的搭载头的概略结构的示意图。图11是表示电子部件安装装置的搭载头的概略结构的示意图。此外,在图10中,同时示出对电子部件安装装置10进行控制的各种控制部和部件供给单元14r的1个部件供给装置100。搭载头15如图10及图11所示,具有搭载头主体30、拍摄装置(基板状态检测部)36、高度传感器(基板状态检测部)37、以及激光识别装置(部件状态检测部、状态检测部)38。Next, the configuration of the mounting head 15 will be described using FIGS. 10 and 11 . 10 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mounting head of the electronic component mounting apparatus. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mounting head of the electronic component mounting apparatus. In addition, in FIG. 10, various control parts which control the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, and one component supply apparatus 100 of the component supply unit 14r are shown together. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the mounting head 15 has a mounting head main body 30, an imaging device (substrate state detection unit) 36, a height sensor (substrate state detection portion) 37, and a laser recognition device (component state detection portion, state detection unit). Department) 38.
电子部件安装装置10如图10所示,具有控制部60、搭载头控制部62以及部件供给控制部64。控制部60、搭载头控制部62以及部件供给控制部64是上述控制装置20的一部分。另外,电子部件安装装置10与电源连接,使用控制部60、搭载头控制部62、部件供给控制部64以及各种电路,将从电源供给的电力向各部分供给。对于控制部60、搭载头控制部62以及部件供给控制部64,在后面记述。As shown in FIG. 10 , the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 includes a control unit 60 , a mounting head control unit 62 , and a component supply control unit 64 . The control unit 60 , the mounting head control unit 62 , and the component supply control unit 64 are part of the above-mentioned control device 20 . In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 is connected to a power source, and uses the control unit 60 , the mounting head control unit 62 , the component supply control unit 64 and various circuits to supply electric power supplied from the power source to each part. The control unit 60 , the mounting head control unit 62 , and the component supply control unit 64 will be described later.
电子部件供给装置100使引线保持在电子部件保持带(径向部件保持带)上的电子部件80的主体向上方露出。此外,作为电子部件80,例示出铝电解电容器。此外,作为电子部件80,除了铝电解电容器之外,还可以使用带有引线的各种电子部件。电子部件供给装置100通过将电子部件保持带拉出并使其移动,从而使在电子部件保持带中保持的电子部件80向保持区域(吸附区域、抓持区域)移动。在本实施方式中,部件供给装置100的Y轴方向的前端附近,成为由搭载头15的吸嘴对保持于电子部件保持带中的电子部件80进行保持的保持区域。对于电子部件供给装置100的结构,在后面记述。另外,与电子部件供给装置100a的情况相同地,规定位置成为由搭载头15的吸嘴对保持于电子部件保持带中的电子部件80进行保持的保持区域。In the electronic component supply apparatus 100 , the main body of the electronic component 80 whose leads are held on the electronic component holding tape (radial component holding tape) is exposed upward. In addition, an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is illustrated as the electronic component 80 . In addition, as the electronic component 80 , various electronic components with leads can be used in addition to the aluminum electrolytic capacitor. The electronic component supply apparatus 100 moves the electronic component 80 held on the electronic component holding tape to the holding area (adsorption area, grip area) by pulling out and moving the electronic component holding tape. In the present embodiment, the vicinity of the front end in the Y-axis direction of the component supply apparatus 100 serves as a holding area where the suction nozzles of the mounting head 15 hold the electronic component 80 held on the electronic component holding tape. The configuration of the electronic component supply apparatus 100 will be described later. Moreover, similarly to the case of the electronic component supply apparatus 100a, a predetermined position becomes a holding area|region where the suction nozzle of the mounting head 15 holds the electronic component 80 held by the electronic component holding tape.
搭载头主体30具有对各部分进行支撑的搭载头支撑体31、多个吸嘴32以及吸嘴驱动部34。在本实施方式的搭载头主体30上,如图11所示将6根吸嘴32配置为一列。6根吸嘴32沿与X轴平行的方向排列。此外,图11所示的吸嘴32均配置有吸附并保持电子部件的吸嘴。The mounting head main body 30 has a mounting head support body 31 supporting each part, a plurality of suction nozzles 32 , and a suction nozzle drive unit 34 . In the mounting head main body 30 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11 , six suction nozzles 32 are arranged in a row. Six suction nozzles 32 are arranged in a direction parallel to the X axis. In addition, the suction nozzle 32 shown in FIG. 11 is equipped with the suction nozzle which attracts and holds an electronic component.
搭载头支撑体31是与X轴驱动部22连结的支撑部件,对吸嘴32以及吸嘴驱动部34进行支撑。此外,搭载头支撑体31还对激光识别装置38进行支撑。The mounting head support body 31 is a support member connected to the X-axis drive unit 22 and supports the suction nozzle 32 and the suction nozzle drive unit 34 . In addition, the mounting head support body 31 also supports the laser recognition device 38 .
吸嘴32是吸附、保持电子部件80的吸附机构。吸嘴32在前端具有开口33,通过从该开口33吸引空气,从而在前端吸附、保持电子部件80。此外,吸嘴32具有轴32a,该轴32a与形成有开口33并吸附电子部件80的前端部连结。轴32a是对前端部进行支撑的棒状部件,沿Z轴方向延伸配置。轴32a在内部配置有将开口33和吸嘴驱动部34的吸引机构连接的空气管(配管)。The suction nozzle 32 is a suction mechanism for suctioning and holding the electronic component 80 . The suction nozzle 32 has an opening 33 at the front end, and sucks and holds the electronic component 80 at the front end by sucking air from the opening 33 . Moreover, the suction nozzle 32 has the shaft 32a connected to the front-end|tip part in which the opening 33 was formed, and the electronic component 80 is sucked. The shaft 32a is a rod-shaped member that supports the front end, and is arranged to extend in the Z-axis direction. An air pipe (pipe) connecting the opening 33 and the suction mechanism of the nozzle drive unit 34 is disposed inside the shaft 32 a.
吸嘴驱动部34使吸嘴32沿Z轴方向移动,利用吸嘴32的开口33对电子部件80进行吸附。在这里,Z轴是与XY平面正交的轴。此外,Z轴成为与基板的表面正交的方向。另外,吸嘴驱动部34在电子部件安装时等,使吸嘴32沿θ方向旋转。所谓θ方向,是与以Z轴为中心的圆的圆周方向平行的方向,其中,Z轴是与Z轴驱动部使吸嘴32移动的方向平行的轴。此外,θ方向成为吸嘴32的转动方向。The suction nozzle drive unit 34 moves the suction nozzle 32 in the Z-axis direction, and suctions the electronic component 80 through the opening 33 of the suction nozzle 32 . Here, the Z axis is an axis orthogonal to the XY plane. In addition, the Z axis is a direction perpendicular to the surface of the substrate. In addition, the suction nozzle drive unit 34 rotates the suction nozzle 32 in the θ direction at the time of electronic component mounting or the like. The θ direction is a direction parallel to the circumferential direction of a circle centered on the Z-axis, where the Z-axis is an axis parallel to the direction in which the Z-axis driving unit moves the suction nozzle 32 . In addition, the θ direction becomes the rotation direction of the suction nozzle 32 .
在吸嘴驱动部34中,作为使吸嘴32沿Z轴方向移动的机构,例如存在具有Z轴方向为驱动方向的直线电动机的机构。吸嘴驱动部34通过利用直线电动机使吸嘴32的轴32a沿Z轴方向移动,从而使吸嘴32的前端部的开口33沿Z轴方向移动。另外,在吸嘴驱动部34中,作为使吸嘴32沿θ方向旋转的机构,例如存在由将电动机和与轴32a进行连结的传动要素构成的机构。吸嘴驱动部34将从电动机输出的驱动力利用传动要素向轴32a传递,使轴32a沿θ方向旋转,从而吸嘴32的前端部也沿θ方向旋转。In the nozzle drive unit 34 , as a mechanism for moving the nozzle 32 in the Z-axis direction, there is, for example, a mechanism including a linear motor whose driving direction is the Z-axis direction. The nozzle drive unit 34 moves the opening 33 at the tip of the nozzle 32 in the Z-axis direction by moving the shaft 32a of the nozzle 32 in the Z-axis direction by a linear motor. Moreover, in the nozzle drive part 34, as a mechanism which rotates the nozzle 32 in the (theta) direction, there exists a mechanism which consists of a motor and the transmission element connected with the shaft 32a, for example. The nozzle drive unit 34 transmits the driving force output from the motor to the shaft 32a by the transmission element, and rotates the shaft 32a in the θ direction, whereby the tip portion of the suction nozzle 32 also rotates in the θ direction.
在吸嘴驱动部34中,作为利用吸嘴32的开口33对电子部件80进行吸附的机构即吸引机构,例如存在具有下述部件的机构:空气管,其与吸嘴32的开口33连结;泵,其与该空气管连接;以及电磁阀,其对空气管的管路的开闭进行切换。吸嘴驱动部34利用泵对空气管的空气进行吸引,通过对电磁阀的开闭进行切换,从而对是否从开口33吸引空气进行切换。吸嘴驱动部34通过打开电磁阀,从开口33吸引空气,从而使开口33吸附(保持)电子部件80,通过关闭电磁阀,使开口33不吸引空气,从而将吸附在开口33上的电子部件80释放,即,成为不利用开口33吸附电子部件80的状态(不进行保持的状态)。In the suction nozzle drive unit 34, as a mechanism for sucking the electronic component 80 through the opening 33 of the suction nozzle 32, that is, a suction mechanism, for example, there is a mechanism having the following components: an air tube connected to the opening 33 of the suction nozzle 32; A pump is connected to the air pipe; and a solenoid valve switches the opening and closing of the air pipe. The suction nozzle drive unit 34 sucks air from the air pipe with a pump, and switches whether or not to suck air from the opening 33 by switching the solenoid valve on and off. The suction nozzle driver 34 sucks air from the opening 33 by opening the solenoid valve, so that the opening 33 absorbs (holds) the electronic component 80 , and closes the solenoid valve so that the opening 33 does not suck air, so that the electronic component adsorbed on the opening 33 80 is released, that is, it becomes a state where the electronic component 80 is not attracted by the opening 33 (a state where it is not held).
另外,本实施方式的搭载头15在对电子部件的主体进行保持时,主体上表面为无法利用吸嘴(吸附吸嘴)33吸附的形状的情况下,使用后述的抓持吸嘴。抓持吸嘴通过与吸附吸嘴相同地对空气进行吸引释放,从而使可动片相对于固定片开闭,由此可以从上方抓持、释放电子部件的主体。另外,搭载头15通过利用吸嘴驱动部34使吸嘴32移动而执行更换动作,从而可以更换由吸嘴驱动部34驱动的吸嘴。In addition, when the mounting head 15 of this embodiment holds the main body of the electronic component, when the upper surface of the main body is in a shape that cannot be sucked by the suction nozzle (suction nozzle) 33 , a gripping nozzle described later is used. The gripping nozzle sucks and releases air in the same way as the suction nozzle, thereby opening and closing the movable piece with respect to the fixed piece, whereby the main body of the electronic component can be gripped and released from above. In addition, the mounting head 15 can replace the nozzles driven by the nozzle driving unit 34 by performing the replacement operation by moving the nozzles 32 by the nozzle driving unit 34 .
拍摄装置36固定在搭载头主体30的搭载头支撑体31上,对与搭载头15相对的区域、例如基板8或搭载了电子部件80的基板8等进行拍摄。拍摄装置36具有照相机和照明装置,在利用照明装置对视野进行照明的同时,利用照相机取得图像。由此,可以拍摄与搭载头主体30相对的位置的图像、例如基板8或部件供给单元14的各种图像。例如,拍摄装置36对在基板8表面上形成的作为基准标记的BOC标记(以下简称为BOC)或通孔(插入孔)的图像进行拍摄。在这里,在使用除BOC标记以外的基准标记的情况下,对该基准标记的图像进行拍摄。The imaging device 36 is fixed to the head support body 31 of the head body 30 , and takes an image of a region facing the head 15 , for example, the substrate 8 or the substrate 8 on which the electronic component 80 is mounted. The imaging device 36 has a camera and a lighting device, and obtains an image using the camera while illuminating the field of view with the lighting device. Thereby, images of positions facing the head main body 30 , for example, various images of the substrate 8 or the component supply unit 14 can be captured. For example, the imaging device 36 captures an image of a BOC mark (hereinafter abbreviated as BOC) or a through hole (insertion hole) as a reference mark formed on the surface of the substrate 8 . Here, when a fiducial mark other than the BOC mark is used, an image of the fiducial mark is captured.
高度传感器37固定在搭载头主体30的搭载头支撑体31上,对搭载头15与相对的区域、例如基板8或搭载了电子部件80的基板8之间的距离进行测量。作为高度传感器37可以使用激光传感器,该激光传感器具有:发光元件,其照射激光;以及受光元件,其对在相对的位置处反射而返回的激光进行受光,该激光传感器根据从激光发出后至受光为止的时间,对与相对的部分之间的距离进行测量。另外,高度传感器37通过使用测定时的自身位置以及基板位置,对与相对的部分之间的距离进行处理,从而对相对的部分、具体地说为电子部件的高度进行检测。此外,也可以由控制部60基于与电子部件之间的距离的测定结果进行检测电子部件的高度的处理。The height sensor 37 is fixed on the head support body 31 of the head body 30 , and measures the distance between the head 15 and an opposing area, for example, the substrate 8 or the substrate 8 on which the electronic component 80 is mounted. As the height sensor 37, a laser sensor can be used. This laser sensor has: a light-emitting element that emits laser light; Measure the distance to the opposite part. In addition, the height sensor 37 detects the height of the facing part, specifically, the electronic component, by processing the distance to the facing part using its own position and the board position at the time of measurement. In addition, the process of detecting the height of an electronic component may be performed by the control part 60 based on the measurement result of the distance with respect to an electronic component.
激光识别装置38具有光源38a和受光元件38b。激光识别装置38内置在托架50上。托架50如图10所示,与搭载头支撑体31的下侧、基板8以及部件供给装置100侧连结。激光识别装置38是通过对由搭载头主体30的吸嘴32吸附的电子部件80照射激光,从而对电子部件80的状态进行检测的装置。在这里,作为电子部件80的状态,是指电子部件80的形状、以及利用吸嘴32是否以正确的姿势吸附电子部件80等。光源38a是输出激光的发光元件。受光元件38b的Z轴方向上的位置配置在与光源38a相对的位置、即高度相同的位置上。对于利用激光识别装置38对形状的识别处理,在后面记述。The laser recognition device 38 has a light source 38a and a light receiving element 38b. The laser recognition device 38 is built in the bracket 50 . As shown in FIG. 10 , the bracket 50 is connected to the lower side of the head support body 31 , the substrate 8 and the component supply device 100 side. The laser recognition device 38 is a device that detects the state of the electronic component 80 by irradiating laser light on the electronic component 80 sucked by the suction nozzle 32 of the head main body 30 . Here, the state of the electronic component 80 refers to the shape of the electronic component 80 , whether or not the electronic component 80 is sucked by the suction nozzle 32 in a correct posture, and the like. The light source 38a is a light emitting element that outputs laser light. The position in the Z-axis direction of the light receiving element 38b is arranged at a position facing the light source 38a, that is, at a position having the same height. The shape recognition processing by the laser recognition device 38 will be described later.
下面,对电子部件安装装置10的装置结构的控制功能进行说明。电子部件安装装置10如图10所示,作为控制装置20而具有控制部60、搭载头控制部62以及部件供给控制部64。各种控制部分别由CPU、ROM及RAM等具有运算处理功能和存储功能的部件构成。另外,在本实施方式中,为了便于说明而设置多个控制部,但也可以设置1个控制部。另外,在将电子部件安装装置10的控制功能由1个控制部实现的情况下,可以由1个运算装置实现,也可以由多个运算装置实现。Next, the control function of the device configuration of the electronic component mounting device 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10 , the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 includes a control unit 60 , a mounting head control unit 62 , and a component supply control unit 64 as the control device 20 . Each of the various control units is composed of a CPU, ROM, RAM, and other components having arithmetic processing functions and storage functions. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of control units are provided for convenience of explanation, but one control unit may be provided. In addition, when realizing the control function of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 by one control part, it may realize it by one computing device, and may realize it by several computing devices.
控制部60与电子部件安装装置10的各部分连接,基于所输入的操作信号、在电子部件安装装置10的各部分中检测出的信息,执行所存储的程序,对各部分的动作进行控制。控制部60例如对基板8的输送动作、利用XY移动机构16实现的搭载头15的驱动动作、利用激光识别装置38实现的形状检测动作等进行控制。另外,控制部60如上述所示向搭载头控制部62发送各种指示,对搭载头控制部62的控制动作进行控制。控制部60还对搭载头控制部62及部件供给控制部64的控制动作进行控制。The control unit 60 is connected to each part of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, and executes a stored program based on an input operation signal and information detected in each part of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 to control the operation of each part. The control unit 60 controls, for example, the conveying operation of the substrate 8 , the driving operation of the mounting head 15 by the XY moving mechanism 16 , the shape detection operation by the laser recognition device 38 , and the like. In addition, the control unit 60 sends various instructions to the mounting head control unit 62 as described above, and controls the control operation of the mounting head control unit 62 . The control unit 60 also controls the control operations of the mounting head control unit 62 and the component supply control unit 64 .
搭载头控制部62与吸嘴驱动部34、配置在搭载头支撑体31上的各种传感器以及控制部60连接,对吸嘴驱动部34进行控制,而对吸嘴32的动作进行控制。搭载头控制部62基于从控制部60供给的操作指示以及各种传感器(例如距离传感器)的检测结果,对吸嘴32对电子部件的吸附(保持)/释放动作、各吸嘴32的转动动作、Z轴方向的移动动作进行控制。The mounting head control unit 62 is connected to the nozzle driving unit 34 , various sensors disposed on the mounting head support 31 , and the control unit 60 to control the nozzle driving unit 34 and the operation of the suction nozzle 32 . The mounting head control unit 62 controls the suction (holding)/release operation of the electronic components by the suction nozzles 32 and the rotation operation of each suction nozzle 32 based on the operation instructions supplied from the control unit 60 and the detection results of various sensors (such as distance sensors). , Z-axis movement control.
部件供给控制部64对部件供给单元14f、14r进行的电子部件80的供给动作进行控制。可以在部件供给装置100、碗式供给器单元400上分别设置部件供给控制部64,也可以利用1个部件供给控制部64对所有的部件供给装置100、碗式供给器单元400进行控制。例如,部件供给控制部64对部件供给装置100所进行的电子部件保持带的拉出动作(移动动作)、引线的切断动作以及对径向引线型电子部件的保持动作进行控制。另外,部件供给控制部64对碗式供给器单元400所进行的部件供给动作进行控制。另外,部件供给控制部64在部件供给单元14f具有部件供给装置100a的情况下,对部件供给装置100a所进行的电子部件保持带的拉出动作(移动动作)进行控制。部件供给控制部64基于控制部60的指示执行各种动作。部件供给控制部64通过对电子部件保持带或者电子部件保持带的拉出动作进行控制,从而对电子部件保持带或者电子部件保持带的移动进行控制。The component supply control part 64 controls the supply operation|movement of the electronic component 80 by the component supply means 14f, 14r. The component supply control unit 64 may be provided separately in the component supply device 100 and the bowl feeder unit 400 , or all the component supply device 100 and the bowl feeder unit 400 may be controlled by one component supply control unit 64 . For example, the component supply control unit 64 controls the drawing operation (moving operation) of the electronic component holding tape, the cutting operation of the lead wire, and the holding operation of the radial lead type electronic component performed by the component supply device 100 . In addition, the component supply control unit 64 controls the component supply operation performed by the bowl feeder unit 400 . Also, when the component supply unit 14f has the component supply device 100a, the component supply control unit 64 controls the pulling operation (moving operation) of the electronic component holding tape by the component supply device 100a. The component supply control unit 64 executes various operations based on instructions from the control unit 60 . The component supply control unit 64 controls the movement of the electronic component holding tape or the electronic component holding tape by controlling the pulling operation of the electronic component holding tape or the electronic component holding tape.
下面,使用图12至图24,对部件供给装置100进行说明。部件供给装置100如上述所示,是将径向引线型电子部件向保持位置供给的径向供给器。首先,使用图12及图13,对电子部件保持带进行说明。图12是表示电子部件保持带的一个例子的概略结构的示意图。图13是表示电子部件保持带的其他概略结构例的示意图。Next, the component supply apparatus 100 will be described using FIGS. 12 to 24 . The component supply device 100 is a radial feeder that supplies radial lead type electronic components to holding positions as described above. First, the electronic component holding tape will be described using FIGS. 12 and 13 . FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of an example of an electronic component holding tape. Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram showing another schematic configuration example of the electronic component holding tape.
图12所示的电子部件保持带(径向部件保持带)70具有:保持带主体72;以及多个电子部件(径向引线型电子部件、径向引线部件)80,其保持在保持带主体72上。保持带主体72通过将第1保持带74和与第1保持带74相比宽度较窄的第2保持带76贴合而形成。另外,保持带主体72沿延伸方向以固定间隔形成有作为进给孔的孔78。即,保持带主体72沿延伸方向以直列状形成有多个孔78。The electronic component holding tape (radial component holding tape) 70 shown in FIG. 12 has: a holding tape main body 72; 72 on. The holding belt body 72 is formed by laminating a first holding belt 74 and a second holding belt 76 narrower than the first holding belt 74 . In addition, the holding belt main body 72 is formed with holes 78 as feed holes at regular intervals in the extending direction. That is, the holding belt main body 72 has a plurality of holes 78 formed in a row along the extending direction.
电子部件80具有:电子部件主体(以下简称为“主体”)82;以及2根引线84,其沿主体82的半径方向配置。电子部件80的引线84夹持在第1保持带74和第2保持带76之间而固定。由此,电子部件80通过将引线84夹持在第1保持带74和第2保持带76之间而固定,从而固定在保持带主体72的规定位置处。另外,对于多个电子部件80,在2根引线84之间配置孔78,从而分别固定在保持带主体72的形成有孔78的位置上。即,电子部件80以与孔78相同的进给间距P的间隔而配置在与保持带的延伸方向上的位置相同的位置处。此外,电子部件80只要其形状为具有夹持在保持带主体72的第1保持带74和第2保持带76之间的引线即可,引线以及主体的形状、种类不特别地限定。The electronic component 80 has: an electronic component main body (hereinafter simply referred to as “main body”) 82 ; and two lead wires 84 arranged along the radial direction of the main body 82 . The lead wire 84 of the electronic component 80 is clamped and fixed between the 1st holding tape 74 and the 2nd holding tape 76. As shown in FIG. Thus, the electronic component 80 is fixed at a predetermined position of the holding tape main body 72 by pinching and fixing the lead wire 84 between the first holding tape 74 and the second holding tape 76 . In addition, the plurality of electronic components 80 are fixed to positions where the holes 78 are formed in the holding tape main body 72 by disposing the holes 78 between the two lead wires 84 . That is, the electronic components 80 are arranged at the same positions as the positions in the extending direction of the holding tape at intervals of the same feed pitch P as the holes 78 . The electronic component 80 is only required to have a lead pinched between the first holding tape 74 and the second holding tape 76 of the holding tape main body 72 , and the shape and type of the lead wire and the main body are not particularly limited.
下面,图13所示的电子部件保持带70a具有:保持带主体72;以及多个电子部件(径向引线型电子部件)80,其保持在保持带主体72上。此外,电子部件保持带70a仅电子部件80和孔78之间的相对位置关系不同,其他结构与电子部件保持带70相同。电子部件保持带70a将电子部件80的2根引线84配置在保持带主体72的孔78和孔78之间。即,电子部件80配置为,间隔与孔78的进给间距P相同,且其在保持带的延伸方向上的位置位于偏移了配置间隔的一半的位置。即,电子部件80配置在相对于孔78偏移了一半间距量的位置上。Next, an electronic component holding tape 70 a shown in FIG. 13 has: a holding tape main body 72 ; and a plurality of electronic components (radial lead type electronic components) 80 held on the holding tape main body 72 . In addition, the electronic component holding tape 70 a differs only in the relative positional relationship between the electronic component 80 and the hole 78 , and is the same as the electronic component holding tape 70 in other configurations. The electronic component holding tape 70 a arranges two lead wires 84 of the electronic component 80 between the hole 78 and the hole 78 of the holding tape main body 72 . That is, the electronic components 80 are arranged at the same pitch as the feeding pitch P of the holes 78 , and their positions in the extending direction of the holding tape are shifted by half of the arrangement interval. That is, the electronic component 80 is arranged at a position shifted by half the pitch from the hole 78 .
电子部件保持带如图12和图13所示,存在保持带的延伸方向上的孔78和电子部件80之间的相对位置关系不同的种类。As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 , the electronic component holding tape has different types in which the relative positional relationship between the hole 78 and the electronic component 80 in the extending direction of the holding tape is different.
下面,图14是表示后侧的部件供给单元的电子部件供给装置的概略结构的斜视图。图15是从与图14不同的方向观察图14所示的电子部件供给装置的斜视图。图16是表示部件供给单元的电子部件供给装置的概略结构的说明图。如图14至图16所示,电子部件供给装置(部件供给装置)100具有:框体110,其对其他各部分进行保持,对电子部件保持带进行引导;夹持单元112,其与后侧收容器46连结;供给器单元114,其对电子部件保持带进行输送;切断单元116,其将保持在电子部件保持带中的电子部件的引线切断;以及空气压力调整部118,其对供给器单元114的驱动部和切断单元116的驱动部的空气压力进行调整,对各部分的驱动进行控制。Next, FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the electronic component supply device of the component supply unit on the rear side. Fig. 15 is a perspective view of the electronic component supply device shown in Fig. 14 viewed from a different direction from Fig. 14 . 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of an electronic component supply device of a component supply unit. As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 , the electronic component supply device (component supply device) 100 has: a housing 110 that holds other parts and guides the electronic component holding tape; The container 46 is connected; the feeder unit 114, which conveys the electronic component holding tape; the cutting unit 116, which cuts off the leads of the electronic components held in the electronic component holding tape; The air pressure of the driving part of the unit 114 and the driving part of the cutting unit 116 is adjusted to control the driving of each part.
框体110是纵向细长的中空箱体,内部保持夹持单元112、供给器单元114、切断单元116以及空气压力调整部118。框体110设置有引导槽120、引导部122、排出部126、抓持部128以及凸起部129。引导槽120具有将框体110的铅垂方向上侧的细长表面的沿长度方向形成的2根直线的一侧端部连结的形状。即,引导槽120形成为从框体110的一侧端部向另一侧端部附近延伸,在另一侧端部附近折回,并延伸至一侧端部的U字形状。引导槽120是对电子部件保持带进行引导的槽,从U字形状的一侧端部(供给侧的端部)供给电子部件保持带。引导槽120使所供给的电子部件保持带沿U字形状移动,从U字形状的一侧端部(排出侧的端部)排出。另外,引导槽120以在保持带主体72位于框体110的内部、且电子部件向框体110的外部露出的状态,对电子部件保持带进行引导。The frame body 110 is a vertically elongated hollow box, and holds the clamping unit 112 , the feeder unit 114 , the cutting unit 116 , and the air pressure regulator 118 inside. The frame body 110 is provided with a guiding groove 120 , a guiding portion 122 , a discharge portion 126 , a gripping portion 128 and a protruding portion 129 . The guide groove 120 has a shape that connects one side ends of two straight lines formed along the longitudinal direction of the vertically upper elongated surface of the frame body 110 . That is, the guide groove 120 is formed in a U-shape extending from one end of the frame body 110 to the vicinity of the other end, turning back near the other end, and extending to the one end. The guide groove 120 is a groove for guiding the electronic component holding tape, and the electronic component holding tape is supplied from one end portion (end portion on the supply side) of the U-shape. The guide groove 120 moves the supplied electronic component holding tape along the U-shape, and is discharged from one end of the U-shape (the end on the discharge side). In addition, the guide groove 120 guides the electronic component holding tape in a state where the holding tape main body 72 is located inside the housing 110 and the electronic components are exposed to the outside of the housing 110 .
引导部122与引导槽120的供给侧的端部连结,将保持有电子部件的状态下的电子部件保持带向引导槽120引导。排出部126与引导槽120的排出侧的端部连结,将在框体110内移动并将电子部件向搭载头15供给后的部分从电子部件保持带中排出。抓持部128是在电子部件供给装置100输送时等由操作人员抓持的部分。凸起部129是向上述的后侧收容器46的第1固定板46a的孔中插入的凸起。The guide portion 122 is connected to the supply-side end portion of the guide groove 120 , and guides the electronic component holding tape holding the electronic component toward the guide groove 120 . The ejection unit 126 is connected to the end of the guide groove 120 on the ejection side, and ejects the portion of the electronic component that has moved in the housing 110 and supplied the electronic component to the mounting head 15 from the electronic component holding tape. The grip portion 128 is a portion that is gripped by an operator when the electronic component supply apparatus 100 is conveyed. The boss portion 129 is a protrusion inserted into the hole of the first fixing plate 46 a of the above-mentioned rear side container 46 .
下面,在图14至图16的基础上,使用图17对夹持单元进行说明。在这里,图17是表示电子部件供给装置的夹持单元的概略结构的说明图。夹持单元112是与后侧收容器46连结的机构。夹持单元112具有连结部132、传动部134、弹性部136以及杆138。Next, on the basis of FIGS. 14 to 16 , the holding unit will be described using FIG. 17 . Here, FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a holding unit of the electronic component supply apparatus. The holding unit 112 is a mechanism connected to the rear container 46 . The clamping unit 112 has a connecting part 132 , a transmission part 134 , an elastic part 136 and a rod 138 .
连结部132是在与后侧收容器46连结时与后侧收容器46接触的部分,向框体110外露出。此外,连结部132配置在与框体110的形成有引导槽120的面相反侧的面上。连结部132在铅垂方向下侧的端部上,设置有咬合部133。咬合部133与后侧收容器46的锁止轴46c连结。传动部134与连结部132的咬合部133、弹性部136、杆138连结,将从杆138、弹性部136施加的力向连结部132传递。弹性部136的一侧端部固定在框体110上,另一侧端部固定在传动部134上。弹性部136是弹簧等部件,对传动部134施加将其向固定在框体110上的一侧拉伸的力。由此,传动部134成为与弹性部136连结的部分被向规定方向拉伸的状态。杆138的一侧端部向框体110的外部露出,另一侧端部与传动部134连结。杆138的固定轴139固定在框体110上。由此,如果操作人员对杆138向框体110外部露出的一侧端部进行操作,则以固定轴139为轴,使与传动部134连结侧的端部移动。由此,使传动部134移动,向连结部132作用规定的力,使咬合部133动作。夹持单元112为上述结构,通过操作人员对杆138的操作,从而在使咬合部133与后侧收容器46的锁止轴46c连结并固定于后侧收容器46上的状态、以及咬合部133不与锁止轴46c连结而被释放的状态之间进行切换。The connecting portion 132 is a portion that contacts the rear container 46 when it is connected to the rear container 46 , and is exposed to the outside of the housing 110 . In addition, the connecting portion 132 is arranged on the surface of the housing 110 opposite to the surface on which the guide groove 120 is formed. The coupling portion 132 is provided with an engaging portion 133 at the end portion on the lower side in the vertical direction. The engaging portion 133 is connected to the lock shaft 46 c of the rear container 46 . The transmission part 134 is connected to the engaging part 133 , the elastic part 136 , and the rod 138 of the connecting part 132 , and transmits the force applied from the rod 138 and the elastic part 136 to the connecting part 132 . One end of the elastic part 136 is fixed on the frame body 110 , and the other end is fixed on the transmission part 134 . The elastic part 136 is a member such as a spring, and applies force to the transmission part 134 to stretch it toward the side fixed to the frame body 110 . Thereby, the transmission part 134 will be in the state where the part connected with the elastic part 136 is stretched in a predetermined direction. One end of the rod 138 is exposed to the outside of the housing 110 , and the other end is connected to the transmission unit 134 . The fixed shaft 139 of the rod 138 is fixed on the frame body 110 . Thus, when the operator operates the end portion of the lever 138 exposed to the outside of the housing 110 , the end portion connected to the transmission unit 134 moves around the fixed shaft 139 . Thereby, the transmission part 134 is moved, a predetermined force acts on the connection part 132, and the engaging part 133 is operated. The clamping unit 112 has the above-mentioned structure, and when the operator operates the lever 138, the engaging portion 133 is connected to the locking shaft 46c of the rear container 46 and fixed to the rear container 46, and the engaging portion 133 is switched between the released state without being connected to the lock shaft 46c.
下面,在图14至图16的基础上,使用图18至图21,对供给器单元进行说明。在这里,图18是表示电子部件供给装置的供给器单元的概略结构的说明图。图19是表示供给器单元的前端支撑部的概略结构的说明图。图20是表示供给器单元的保持带进给爪单元的概略结构的说明图。图21是用于说明供给器单元的动作的说明图。供给器单元114是对电子部件保持带进行输送,即,使沿引导槽120被引导的电子部件保持带移动的机构。供给器单元114具有支撑部142、驱动部144、前端支撑部146以及保持带进给爪单元148。另外,在本实施方式中,前端支撑部146和保持带进给爪单元148成为对保持带进给爪单元148和框体110之间的相对位置进行调整的位置调整机构。Next, the feeder unit will be described using FIGS. 18 to 21 on the basis of FIGS. 14 to 16 . Here, FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a feeder unit of the electronic component supply apparatus. Fig. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a front end support portion of the feeder unit. Fig. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a holding tape feed claw unit of the feeder unit. Fig. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the feeder unit. The feeder unit 114 is a mechanism that conveys the electronic component holding tape, that is, moves the electronic component holding tape guided along the guide groove 120 . The feeder unit 114 has a support portion 142 , a drive portion 144 , a front end support portion 146 , and a holding tape feeding claw unit 148 . In addition, in the present embodiment, the front end support portion 146 and the holding tape feed claw unit 148 serve as a position adjustment mechanism for adjusting the relative position between the holding tape feed claw unit 148 and the housing 110 .
支撑部142是固定在框体110上的部件,对驱动部144进行支撑。驱动部144具有固定部144a和可动部144b。驱动部144是利用空气压力使可动部144b的从固定部144a露出的部分伸缩的气缸。驱动部144使可动部144b的前端在引导槽120的直线部的延伸方向上,在规定的距离范围内至少与进给间距相对应地往复移动。即,驱动部144使可动部144b的前端至少以与保持带的进给间距(孔78的间距P)相对应的距离往复移动。前端支撑部146固定在驱动部144的可动部144b的前端。前端支撑部146与可动部144b的往复移动一体地往复移动。另外,如图19所示,前端支撑部146为铅垂方向上侧的面,在与保持带进给爪单元148连结的部分处,具有螺钉孔149a、149b、149c、149d这4个螺钉孔。这4个螺钉孔149a、149b、149c、149d形成在保持带进给方向上的位置不同的4个部位。在这里,前端支撑部146的螺钉孔149a和螺钉孔149b之间的距离为上述保持带主体72的孔78的间距P的一半的距离。即,螺钉孔149a和螺钉孔149b形成在偏移了孔78的配置间隔的一半间距量的位置上。另外,在前端支撑部146上,螺钉孔149c和螺钉孔149d之间的距离为上述保持带主体72的孔78的间距P的一半的距离。即,螺钉孔149c和螺钉孔149d形成在偏移了孔78的配置间隔的一半间距量的位置上。The supporting part 142 is a member fixed to the frame body 110 and supports the driving part 144 . The driving part 144 has a fixed part 144a and a movable part 144b. The driving unit 144 is an air cylinder that expands and contracts the portion of the movable unit 144b exposed from the fixed unit 144a by air pressure. The driving part 144 reciprocates the tip of the movable part 144 b within a predetermined distance range in the extending direction of the linear part of the guide groove 120 at least corresponding to the feeding pitch. That is, the drive part 144 reciprocates the front end of the movable part 144 b at least by a distance corresponding to the feeding pitch of the holding tape (the pitch P of the holes 78 ). The front end support portion 146 is fixed to the front end of the movable portion 144 b of the driving portion 144 . The front-end support part 146 reciprocates integrally with the reciprocating movement of the movable part 144b. In addition, as shown in FIG. 19 , the front end support portion 146 is an upper surface in the vertical direction, and has four screw holes 149 a , 149 b , 149 c , and 149 d at the portion connected to the holding belt feed claw unit 148 . . These four screw holes 149a, 149b, 149c, and 149d are formed at four locations where the positions in the feeding direction of the holding tape are different. Here, the distance between the screw hole 149 a and the screw hole 149 b of the front end support portion 146 is half the distance P of the above-mentioned pitch P of the holes 78 of the holding belt main body 72 . That is, the screw holes 149 a and the screw holes 149 b are formed at positions shifted by a half pitch of the arrangement interval of the holes 78 . In addition, in the front end support portion 146 , the distance between the screw hole 149 c and the screw hole 149 d is half the distance P of the above-mentioned pitch P of the holes 78 holding the belt main body 72 . That is, the screw holes 149c and the screw holes 149d are formed at positions shifted by a half pitch of the arrangement interval of the holes 78 .
保持带进给爪单元148固定在前端支撑部146上。保持带进给爪单元148具有安装台150、进给爪152、销154以及弹簧156。安装台150是对进给爪152、销154、弹簧156进行支撑的基座。安装台150具有与保持带进给方向正交的剖面为L字状的弯折后的板形状,铅垂方向上侧的一部分从框体110露出。安装台150的露出的部分中设置有可以由操作人员抓持的抓持部158。操作人员根据需要对抓持部158进行抓持而操作,从而可以使保持带进给爪单元148向保持带进给方向移动。安装台150是与前端支撑部146连接的部件,利用2个固定螺钉159固定在前端支撑部146上。在这里,在安装台150上,使2个固定螺钉159插入的孔的间隔,与螺钉孔149a和螺钉孔149c之间的间隔以及螺钉孔149b和螺钉孔149d之间的间隔相同。即,前端支撑部146在保持带进给方向上的不同位置上,具有多组与向保持带进给爪单元148的安装台150插入的固定螺钉(螺钉)159的配置间距相同的螺钉孔的组合。由此,对于安装台150,通过对插入固定螺钉159的螺钉孔进行切换,从而可以使安装台150和前端支撑部146之间的相对位置偏移间距量的一半。The holding tape feed claw unit 148 is fixed on the front end support portion 146 . The holding tape feed claw unit 148 has a mount 150 , a feed claw 152 , a pin 154 , and a spring 156 . The mount 150 is a base that supports the feed claw 152 , the pin 154 , and the spring 156 . The mounting table 150 has a bent plate shape with an L-shaped cross section perpendicular to the feeding direction of the holding belt, and a part of the upper side in the vertical direction is exposed from the frame body 110 . A gripping portion 158 that can be gripped by an operator is provided in the exposed portion of the mounting table 150 . The operator can move the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 in the holding tape feeding direction by gripping and operating the gripping portion 158 as necessary. The mounting table 150 is a member connected to the front end support portion 146 and is fixed to the front end support portion 146 by two fixing screws 159 . Here, in the mounting table 150, the distance between the holes into which the two fixing screws 159 are inserted is the same as the distance between the screw hole 149a and the screw hole 149c and the distance between the screw hole 149b and the screw hole 149d. That is, the front end support portion 146 has a plurality of sets of screw holes at different positions in the holding tape feeding direction at the same arrangement pitch as the fixing screws (screws) 159 inserted into the mounting table 150 of the holding tape feeding claw unit 148. combination. Thus, by switching the screw holes for inserting the fixing screws 159 in the mounting table 150 , the relative position between the mounting table 150 and the front end support portion 146 can be shifted by half of the pitch.
进给爪152是具有在棒状部件的一侧端部凸出的凸部152a的部件。进给爪152配置在与电子部件保持带(以下简称为“保持带”)70的保持带主体72的孔相对的位置上,凸部152a的形状为,在保持带进给方向的进给方向下游侧(进给方向的前侧)的面152b成为与进给方向正交的面,在保持带进给方向的进给方向上游侧(进给方向的后侧)的面152c成为相对于与进给方向正交的面倾斜的面,随着接近保持带70而使进给方向的宽度变窄。进给爪152在与凸部152a相对的位置处有孔78的情况下,如图20所示,成为凸部152a插入至孔78中的状态。销154对进给爪152的没有形成凸部152a的一侧端部,以可沿与纸面平行的方向旋转的方式进行支撑。弹簧156的一侧端部固定在安装台150的凸出面150a上,另一侧端部固定在进给爪152上。弹簧156在进给爪152的凸部152a与孔78之外的部分相对的情况下,将进给爪152向保持带侧按压。The feed claw 152 is a member having a convex portion 152a protruding from one end portion of a rod-shaped member. The feed claw 152 is arranged at a position facing the hole of the holding tape main body 72 of the electronic component holding tape (hereinafter simply referred to as "holding tape") 70, and the shape of the protrusion 152a is such that it is in the feeding direction of the holding tape feeding direction. The surface 152b on the downstream side (the front side in the feeding direction) becomes a surface perpendicular to the feeding direction, and the surface 152c on the upstream side (the rear side in the feeding direction) in the holding tape feeding direction becomes a surface opposite to the feeding direction. The inclined surface perpendicular to the feeding direction narrows the width in the feeding direction as it approaches the holding belt 70 . When the feed claw 152 has the hole 78 at a position facing the convex portion 152a, the convex portion 152a is inserted into the hole 78 as shown in FIG. 20 . The pin 154 rotatably supports the end portion of the feed claw 152 on the side where the convex portion 152 a is not formed in a direction parallel to the paper surface. One end of the spring 156 is fixed to the protruding surface 150 a of the mount 150 , and the other end is fixed to the feed claw 152 . The spring 156 presses the feed claw 152 toward the side holding the tape when the convex portion 152 a of the feed claw 152 faces a portion other than the hole 78 .
下面,使用图21,对供给器单元114的保持带进给动作进行说明。此外,在图21所示的例子(步骤S1~S4)中,将保持带主体72上形成的孔,以位于保持带进给方向的下游侧的孔先向框体110供给,并先从框体110的排出的顺序,依次设为78、78a、78b、78c。在步骤S1中,进给爪152的凸部152a插入至保持带主体72的孔78a中。供给器单元114在如步骤S1所示凸部152a插入至孔78a中的状态下,使驱动部144驱动,使保持带进给爪单元148沿保持带进给方向移动与保持带主体72的1个孔间距对应的量。Next, the holding tape feeding operation of the feeder unit 114 will be described using FIG. 21 . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 21 (steps S1 to S4), the holes formed on the holding tape main body 72 are supplied to the frame body 110 with the holes located on the downstream side in the feeding direction of the holding tape, and are first fed from the frame body 110. The order of discharge of the body 110 is sequentially referred to as 78, 78a, 78b, and 78c. In step S1 , the convex portion 152 a of the feed claw 152 is inserted into the hole 78 a of the holding belt main body 72 . The feeder unit 114 drives the drive unit 144 in a state where the convex portion 152a is inserted into the hole 78a as shown in step S1, so that the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 moves along the holding tape feeding direction to 1 of the holding tape main body 72. The amount corresponding to the hole spacing.
如果供给器单元114在步骤S1的状态下,将保持带进给爪单元148沿保持带进给方向输送,则利用凸部152a的与进给方向正交的面,将孔78a向保持带进给方向推压,如步骤S2所示,保持带进给爪单元148和保持带主体72均沿保持带进给方向移动。供给器单元114通过使保持带主体72沿保持带进给方向移动,从而使保持带的电子部件向保持位置移动。If the feeder unit 114 is in the state of step S1, and the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 is conveyed along the holding tape feeding direction, the hole 78a is moved toward the holding tape by using the surface of the convex portion 152a perpendicular to the feeding direction. Pushing in this direction, as shown in step S2, both the holding tape feed claw unit 148 and the holding tape main body 72 move in the holding tape feeding direction. The feeder unit 114 moves the electronic components of the holding tape to the holding position by moving the holding tape main body 72 in the holding tape feeding direction.
如果使保持带进给爪单元148沿保持带进给方向的移动结束(步骤S2),则供给器单元114使保持带主体72中保持的前端的电子部件处于保持位置而待机。此时,位于保持位置(保持区域)的电子部件如后述所示,电子部件主体被夹持,并利用切断器将引线切断。然后,在电子部件安装装置侧执行规定的处理后,发出驱动指令。例如,在利用搭载头的吸附吸嘴吸附或者利用抓持吸嘴抓持保持带所保持的上述保持位置的电子部件后,向电子部件供给装置发送夹持释放指令,使电子部件供给装置释放对电子部件的夹持。然后,在通过使吸嘴上升而使吸嘴上所保持的电子部件升高后,向供给器单元114发送驱动指令。在发出驱动指令后,供给器单元114使驱动部144进行驱动,使保持带进给爪单元148沿与保持带进给方向相反的方向移动与保持带主体72的1个孔间距对应的量。如果供给器单元114在步骤S2的状态下,将保持带进给爪单元148向与保持带进给方向相反的一侧输送,则凸部152a的倾斜的面与孔78a接触,凸部152a沿着倾斜面向从孔78a中拔出的方向移动。由此,供给器单元114如步骤S3所示,使凸部152a从孔78a中脱离(步骤S3),保持带不移动,保持带进给爪单元148向与保持带进给方向相反的一侧移动。When the movement of the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 in the holding tape feeding direction is completed (step S2 ), the feeder unit 114 waits for the electronic component at the tip held in the holding tape main body 72 to be held at the holding position. At this time, the electronic component located at the holding position (holding area) is sandwiched by the main body of the electronic component as will be described later, and the lead wires are cut by the cutter. Then, after predetermined processing is executed on the side of the electronic component mounting apparatus, a drive command is issued. For example, after the electronic component at the above-mentioned holding position held by the holding tape is sucked by the suction nozzle of the mounting head or grasped by the gripping nozzle, a clamp release command is sent to the electronic component supply device, so that the electronic component supply device releases the electronic component. Clamping of electronic components. Then, after the electronic component held on the suction nozzle is raised by raising the suction nozzle, a drive command is sent to the feeder unit 114 . After issuing the drive command, the feeder unit 114 drives the driving unit 144 to move the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 by an amount corresponding to one hole pitch of the holding tape main body 72 in a direction opposite to the holding tape feeding direction. If the feeder unit 114 is in the state of step S2, and the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 is conveyed to the side opposite to the holding tape feeding direction, the inclined surface of the convex portion 152a contacts the hole 78a, and the convex portion 152a moves along the hole 78a. The inclined surface moves in the direction of pulling out from the hole 78a. Thus, the feeder unit 114 disengages the convex portion 152a from the hole 78a as shown in step S3 (step S3), the holding tape does not move, and the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 moves to the side opposite to the holding tape feeding direction. move.
然后,在供给器单元114从步骤S2所示的状态开始,使保持带进给爪单元148沿与保持带进给方向相反的方向移动与保持带主体72的1个孔间距对应的量之后,如步骤S4所示,成为凸部152a插入与孔78a相比位于1个间距量的上游侧的孔78b中的状态。此时,由于进给爪152被弹簧156向孔78b的方向按压,所以可靠地使凸部152a向孔78b中插入。然后,驱动部144立即沿保持带进给方向进行驱动,将保持带主体72中保持的下一个电子部件向保持位置输送。Then, after the feeder unit 114 moves the holding tape feed claw unit 148 by an amount corresponding to one hole pitch of the holding tape main body 72 in the direction opposite to the holding tape feeding direction from the state shown in step S2, As shown in step S4, the convex part 152a will be in the state inserted into the hole 78b located on the upstream side by 1 pitch rather than the hole 78a. At this time, since the feed claw 152 is pressed toward the hole 78b by the spring 156, the protrusion 152a is reliably inserted into the hole 78b. Immediately thereafter, the driving unit 144 is driven in the holding tape feeding direction to convey the next electronic component held in the holding tape main body 72 to the holding position.
供给器单元114如上述所示,通过利用驱动部144使保持带进给爪单元148以与保持带主体72的1个孔间距对应的量沿进给方向往复运动,从而可以使保持带沿进给方向顺次移动1个间距量。As described above, the feeder unit 114 reciprocates the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 in the feeding direction by the driving unit 144 by an amount corresponding to the pitch of one hole of the holding tape main body 72, so that the holding tape can be moved along the feeding direction. Move the direction by 1 spacing amount in sequence.
下面,在图14至图16的基础上,使用图22至图24,对切断单元进行说明。图22是表示电子部件供给装置的切断单元的概略结构的说明图。图23是表示电子部件供给装置的切断单元的概略结构的说明图。图24是表示电子部件供给装置的切断单元的概略结构的说明图。切断单元116将电子部件保持带所保持的电子部件的引线切断。另外,切断单元116夹持即保持引线被切断后的电子部件,直至电子部件被吸嘴吸附(保持)为止。切断单元116具有支撑部162、驱动部164、传动部166、切断部168以及罩169。Next, the cutting unit will be described using FIGS. 22 to 24 on the basis of FIGS. 14 to 16 . 22 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cutting unit of the electronic component supply device. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cutting unit of the electronic component supply device. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cutting unit of the electronic component supply apparatus. The cutting unit 116 cuts the leads of the electronic components held by the electronic component holding tape. In addition, the cutting unit 116 clamps, that is, holds, the electronic component whose lead wire has been cut until the electronic component is sucked (held) by the suction nozzle. The cutting unit 116 has a support portion 162 , a drive portion 164 , a transmission portion 166 , a cutting portion 168 , and a cover 169 .
支撑部162是固定在框体110上的部件,对驱动部164和传动部166进行支撑。另外,支撑部162经由传动部166对切断部168进行支撑。驱动部164具有固定部164a和可动部164b。驱动部164是利用空气压力使可动部164b的从固定部164a露出的部分伸缩的气缸。驱动部164使可动部164b的前端在引导槽120的直线部的延伸方向上,在规定的距离范围内往复移动。传动部166是将通过可动部164b的往复移动而产生的动力向切断部168传递的传递机构。传动部166将可动部164b的向保持带进给方向的往复移动,变换为与保持带进给方向正交的方向的运动,使切断部168沿与保持带进给方向正交的方向移动。传动部166使隔着保持带的通过区域而配置的前端部166a和前端部166b,向彼此接近的方向或者彼此远离的方向、即箭头170所示的方向移动。本实施方式的传动部166,在驱动部164的可动部164b沿伸出方向移动的情况下,使前端部166a和前端部166b向彼此接近的方向移动。传动部166在驱动部164的可动部164b向收缩方向移动的情况下,使前端部166a和前端部166b向彼此远离的方向移动。The supporting part 162 is a component fixed on the frame body 110 and supports the driving part 164 and the transmission part 166 . In addition, the support part 162 supports the cutting part 168 via the transmission part 166 . The driving part 164 has a fixed part 164a and a movable part 164b. The driving unit 164 is an air cylinder that expands and contracts the portion of the movable unit 164b exposed from the fixed unit 164a by air pressure. The driving unit 164 reciprocates the front end of the movable unit 164 b within a predetermined distance in the direction in which the linear portion of the guide groove 120 extends. The transmission unit 166 is a transmission mechanism that transmits power generated by the reciprocating movement of the movable unit 164 b to the cutting unit 168 . The transmission part 166 converts the reciprocating movement of the movable part 164b in the feeding direction of the holding tape into a motion in a direction perpendicular to the feeding direction of the holding tape, and moves the cutting part 168 in a direction perpendicular to the feeding direction of the holding tape. . The transmission part 166 moves the front end part 166a and the front end part 166b disposed across the passing region of the holding belt in a direction to approach each other or a direction to move away from each other, that is, a direction indicated by an arrow 170 . The transmission part 166 of this embodiment moves the front-end|tip part 166a and the front-end|tip part 166b to approach each other when the movable part 164b of the drive part 164 moves in the extension direction. The transmission part 166 moves the front-end part 166a and the front-end part 166b in the direction which mutually separates, when the movable part 164b of the drive part 164 moves to the contraction direction.
切断部168配置在保持区域上,对保持区域上配置的电子部件的主体进行保持,然后,将电子部件的引线在主体和保持带主体之间进行切断,然后,维持对电子部件进行保持的状态。切断部168具有第1刃部168a和第2刃部168b。切断部168配置在使第1刃部168a和第2刃部168b彼此相对的位置上。另外,保持带配置在第1刃部168a和第2刃部168b之间,保持带上所保持的电子部件的引线通过被第1刃部168a和第2刃部168b夹持的位置。第1刃部168a如图24所示,与传动部166的前端部166a连结,如果前端部166a向第2刃部168b侧移动,则与前端部166a一起向第2刃部168b侧移动。第2刃部168b如图24所示,与传动部166的前端部166b连结,如果前端部166b向第1刃部168a侧移动,则与前端部166b一起向第1刃部168a侧移动。另外,第1刃部168a经由弹簧与前端部166a连结,由前端部166a向第2刃部168b侧按压。The cutting part 168 is arranged on the holding area, holds the main body of the electronic component arranged on the holding area, then cuts the lead wire of the electronic component between the main body and the main body of the holding tape, and then maintains the held state of the electronic component . The cutting part 168 has the 1st blade part 168a and the 2nd blade part 168b. The cutting portion 168 is arranged at a position where the first blade portion 168a and the second blade portion 168b face each other. In addition, the holding tape is arranged between the first blade 168a and the second blade 168b, and the lead wires of the electronic components held on the holding tape pass through the positions sandwiched between the first blade 168a and the second blade 168b. As shown in FIG. 24, the first blade portion 168a is connected to the front end portion 166a of the transmission portion 166, and when the front end portion 166a moves toward the second blade portion 168b side, it moves toward the second blade portion 168b side together with the front end portion 166a. The second blade portion 168b is connected to the front end portion 166b of the transmission portion 166 as shown in FIG. Moreover, the 1st blade part 168a is connected with the front-end|tip part 166a via the spring, and is pressed toward the 2nd blade part 168b side from the front-end part 166a.
罩169是固定在框体110上的部件。罩169配置在第1刃部168a的周围,第1刃部168a与第2刃部168b接触的面成为开口。另外,罩169经由弹簧与前端部166a连接,将前端部166a向与第2刃部168b远离的一侧按压。由此,前端部166a在没有向第2刃部168b侧按压的情况下,可以向第1刃部168a施加远离第2刃部168b的方向的力。The cover 169 is a member fixed to the frame body 110 . The cover 169 is arranged around the first blade portion 168a, and the surface where the first blade portion 168a contacts the second blade portion 168b becomes an opening. Moreover, the cover 169 is connected to the front-end|tip part 166a via a spring, and presses the front-end|tip part 166a to the side apart from the 2nd blade part 168b. Thereby, when the front-end|tip part 166a is not pressed to the side of the 2nd blade part 168b, the force of the direction away from the 2nd blade part 168b can be applied to the 1st blade part 168a.
切断单元116具有上述结构,通过利用驱动部164使切断部168的可动侧的第1刃部168a和固定侧的第2刃部168b接近,从侧方对电子部件的主体进行支撑,并进一步通过使切断部168的可动侧的第1刃部168a和固定侧的第2刃部168b接近而接触,从而可以将配置在可动侧的第1刃部168a和固定侧的第2刃部168b之间的引线切断。另外,切断单元116在将引线切断后,通过维持第1刃部168a和第2刃部168b接触的状态,从而可以从侧方对从保持带主体切断的电子部件的主体进行支撑。即,可以将引线切断并夹持从保持带主体分离的电子部件。此外,切断单元116也可以使切断电子部件引线的机构和对切断后的电子部件(电子部件的主体)进行夹持(支撑)的机构以单独的机构形成。The cutting unit 116 has the above-mentioned structure, and the first blade portion 168a on the movable side of the cutting portion 168 and the second blade portion 168b on the fixed side are approached by the driving portion 164 to support the main body of the electronic component from the side, and further By bringing the movable-side first blade 168a of the cutting portion 168 into contact with the fixed-side second blade 168b, it is possible to arrange the movable-side first blade 168a and the fixed-side second blade. 168b between leads cut. In addition, the cutting unit 116 can support the main body of the electronic component cut from the holding tape main body from the side by maintaining the contact state between the first blade portion 168a and the second blade portion 168b after cutting the lead wire. That is, the lead wire can be cut and the electronic component separated from the holding tape main body can be sandwiched. In addition, the cutting unit 116 may have a mechanism for cutting the leads of the electronic component and a mechanism for clamping (supporting) the cut electronic component (main body of the electronic component) as separate mechanisms.
在这里,对切断单元116切断的引线的切断位置进行说明。在具有现有的基板插入用的引线型电子部件专用搭载头的安装装置中,在与固定引线的保持带接近的引线前端侧进行切断,将非常长的引线插入基板中。其原因在于,现有的安装装置在搭载头侧具有引线切断部和引线抓持部,在利用引线抓持部对引线的根部进行抓持后将其下方切断(预切断),所以切断后的引线变长。另外,其原因在于,现有的安装装置由于在向插入孔中插入引线时,由引导销引导而插入,所以即使引线较长,也不会妨碍向基板插入。另外,其原因在于,现有的安装装置为了利用在基板背面将引线切断(正式切断)为所需长度并弯折的引线弯折装置执行后续处理,而在用于从上述部件保持带中切断引线的预切断时,需要引线保留较长的长度。Here, the cutting position of the lead wire cut by the cutting unit 116 will be described. In a conventional mounting apparatus having a lead-type electronic component dedicated mounting head for inserting a substrate, cutting is performed at the leading end side of the lead close to the holding tape for fixing the lead, and a very long lead is inserted into the substrate. The reason for this is that the conventional mounting device has a lead wire cutting part and a lead wire gripping part on the side of the mounting head. The lead wire becomes longer. In addition, this is because the lead wire is inserted into the insertion hole in the conventional mounting device while being guided by the guide pin, so even if the lead wire is long, it does not interfere with insertion into the substrate. In addition, the reason for this is that in the conventional mounting apparatus, in order to perform post-processing using a lead bending device that cuts (actually cuts) the lead wires to a desired length on the backside of the board and bends them, the lead wires are cut from the above-mentioned component holding tape. When pre-cutting the lead wire, it is necessary to keep the lead wire longer.
与此相对,切断单元116使得径向引线型电子部件的引线的切断长度成为下述规定长度,即,该规定长度使成为与基板厚度相同的长度、或者向基板背面侧凸出的引线不会产生焊接不良,且长度与基板厚度对应。规定长度例如是与基板的插入孔大致相同的长度。更具体地说,是相对于基板的插入孔的长度长出大于或等于0mm而小于或等于3mm的长度。如上述所示,不必如现有技术所示利用搭载头对部件进行预切断,而是构成为利用部件供给装置从一开始就较短地切断至规定长度,从而可以得到下述效果。On the other hand, the cutting unit 116 makes the cutting length of the lead wire of the radial lead type electronic component a predetermined length such that the length is equal to the thickness of the substrate or the lead wire protruding toward the back side of the substrate does not Poor soldering occurs, and the length corresponds to the thickness of the substrate. The predetermined length is, for example, approximately the same length as the insertion hole of the substrate. More specifically, it is a length greater than or equal to 0 mm and less than or equal to 3 mm with respect to the length of the insertion hole of the substrate. As described above, it is not necessary to pre-cut the component by the mounting head as in the prior art, but the component supply device is configured to cut the component shortly from the beginning to a predetermined length, so that the following effects can be obtained.
电子部件安装装置10通过由切断单元116将引线较短地切断,可以在利用吸嘴对位于部件供给装置100的保持位置上的电子部件的主体进行保持时,提高引线间隔的稳定性,可以增加能够将引线插入插入孔中的部件,可以非常高效且高精度地进行安装。In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, the lead wires are cut short by the cutting unit 116. When the main body of the electronic component located in the holding position of the component supply apparatus 100 is held by the suction nozzle, the stability of the lead wire interval can be improved, and the lead wire spacing can be increased. A component capable of inserting lead wires into an insertion hole, allowing for very efficient and high-precision mounting.
另外,在现有的安装装置中,如果相对于预先填充或者涂敷在插入孔中的焊料,插入较长的引线,则有时焊料几乎全部被向引线前端侧挤出,在回流焊接时,熔化的焊料无法上升至插入孔和引线之间的较细间隙中,使得焊接不良。与此相对,在电子部件安装装置10中,由于切断单元116将引线切断得较短,所以熔化的焊料会上升至上述间隙中,可以进行毫无空隙地充满焊料的最佳焊接。并且此时,通过将搭载型电子部件也搭载在涂敷于基板上表面的焊料上,从而还产生下述效果,即,可以通过一次回流焊接工序而同时进行引线型电子部件和搭载型电子部件的搭载。换言之,如果相对于预先填充或者涂敷在插入孔中的焊料插入过长的引线,则焊料几乎全部被向引线前端侧挤出,有时在回流焊接时熔化的焊料无法上升至基板处,即,焊料无法到达基板,焊接不良。与此相对,在上述结构的电子部件安装装置中,通过将引线较短地切断为上述规定长度,从而如果因向插入孔中插入的引线使得从插入孔挤出的一部分焊料成为熔化的状态,则可以上升至上述基板的背面,与基板背面的电极进行焊接。另外,在插入孔(基板孔)的内部也存在电极的情况下,可以使焊料上升至引线和基板内部的电极之间的间隙中而进行焊接。这样,可以机械且电气地进行焊接。In addition, in the conventional mounting device, if a long lead is inserted into the solder pre-filled or applied in the insertion hole, almost all the solder may be extruded toward the leading end side of the lead, and may be melted during reflow soldering. The solder can't rise into the thin gap between the insertion hole and the lead, making the soldering poor. On the other hand, in the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, since the lead wire is cut short by the cutting unit 116, the melted solder rises into the above-mentioned gap, and optimum soldering can be performed without any gaps filled with the solder. And at this time, by also mounting the mount-type electronic component on the solder coated on the upper surface of the substrate, there is also an effect that the lead-type electronic component and the mount-type electronic component can be simultaneously processed through one reflow soldering process. carrying. In other words, if an excessively long lead is inserted with respect to the solder previously filled or applied in the insertion hole, almost all of the solder is squeezed out toward the leading end side of the lead, and sometimes the melted solder cannot rise to the substrate during reflow soldering, that is, The solder cannot reach the substrate, poor soldering. On the other hand, in the electronic component mounting device of the above-mentioned configuration, by cutting the lead wire short to the above-mentioned predetermined length, if a part of the solder extruded from the insertion hole is in a melted state due to the lead wire inserted into the insertion hole, Then it can rise to the back of the above-mentioned substrate and be welded with the electrodes on the back of the substrate. In addition, when electrodes exist in the insertion hole (substrate hole), solder can be raised into the gap between the lead wire and the electrode inside the substrate for soldering. In this way, welding can be performed both mechanically and electrically.
另外,通过将规定的长度设为与基板厚度相同的长度,从而即使向基板上安装径向引线型电子部件,也可以抑制引线从基板(基板的背面)凸出的情况。另外,通过将规定长度设为使向基板背面侧凸出的引线成为不会导致焊接不良的长度,从而即使将引线切断得较短,也可以通过回流处理而将引线良好地固定在基板的插入孔中。In addition, by setting the predetermined length to be equal to the thickness of the substrate, even when radial lead type electronic components are mounted on the substrate, protruding of the leads from the substrate (back surface of the substrate) can be suppressed. In addition, by setting the predetermined length so that the lead protruding toward the back side of the substrate has a length that does not cause soldering failure, even if the lead wire is cut short, the lead wire can be satisfactorily fixed to the insertion point of the substrate by reflow processing. in the hole.
空气压力调整部118对作为供给器单元114的驱动部144的气缸、和作为切断单元116的驱动部164的气缸的空气压力进行调整,对各部分的驱动进行控制。具体地说,空气压力调整部118对驱动部144的可动部144b的伸缩、即位置进行控制,对进给爪152的位置进行控制。另外,空气压力调整部118对驱动部164的可动部164b的伸缩、即位置进行控制,对切断部168的第1刃部168a和第2刃部168b的位置进行控制。此外,空气压力调整部118基于部件供给控制部64的控制,对各部分的空气压力进行控制。The air pressure regulator 118 adjusts the air pressure of the air cylinder serving as the driving unit 144 of the feeder unit 114 and the air cylinder serving as the driving unit 164 of the cutting unit 116 to control the driving of each part. Specifically, the air pressure regulator 118 controls the expansion and contraction of the movable part 144b of the driving part 144 , that is, the position, and controls the position of the feed claw 152 . In addition, the air pressure regulator 118 controls the expansion and contraction, that is, the position, of the movable part 164b of the driving part 164 , and controls the positions of the first blade part 168a and the second blade part 168b of the cutting part 168 . In addition, the air pressure adjustment unit 118 controls the air pressure of each part based on the control of the component supply control unit 64 .
部件供给装置100具有上述结构。部件供给装置100通过构成为,沿保持带进给方向设置多个将保持带进给爪单元148的安装台150安装在前端支撑部146上的位置,可以切换保持带进给爪单元148相对于前端支撑部146进行设置的位置,从而无需更换部件就可以应对保持带主体的孔和电子部件之间的相对位置不同的多种电子部件保持带。即,部件供给装置100通过基于所装入的电子部件保持带的保持带主体的孔和电子部件之间的相对位置,对将保持带进给爪单元148的安装台150向前端支撑部146上安装的位置进行切换,从而在任意电子部件保持带的情况下,均可以使电子部件向保持位置移动。The component supply apparatus 100 has the above-mentioned structure. The component supply device 100 is configured so that a plurality of positions for mounting the mounting table 150 of the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 on the front end support portion 146 are provided along the holding tape feeding direction, so that the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 can be switched relative to the holding tape feeding claw unit 148. The front end support portion 146 is provided in such a position that it is possible to cope with various types of electronic component holding tapes having different relative positions between the holes of the holding tape main body and the electronic components without replacing parts. That is, the component supply apparatus 100 moves the mounting table 150 of the holding tape feed claw unit 148 onto the front end support portion 146 based on the relative position between the hole of the holding tape body of the loaded electronic component holding tape and the electronic component. By switching the mounting position, the electronic component can be moved to the holding position in any electronic component holding belt.
具体地说,供给器单元114通过变更将保持带进给爪单元148的安装台150向前端支撑部146安装的位置,从而可以对驱动部144的可动部144b成为往复移动的范围中最伸长状态的位置中的进给爪152的凸部152a的位置进行变更。由此,可以在供给器单元114处于使驱动部144的可动部144b为往复移动的范围中最伸长的状态的位置(进给结束位置、保持位置)时,使保持带主体的孔的所位于的位置成为各种位置。由此,供给器单元114即使对于电子部件相对于孔位置的配置位置不同的电子部件保持带,也可以在可动部144b成为往复移动的范围中最伸长的状态时,将电子部件配置在保持位置。Specifically, the feeder unit 114 can be extended to the movable part 144b of the driving part 144 in the range of reciprocating movement by changing the position where the mounting table 150 holding the tape feed claw unit 148 is mounted on the front end support part 146. The position of the convex part 152a of the feed claw 152 is changed in the position of a long state. Thereby, when the feeder unit 114 is in the position (feed end position, holding position) where the movable part 144b of the driving part 144 is in the most extended state in the reciprocating range, the hole holding the tape main body can be made The located positions become various positions. As a result, even with respect to electronic component holding tapes having different arrangement positions of the electronic components with respect to the hole positions, the feeder unit 114 can arrange the electronic components in the most extended state in the reciprocating range of the movable part 144b. hold position.
另外,优选在部件供给装置100中,将供给器单元114的可动部144b的往复移动的距离,设为比保持带主体的孔的间距长且比间距的2倍短。由此,部件供给装置100可以将进给爪152的凸部152a可靠地插入下一个间距的孔,可以通过进给爪152的一次往复移动将保持带输送1个间距的量。另外,对于部件供给装置100,优选在输送对象即保持带的孔的间距有多个种类的情况下,将供给器单元114的可动部144b的往复移动的距离,设为与孔间距最长的孔相比较长,与孔间距最短的保持带间距的2倍相比较短。由此,部件供给装置100在保持带的间距为任意种类的情况下,均可以将进给爪152的凸部152a可靠地插入下一个间距的孔,可以通过进给爪的一次往复移动,将保持带输送1个间距的量。即,部件供给装置100不必变更往复移动的距离或进行部件的更换,就可以针对多种间距的保持带,分别输送1个间距的量。In addition, in the component supply apparatus 100, it is preferable to set the reciprocating distance of the movable portion 144b of the feeder unit 114 to be longer than the pitch of the holes holding the tape bodies and shorter than twice the pitch. Thereby, the component supply apparatus 100 can reliably insert the convex part 152a of the feed claw 152 into the hole of the next pitch, and can feed the holding|maintenance tape by 1 pitch by one reciprocating movement of the feed claw 152. In addition, in the component supply device 100, when there are several kinds of pitches of the holes of the holding tape, which is the object of conveyance, it is preferable to set the reciprocating distance of the movable part 144b of the feeder unit 114 to be the longest from the pitch of the holes. The holes are relatively long and short compared to twice the spacing of the holding strips with the shortest hole spacing. Thus, the component supply device 100 can reliably insert the convex portion 152a of the feed claw 152 into the hole of the next pitch when the pitch of the holding tape is any type, and the feed claw can be moved to and fro once by one reciprocating movement of the feed claw. Keep the amount that the belt conveys for 1 pitch. That is, the components supply device 100 can feed the holding tapes of various pitches by one pitch without changing the reciprocating distance or replacing the components.
在这里,上述实施方式的供给器单元114,可以在2个部位选择相对于前端支撑部146而安装保持带进给爪单元148的位置,但数量并不限定于此。供给器单元114通过增加相对于前端支撑部146而安装保持带进给爪单元148的位置的可选择位置,可以应对更多种类的电子部件保持带。另外,供给器单元114也可以设置为,可以线性地调整相对于前端支撑部146而安装保持带进给爪单元148的位置。例如也可以设置为,通过将前端支撑部146或者保持带进给爪单元148中任意一个上的螺钉孔,设为沿保持带进给方向延伸的长孔形状,从而可以使前端支撑部146和保持带进给爪单元148之间的保持带进给方向上的相对位置设置为各种位置。在此情况下,优选前端支撑部146和保持带进给爪单元148之间的保持带进给方向上的相对位置,可以在保持带的1个孔间距量的范围内进行调整。由此,供给器单元114可以任意调整相对位置,也可以进行相对位置的微调整。Here, in the feeder unit 114 of the above-mentioned embodiment, the position where the holding tape feed claw unit 148 is attached to the front end support portion 146 can be selected from two positions, but the number is not limited thereto. The feeder unit 114 can cope with more kinds of electronic component holding tapes by increasing the optional positions of the positions where the holding tape feed claw unit 148 is mounted with respect to the front end support portion 146 . In addition, the feeder unit 114 may be provided so that the position where the holding tape feed claw unit 148 is attached relative to the front end support portion 146 can be adjusted linearly. For example, it is also possible to set the front end support portion 146 and the front end support portion 146 and the front end support portion 146 and the front end support portion 146 by making the screw hole on any one of the holding tape feeding claw units 148 into a long hole shape extending along the holding tape feeding direction. The relative position in the holding tape feeding direction between the holding tape feeding claw units 148 is set to various positions. In this case, it is preferable that the relative position in the holding tape feeding direction between the front end support portion 146 and the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 can be adjusted within a range of one hole pitch of the holding tape. Accordingly, the feeder unit 114 can adjust the relative position arbitrarily, and can also perform fine adjustment of the relative position.
另外,上述实施方式的供给器单元114构成为,将前端支撑部146和保持带进给爪单元148作为位置调整机构,通过变更前端支撑部146和保持带进给爪单元148之间的相对位置,从而可以变更保持带输送结束后的状态,即,可动部144b往复移动范围中最伸长的状态时进给爪152的凸部152a的位置(可以调整框体110和保持带进给爪单元148之间的相对位置),但并不限定于此。供给器单元可以将能够调整框体和保持带进给爪单元之间的相对位置的各种机构,作为位置调整机构使用。例如,部件供给装置也可以构成为,通过可以调整框体和供给器单元之间的保持带进给方向上的相对位置,从而可以变更保持带输送结束后的状态,即,可动部144b在往复移动范围中最伸长的状态时进给爪152的凸部152a的位置。即,供给器单元也可以在供给器单元和框体之间的连结部上设置位置调整机构。In addition, the feeder unit 114 of the above-mentioned embodiment is configured to use the front end support portion 146 and the holding tape feed claw unit 148 as a position adjustment mechanism, and by changing the relative position between the front end support portion 146 and the holding tape feed claw unit 148, , so as to change the state after the holding belt is conveyed, that is, the position of the convex portion 152a of the feed claw 152 when the movable part 144b is in the most extended state in the reciprocating movement range (the frame body 110 and the holding belt feeding claw can be adjusted The relative position between units 148), but not limited thereto. The feeder unit can use various mechanisms capable of adjusting the relative position between the housing and the holding tape feed claw unit as a position adjustment mechanism. For example, the component supply device may be configured such that the relative position between the housing and the feeder unit in the feeding direction of the holding tape can be adjusted so that the state after the holding tape feeding is completed can be changed, that is, the movable part 144b The position of the convex part 152a of the feed claw 152 in the most extended state in the reciprocating movement range. That is, the feeder unit may be provided with a position adjustment mechanism at the connecting portion between the feeder unit and the housing.
下面,对作为径向供给器的电子部件供给装置的各种变形例进行说明。图25是表示切断单元的其他例子的概略结构的斜视图。图26是表示从其他方向观察图25所示的切断单元的概略结构的斜视图。图27是表示图25所示的切断单元和框体之间的关系的斜视图。图28是表示切断单元的其他例子的概略结构的斜视图。图29是用于说明图25所示的切断单元的动作的说明图。图30是用于说明图25所示的切断单元的动作的说明图。此外,图25至图30所示的切断单元116a的基本结构与切断单元116相同。下面,对切断单元116a的特征点进行说明。Next, various modified examples of the electronic component supply device as the radial feeder will be described. Fig. 25 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of another example of a cutting unit. Fig. 26 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the cutting unit shown in Fig. 25 viewed from another direction. Fig. 27 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the cutting unit and the housing shown in Fig. 25 . Fig. 28 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of another example of a cutting unit. Fig. 29 is an explanatory view for explaining the operation of the cutting unit shown in Fig. 25 . Fig. 30 is an explanatory view for explaining the operation of the cutting unit shown in Fig. 25 . In addition, the basic structure of the cutting unit 116a shown in FIGS. 25 to 30 is the same as that of the cutting unit 116 . Next, the characteristic points of the cutting unit 116a will be described.
切断单元116a将电子部件保持带所保持的电子部件的引线切断。另外,切断单元116a夹持即保持切断引线后的电子部件,直至电子部件被吸嘴32(吸附吸嘴或者抓持吸嘴)吸附或者抓持(保持)。切断单元116a具有支撑部162、驱动部164、传动部172、切断部174以及罩。The cutting unit 116a cuts the leads of the electronic components held by the electronic component holding tape. In addition, the cutting unit 116 a clamps, that is, holds the electronic component after the lead wire is cut, until the electronic component is sucked or gripped (held) by the suction nozzle 32 (suction nozzle or gripping nozzle). The cutting unit 116a has the support part 162, the drive part 164, the transmission part 172, the cutting part 174, and a cover.
传动部172是将通过可动部164b的往复移动而产生的动力向切断部174传递的传动机构。传动部172将可动部164b的向保持带进给方向的往复移动,变换为与保持带进给方向正交的方向的运动,使切断部174沿与保持带进给方向正交的方向移动。传动部172由隔着保持带的通过区域而配置的固定件175和可动件176构成。传动部172使切断部174的与可动件176连结的第1单元174a,向与切断部174的与固定件175连结的第2单元174b接近或者远离的方向移动。即,本实施方式的传动部172如图29所示,在驱动部164的可动部164b向拉伸的方向移动的情况下,使可动件176向接近固定件175的方向移动。传动部172在驱动部164的可动部164b向收缩的方向移动的情况下,使可动件176向远离固定件175的方向移动。如上述所示,切断单元116a构成为,仅使切断部174的2个单元中的一个移动。The transmission part 172 is a transmission mechanism that transmits power generated by the reciprocating movement of the movable part 164 b to the cutting part 174 . The transmission part 172 converts the reciprocating movement of the movable part 164b in the feeding direction of the holding tape into a motion in a direction perpendicular to the feeding direction of the holding tape, and moves the cutting part 174 in a direction perpendicular to the feeding direction of the holding tape. . The transmission unit 172 is composed of a stationary element 175 and a movable element 176 arranged to sandwich the passing region of the holding belt. The transmission unit 172 moves the first unit 174 a connected to the movable element 176 of the cutting unit 174 to approach or move away from the second unit 174 b connected to the fixing unit 175 of the cutting unit 174 . That is, as shown in FIG. 29 , the transmission unit 172 of the present embodiment moves the movable element 176 toward the fixed element 175 when the movable portion 164b of the drive portion 164 moves in the stretching direction. The transmission part 172 moves the movable element 176 in the direction away from the fixed element 175 when the movable part 164b of the drive part 164 moves in the contraction direction. As described above, the cutting unit 116a is configured to move only one of the two units of the cutting unit 174 .
切断部174配置在保持区域上,将在保持区域上配置的电子部件的引线在主体和保持带主体之间切断并保持。切断部174对电子部件80的主体和引线这两者进行保持,然后将引线切断,在将引线切断后继续维持对主体和引线进行保持的状态。切断部174具有第1单元174a和第2单元174b。第1单元174a具有第1刃178a、第1主体保持部179a以及第1引线保持部180a。第1刃178a和第2刃178b成为切断机构178,第1主体保持部179a和第2主体保持部179b成为主体保持机构179,第1引线保持部180a和第2引线保持部180b成为引线保持机构180。切断部174如图30所示,从铅垂方向上侧开始顺次配置主体保持机构179、引线保持机构180以及切断机构178。The cutting portion 174 is arranged on the holding area, and cuts and holds the leads of the electronic components arranged on the holding area between the main body and the main body of the holding tape. The cutting part 174 holds both the main body and the lead wires of the electronic component 80 , then cuts the lead wires, and maintains the state of holding the main body and the lead wires after cutting the lead wires. The cutting unit 174 has a first unit 174a and a second unit 174b. The first unit 174a has a first blade 178a, a first body holding portion 179a, and a first lead wire holding portion 180a. The first blade 178a and the second blade 178b serve as the cutting mechanism 178, the first main body holding part 179a and the second main body holding part 179b serve as the main body holding means 179, and the first lead wire holding part 180a and the second lead wire holding part 180b serve as the lead wire holding means. 180. As shown in FIG. 30 , the cutting unit 174 has a main body holding mechanism 179 , a lead wire holding mechanism 180 , and a cutting mechanism 178 arranged in this order from the upper side in the vertical direction.
第1单元174a的各部分和第2单元174b的各部分配置在彼此相对的位置上。另外,保持带配置在第1单元174a和第2单元174b之间,在保持带所保持的电子部件的引线被切断机构178和引线保持机构180夹持、电子部件的主体被主体保持机构179夹持的位置处通过。Each part of the first unit 174a and each part of the second unit 174b are arranged at positions facing each other. In addition, the holding belt is disposed between the first unit 174a and the second unit 174b, and the lead wires of the electronic components held by the holding belt are clamped by the cutting mechanism 178 and the lead wire holding mechanism 180, and the main body of the electronic component is clamped by the main body holding mechanism 179. Pass at the held position.
切断部174的第1单元174a支撑在可动件176上,与可动件176一起向与第2单元174b接近、远离的方向(图30中箭头方向)移动。如果切断部174的第1单元174a向与第2单元174b接近的方向移动,则成为主体保持机构179对电子部件80的主体进行保持、引线保持机构180对电子部件80的引线进行保持的状态。然后,在切断部174中,如果第1单元174a进一步向与第2单元174b接近的方向移动,则切断机构178的第1刃178a和第2刃178b相交叉,将引线切断。此外,在图30中,看上去好像第1刃178a和第2刃178b重合,但由于第1刃178a和第2刃178b在纸面前后方向上的纸面左右方向的位置不同(相对于输送方向倾斜),因此实际上没有接触。The first unit 174a of the cutting unit 174 is supported by the movable member 176, and moves in the direction of approaching and separating from the second unit 174b (direction of the arrow in FIG. 30 ) together with the movable member 176 . When the first unit 174a of the cutting unit 174 moves toward the second unit 174b, the main body of the electronic component 80 is held by the main body holding mechanism 179, and the leads of the electronic component 80 are held by the lead wire holding mechanism 180. Then, in the cutting section 174, when the first unit 174a further moves toward the second unit 174b, the first blade 178a and the second blade 178b of the cutting mechanism 178 intersect to cut the lead. In addition, in Fig. 30, it seems that the first blade 178a and the second blade 178b are overlapped, but because the position of the first blade 178a and the second blade 178b in the left and right direction of the paper in the front and rear direction of the paper is different (relative to the conveying direction tilt), so there is virtually no contact.
切断单元116a将1个驱动部164作为驱动源,通过传动部172使保持电子部件80的夹持机构(主体保持机构179、引线保持机构180)和切断引线84的切断机构178联动地动作。由此,切断单元116a可以通过简单的结构,执行对电子部件80的保持和引线的切断。在这一点上,切断单元116也相同。The cutting unit 116 a uses one driving unit 164 as a driving source, and operates the clamping mechanism (main body holding mechanism 179 , lead wire holding mechanism 180 ) for holding the electronic component 80 and the cutting mechanism 178 for cutting the lead wire 84 through the transmission unit 172 in conjunction with each other. Thus, the cutting unit 116a can hold the electronic component 80 and cut the leads with a simple structure. In this point, the cutting unit 116 is also the same.
另外,切断单元116a通过利用主体保持机构179对电子部件80的主体82进行保持,从而可以在将引线84切断后,适当地对电子部件80进行保持。由此,可以适当地保持将引线84切断后的电子部件80,可以利用吸嘴32容易地对电子部件80进行保持。在这一点上,切断单元116也相同。In addition, the cutting unit 116a can properly hold the electronic component 80 after cutting the lead wire 84 by holding the main body 82 of the electronic component 80 by the main body holding mechanism 179 . Thereby, the electronic component 80 after cutting the lead wire 84 can be held appropriately, and the electronic component 80 can be easily held by the suction nozzle 32 . In this point, the cutting unit 116 is also the same.
另外,切断单元116a通过在将引线84切断之前,利用夹持机构对电子部件80进行保持,特别地,对电子部件80的主体82进行保持,从而可以在将电子部件80保持于稳定位置上的状态下,将引线84切断。由此,可以适当地切断引线84。另外,通过切断单元116a将引线84切断之前利用夹持机构对电子部件80进行保持,从而可以抑制切断引线84后的电子部件从保持位置脱落或掉落的情况。In addition, the cutting unit 116a can hold the electronic component 80 by the clamping mechanism before cutting the lead wire 84, especially, the main body 82 of the electronic component 80, so that the electronic component 80 can be held in a stable position. In the state, the lead wire 84 is cut off. Thereby, the lead wire 84 can be cut|disconnected appropriately. In addition, the electronic component 80 is held by the clamping mechanism before the lead wire 84 is cut by the cutting unit 116a, so that the electronic component after cutting the lead wire 84 can be prevented from falling off or falling from the holding position.
切断单元116a通过在对主体82进行保持的基础上,对引线84进行保持,从而可以在切断时限制引线84的位置,可以更适当地将引线84切断。另外,通过利用引线保持机构180对主体侧的引线84进行保持,从而可以减小切断时产生的主体侧的引线84的变形。The cutting unit 116 a holds the lead wire 84 in addition to holding the main body 82 , so that the position of the lead wire 84 can be restricted during cutting, and the lead wire 84 can be cut more appropriately. In addition, by holding the lead wire 84 on the main body side by the lead wire holding mechanism 180 , deformation of the lead wire 84 on the main body side during cutting can be reduced.
切断单元116a通过将传动部172的一侧作为固定件175,从而可以简化装置的机构。另外,可以使由切断单元116a保持的电子部件的保持位置成为稳定的位置,可以简化搭载头15的操作。优选切断单元116a具有主体保持机构179和引线保持机构180这两者,但也可以仅具有其中任意一个。The cutting unit 116a can simplify the mechanism of the device by using one side of the transmission part 172 as the fixing member 175 . In addition, the holding position of the electronic component held by the cutting unit 116 a can be stabilized, and the handling of the mounting head 15 can be simplified. It is preferable that the cutting unit 116a has both the main body holding mechanism 179 and the lead wire holding mechanism 180, but may have only any one of them.
在这里,切断单元116a如图27所示,向在框体110a上形成的将铅垂方向作为长度方向的长孔181、184中插入螺栓182、185而进行固定。由此,切断单元116a可以对铅垂方向的位置进行调整。由此,可以对与通过供给器单元移动的保持带所保持的电子部件相对的铅垂方向的位置进行调整。因此,切断单元116a可以相对于保持带的位置,对切断引线的铅垂方向的位置,即,与径向引线型电子部件对应的切断位置进行调整。由此,切断单元116a可以对切断后的引线的长度进行调整。此外,在本实施方式中,对与径向引线型电子部件对应的切断位置进行调整的机构,采用调整方向为长度方向的长孔和用于固定相对于长孔的位置的螺栓的组合,但位置调整机构并不限定于此。在电子部件供给装置中,只要是可以调整切断单元116a的Z轴方向的位置的机构,更具体地说,可以调整切断机构的相对于保持区域的电子部件保持带的Z轴方向的位置的机构即可。Here, as shown in FIG. 27, the cutting unit 116a is fixed by inserting bolts 182, 185 into long holes 181, 184 formed in the frame body 110a whose longitudinal direction is the vertical direction. Thus, the cutting unit 116a can adjust the position in the vertical direction. Thereby, the position in the vertical direction relative to the electronic component held by the holding tape moved by the feeder unit can be adjusted. Therefore, the cutting unit 116a can adjust the position in the vertical direction of the cut lead wire with respect to the position of the holding tape, that is, the cut position corresponding to the radial lead type electronic component. Thus, the cutting unit 116a can adjust the length of the lead wire after cutting. In addition, in this embodiment, the mechanism for adjusting the cutting position corresponding to the radial lead type electronic component adopts a combination of an elongated hole whose adjustment direction is in the longitudinal direction and a bolt for fixing the position relative to the elongated hole. The position adjustment mechanism is not limited to this. In the electronic component supply apparatus, any mechanism that can adjust the position of the cutting unit 116a in the Z-axis direction, more specifically, a mechanism that can adjust the position of the cutting mechanism in the Z-axis direction of the electronic component holding tape with respect to the holding area That's it.
另外,切断单元116a具有向框体110a的外侧露出的杆188。杆188与传动部172的直线运动部分连结。由此,切断单元116a通过使杆188向箭头方向移动,从而可以利用切断部174执行电子部件的切断动作。即,通过使杆188向箭头方向移动,从而可以执行与利用驱动部164使传动部172沿直线运动方向移动的动作相同的动作。由此,例如在执行切断单元116a的位置调整的情况下,即使不利用电子部件安装装置10的控制装置20使驱动部164驱动,也可以将电子部件的引线切断。另外,即使在不向驱动部164供给空气压力或电力的状态下,也可以将电子部件的引线切断。In addition, the cutting unit 116a has a rod 188 exposed to the outside of the housing 110a. The rod 188 is connected to the linear motion part of the transmission part 172 . Thereby, the cutting unit 116a can perform the cutting operation of the electronic component by the cutting part 174 by moving the rod 188 in the direction of the arrow. That is, by moving the rod 188 in the direction of the arrow, the same operation as that of moving the transmission part 172 in the linear motion direction by the drive part 164 can be performed. Thus, for example, when the position adjustment of the cutting unit 116 a is performed, the lead wires of the electronic components can be cut without driving the drive unit 164 by the control device 20 of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 . In addition, even in a state where air pressure or electric power is not supplied to the driving unit 164, the lead wires of the electronic components can be cut.
此外,电子部件供给装置100也可以在框体110a上设置用于使驱动部164驱动的操作部。由此,在电子部件供给装置100中,即使不利用控制装置20进行操作,也可以执行由切断单元116a进行的电子部件引线的切断动作。此外,在此情况下,需要向驱动部164供给驱动力(空气压力或者电力)。Moreover, the electronic component supply apparatus 100 may provide the operation part for driving the drive part 164 to the housing|casing 110a. Thereby, in the electronic component supply apparatus 100, the cutting operation|movement of the lead wire of an electronic component by the cutting means 116a can be performed without operating by the control apparatus 20. FIG. In addition, in this case, it is necessary to supply driving force (air pressure or electric power) to the driving unit 164 .
图31A是表示切断单元的保持机构的概略结构的说明图。图31B是表示切断单元的保持机构的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。切断单元116a的第2主体保持部179b如图31A所示,是具有2个使固定在传动部172的固定件175上的螺栓插入的孔190的挡块。在第2主体保持部179b中,与将2个孔190连接的线平行的面,由相距孔190的距离不同的4个面构成。第1面191a与孔190之间的距离为箭头192a。第2面191b与孔190之间的距离为箭头192b。第3面191c与孔190之间的距离为箭头192c。第4面191d与孔190之间的距离为箭头192d。箭头192a、箭头192b、箭头192c和箭头192d长度均不同。对于切断单元116a,在将第2主体保持部179b固定于固定件175上时,通过改变第2主体保持部179b的朝向(上下反转、左右反转),从而可以将与第1主体保持部179a相对的面,切换为第1面191a、第2面191b、第3面191c或者第4面191d。在这里,由于固定孔190的螺栓的位置是固定的,所以通过切换与第1主体保持部179a相对的面,可以改变第2主体保持部179b的与第1主体保持部179a相对的面、和第1主体保持部179a之间的距离。Fig. 31A is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a holding mechanism of a cutting unit. Fig. 31B is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of the holding mechanism of the cutting unit. The second body holding portion 179b of the cutting unit 116a is a stopper having two holes 190 for inserting bolts fixed to the fixing member 175 of the transmission portion 172, as shown in FIG. 31A. In the second main body holding portion 179b, the surface parallel to the line connecting the two holes 190 is composed of four surfaces with different distances from the holes 190 . The distance between the first surface 191a and the hole 190 is indicated by the arrow 192a. The distance between the second surface 191b and the hole 190 is indicated by the arrow 192b. The distance between the third surface 191c and the hole 190 is indicated by the arrow 192c. The distance between the fourth surface 191d and the hole 190 is indicated by the arrow 192d. Arrow 192a, arrow 192b, arrow 192c and arrow 192d are all different in length. For the cutting unit 116a, when the second main body holding part 179b is fixed on the fixing member 175, by changing the orientation of the second main body holding part 179b (reversing up and down, turning left and right), it can be connected with the first main body holding part. The surface facing 179a is switched to the first surface 191a, the second surface 191b, the third surface 191c, or the fourth surface 191d. Here, since the position of the bolt in the fixing hole 190 is fixed, by switching the surface facing the first body holding portion 179a, the surface of the second body holding portion 179b facing the first body holding portion 179a and the surface facing the first body holding portion 179a can be changed. The distance between the first main body holding parts 179a.
由此,切断单元116a可以将引线的切断动作时的第2主体保持部179b和第1主体保持部179a之间的距离变更为4种,可以根据由电子部件供给装置100供给的电子部件的种类,适当调整第2主体保持部179b和第1主体保持部179a之间的距离。Thus, the cutting unit 116a can change the distance between the second main body holding part 179b and the first main body holding part 179a to four kinds during the cutting operation of the lead wires, and the distance between the second main body holding part 179b and the first main body holding part 179a can be changed according to the type of electronic components supplied by the electronic component supply apparatus 100. , properly adjust the distance between the second main body holding portion 179b and the first main body holding portion 179a.
图31B所示的第2主体保持部195是八边形的棱柱形状,第1主体保持部179a为1个平坦的面。第2主体保持部195形成用于使螺栓插入的孔196。孔196是将与保持带的输送方向正交的方向、即切断单元移动的方向作为长度方向的长孔。第2主体保持部195通过对孔196和螺栓之间的相对位置进行调整,从而可以对切断部的动作方向上的第2主体保持部195相对于螺栓的位置进行调整。如上述所示,切断单元通过使用第2主体保持部195,从而可以在孔196的长度方向的距离之间,对第2主体保持部195的与第1主体保持部179a相对的面、和第1主体保持部179a之间的距离进行调整。由此,切断单元可以应对更多的电子部件主体的宽度。例如,切断单元可以一边抓持20种引线型电子部件一边将引线切断,使得可以在切断引线后的状态下向保持位置供给的引线型电子部件的种类为20种。The second main body holding portion 195 shown in FIG. 31B has an octagonal prism shape, and the first main body holding portion 179a has one flat surface. The second body holding portion 195 forms holes 196 for inserting bolts. The hole 196 is a long hole whose longitudinal direction is the direction perpendicular to the feeding direction of the holding tape, that is, the direction in which the cutting unit moves. The second main body holding part 195 can adjust the position of the second main body holding part 195 relative to the bolt in the operating direction of the cutting part by adjusting the relative position between the hole 196 and the bolt. As described above, by using the second main body holding part 195, the cutting means can be used for the surface of the second main body holding part 195 opposing the first main body holding part 179a and the second main body holding part 195 between the distances in the longitudinal direction of the hole 196. 1 The distance between the main body holding parts 179a is adjusted. Thereby, the cutting unit can cope with more widths of the electronic component main body. For example, the cutting unit can cut the lead wires while grasping 20 types of lead-type electronic components, so that 20 types of lead-type electronic components can be supplied to the holding position in the state where the lead wires are cut.
图32是表示电子部件供给装置的供给器单元的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。图33是表示从其他方向观察图32所示的供给器单元的概略结构的斜视图。图34是表示图32所示的供给器单元的概略结构的正视图。图35是表示图32所示的供给器单元的概略结构的俯视图。图36是表示图32所示的供给器单元的其他状态的概略结构的正视图。图37是表示图32所示的供给器单元的其他状态的概略结构的俯视图。此外,图32至图37所示的供给器单元200,除了可以变更保持带输送结束后的状态即可动部144b往复移动范围中最伸长的状态时,进给爪152的凸部152a的位置的结构之外,基本上具有与供给器单元114相同的结构。32 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of the feeder unit of the electronic component supply apparatus. Fig. 33 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 viewed from another direction. Fig. 34 is a front view showing a schematic configuration of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 . Fig. 35 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 . Fig. 36 is a front view showing a schematic configuration of another state of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 . Fig. 37 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of another state of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 . In addition, in the feeder unit 200 shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 , the position of the convex portion 152a of the feed claw 152 can be changed except that the state after the belt feeding is completed, that is, the most extended state in the reciprocating movement range of the movable portion 144b, can be changed. It basically has the same structure as the feeder unit 114 except for the structure of the position.
供给器单元200具有支撑部202、驱动部204、第1前端支撑部206、保持带进给爪单元208、第2前端支撑部209、返回方向保持带进给爪单元210以及联动机构211。驱动部204具有与驱动部144相同的结构。另外,本实施方式的第1前端支撑部206和保持带进给爪单元208不具有保持带进给方向的位置调整的功能。另外,保持带进给爪单元208不具有抓持部。第1前端支撑部206和保持带进给爪单元208的其他结构与前端支撑部146和保持带进给爪单元148相同。The feeder unit 200 has a support unit 202 , a driving unit 204 , a first front end support unit 206 , a holding tape feed claw unit 208 , a second front end support portion 209 , a return direction holding tape feed claw unit 210 , and an interlocking mechanism 211 . The drive unit 204 has the same structure as the drive unit 144 . In addition, the first front end support portion 206 and the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 of the present embodiment do not have the function of holding the position adjustment of the tape feeding direction. In addition, the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 has no gripping portion. Other configurations of the first front end support portion 206 and the holding tape feed claw unit 208 are the same as those of the front end support portion 146 and the holding tape feed claw unit 148 .
支撑部202是对驱动部204、第1前端支撑部206、保持带进给爪单元208、返回方向保持带进给爪单元210以及联动机构211直接或间接地进行支撑的机构,固定在框体110上。支撑部202具有支撑部件222、2个凸起部230、2个螺钉232以及2个螺钉236。The support part 202 is a mechanism for directly or indirectly supporting the driving part 204, the first front end support part 206, the holding belt feed claw unit 208, the return direction holding belt feed claw unit 210, and the linkage mechanism 211, and is fixed to the frame. 110 on. The support part 202 has a support member 222 , two bosses 230 , two screws 232 and two screws 236 .
支撑部件222是与框体110的细长箱体形状的面积最宽的面相对的板状部件,与驱动部204、第1前端支撑部206、保持带进给爪单元208的一个面相对。支撑部件222与驱动部204的固定部连结,对固定部进行支撑。另外,支撑部件222经由凸起部230固定在框体110上。The support member 222 is a plate member facing the widest surface of the elongated box shape of the housing 110 , and faces one surface of the driving unit 204 , the first front end support unit 206 , and the holding belt feed claw unit 208 . The supporting member 222 is connected to the fixed part of the drive part 204, and supports the fixed part. In addition, the support member 222 is fixed on the frame body 110 via the protrusion 230 .
凸起部230配置在支撑部件222的与保持带进给爪单元208等相对的面相反侧的面上。凸起部230向与保持带进给爪单元208等远离的方向凸出。凸起部230在支撑部件222的保持带进给方向上,以规定距离分离的位置上配置2个。The protrusion 230 is arranged on the surface of the supporting member 222 opposite to the surface facing the holding tape feed claw unit 208 and the like. The protrusion 230 protrudes in a direction away from the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 and the like. Two protrusions 230 are arranged at positions separated by a predetermined distance in the holding tape feeding direction of the supporting member 222 .
2个螺钉232分别与凸起部230的一侧端部(与支撑部件222接触侧的端部)螺合。另外,螺钉232分别插入至支撑部件222上形成的长孔222a中。支撑部件222上形成的长孔222a是沿保持带进给方向延伸的孔。此外,长孔222a具有使螺钉232可以沿保持带进给方向在保持带的一个孔间距的量的范围内移动的形状。The two screws 232 are screwed to one end of the boss 230 (the end on the side in contact with the supporting member 222 ). In addition, the screws 232 are respectively inserted into the elongated holes 222 a formed in the supporting member 222 . The elongated hole 222a formed in the supporting member 222 is a hole extending in the feeding direction of the holding tape. Further, the elongated hole 222a has a shape such that the screw 232 can move within the range of one hole pitch of the holding tape in the holding tape feeding direction.
2个螺钉236分别与凸起部230的另一侧端部螺合。另外,螺钉236分别插入至框体110上形成的长孔212中。框体110上形成的长孔212是沿保持带进给方向延伸的孔。此外,长孔212具有使螺钉236可以沿保持带进给方向在相当于保持带的一个孔间距的范围内移动的形状。The two screws 236 are screwed to the other end of the boss 230 . In addition, the screws 236 are respectively inserted into the elongated holes 212 formed in the housing 110 . The elongated hole 212 formed in the frame body 110 is a hole extending in the feeding direction of the holding tape. In addition, the elongated hole 212 has a shape that allows the screw 236 to move within a range corresponding to one hole pitch of the holding tape in the holding tape feeding direction.
另外,在供给器单元200中,与凸起部230螺合的螺钉232插入支撑部件222的长孔222a中。供给器单元200的凸起部230、螺钉232、支撑部件222上形成的长孔222a的组合成为位置调整机构。相对于供给器单元200,通过拧紧螺钉232而将凸起部230和支撑部件222紧固,从而可以将供给器单元200和框体110在保持带进给方向上的相对位置进行固定。另外,相对于供给器单元200,通过成为将螺钉232松开后的状态,从而可以使长孔222a和螺钉232相对移动。由此,可以使形成有长孔222a的支撑部件222,相对于插入了螺钉232的凸起部230在保持带进给方向上相对移动。对于供给器单元200,通过可以使支撑部件222和凸起部230相对移动,从而可以形成能够使供给器单元200相对于框体110沿保持带进给方向移动的状态。由此,对于供给器单元200,通过松开螺钉232,可以调整供给器单元200和框体110在保持带进给方向上的相对位置,通过拧紧螺钉232,可以将供给器单元200和框体110在保持带进给方向上的相对位置进行固定。In addition, in the feeder unit 200 , a screw 232 screwed with the boss 230 is inserted into the elongated hole 222 a of the supporting member 222 . The combination of the boss 230 of the feeder unit 200, the screw 232, and the elongated hole 222a formed in the support member 222 serves as a position adjustment mechanism. The relative position of the feeder unit 200 and the housing 110 in the feeding direction of the holding tape can be fixed by tightening the screw 232 to fasten the protrusion 230 and the support member 222 with respect to the feeder unit 200 . Moreover, with respect to the feeder unit 200, the long hole 222a and the screw 232 can be moved relatively by setting it as the state which loosened the screw 232. FIG. Thereby, the supporting member 222 formed with the elongated hole 222 a can be relatively moved in the holding tape feeding direction with respect to the boss 230 into which the screw 232 is inserted. With respect to the feeder unit 200 , the supporting member 222 and the protrusion 230 can be relatively moved, so that the feeder unit 200 can be moved relative to the housing 110 in the holding tape feeding direction. Thus, for the feeder unit 200, by loosening the screw 232, the relative position of the feeder unit 200 and the frame body 110 in the feeding direction of the holding tape can be adjusted, and by tightening the screw 232, the feeder unit 200 and the frame body 110 can be adjusted. 110 is fixed in the relative position on the holding belt feeding direction.
另外,对于供给器单元200,与凸起部230螺合的螺钉236插入框体110的长孔212中。供给器单元200的凸起部230、螺钉236、框体110上形成的长孔212的组合成为位置调整机构。对于供给器单元200,通过拧紧螺钉236而将凸起部230和框体110紧固,可以将供给器单元200和框体110在保持带进给方向上的相对位置进行固定。另外,对于供给器单元200,通过形成将螺钉236松开后的状态,可以使长孔212和螺钉236相对移动。由此,可以使形成有长孔212的框体110,相对于插入了螺钉236的凸起部230在保持带进给方向上相对移动。对于供给器单元200,通过可以使框体110和凸起部230相对移动,可以形成能够使供给器单元200相对于框体110沿保持带进给方向移动的状态。由此,对于供给器单元200,通过松开螺钉236,可以对供给器单元200和框体110在保持带进给方向上的相对位置进行调整,通过拧紧螺钉236,可以对供给器单元200和框体110在保持带进给方向上的相对位置进行固定。In addition, in the feeder unit 200 , a screw 236 screwed with the boss 230 is inserted into the elongated hole 212 of the housing 110 . The combination of the boss 230 of the feeder unit 200, the screw 236, and the elongated hole 212 formed in the frame 110 serves as a position adjustment mechanism. With regard to the feeder unit 200 , by tightening the screws 236 to fasten the protrusion 230 and the frame body 110 , the relative positions of the feeder unit 200 and the frame body 110 in the feeding direction of the holding tape can be fixed. In addition, in the feeder unit 200 , the elongated hole 212 and the screw 236 can be relatively moved by setting the screw 236 in a loosened state. Thereby, the frame body 110 formed with the elongated hole 212 can be relatively moved in the holding tape feeding direction with respect to the boss 230 into which the screw 236 is inserted. With respect to the feeder unit 200 , since the frame body 110 and the boss 230 can be relatively moved, the feeder unit 200 can be moved relative to the frame body 110 in the feeding direction of the holding tape. Thus, for the feeder unit 200, by loosening the screw 236, the relative position of the feeder unit 200 and the frame body 110 in the feeding direction of the holding tape can be adjusted, and by tightening the screw 236, the feeder unit 200 and the frame body 110 can be adjusted. The frame body 110 is fixed while maintaining the relative position in the tape feeding direction.
由于供给器单元200形成可以使供给器单元200整体和框体110沿保持带进给方向相对移动的结构,所以不必进行部件更换等,就可以简单地对进给爪的保持带进给方向的位置进行调整。另外,对于供给器单元200,通过仅从框体110的外侧松开螺钉232,就可以使供给器单元200相对于框体110移动。由此,可以更简单地进行进给爪的保持带进给方向上的位置的调整。在这里,操作人员在使供给器单元200和框体110沿保持带进给方向相对移动时,通过抓持支撑部件222,使支撑部件222相对于框体110沿保持带进给方向移动,从而可以进行相对移动。另外,操作人员也可以抓持凸起部230而进行相对移动。另外,操作人员在松开螺钉236而使供给器单元200和框体110沿保持带进给方向相对移动时,通过抓持松开后的螺钉236,使螺钉236相对于长孔212移动,从而也可以使供给器单元200和框体110沿保持带进给方向相对移动。在此情况下,优选使螺钉236形成易于抓持的形状。Since the feeder unit 200 has a structure in which the entire feeder unit 200 and the frame body 110 can move relative to each other in the feeding direction of the holding tape, it is possible to easily adjust the direction of the holding tape feeding direction of the feed claw without replacing parts or the like. The position is adjusted. In addition, regarding the feeder unit 200 , the feeder unit 200 can be moved relative to the housing 110 only by loosening the screw 232 from the outside of the housing 110 . This makes it possible to more easily adjust the position of the feed claw in the holding tape feed direction. Here, when the feeder unit 200 and the frame body 110 are relatively moved in the holding tape feeding direction, the operator grasps the supporting member 222 to move the supporting member 222 relative to the frame body 110 in the holding tape feeding direction, thereby Relative movement is possible. In addition, the operator may grasp the protrusion 230 and move it relatively. In addition, when the operator loosens the screw 236 to relatively move the feeder unit 200 and the frame body 110 along the feeding direction of the holding tape, the operator grasps the loosened screw 236 to move the screw 236 relative to the long hole 212, thereby Alternatively, the feeder unit 200 and the housing 110 may be relatively moved in the holding tape feeding direction. In this case, it is preferable to form the screw 236 into an easy-to-grip shape.
另外,对于供给器单元200,在利用将螺钉232和长孔222a组合而形成的机构进行相对位置移动的情况下,优选成为利用螺钉236将框体110和凸起部230固定的状态。另外,对于供给器单元200,在利用将螺钉236和长孔212组合而成的机构使相对位置移动的情况下,优选成为利用螺钉232将支撑部件222和凸起部230固定的状态。In addition, when feeder unit 200 performs relative positional movement by a mechanism formed by combining screws 232 and elongated holes 222a, it is preferable to be in a state where frame body 110 and boss 230 are fixed by screws 236 . In addition, in the feeder unit 200 , when the relative position is moved by a mechanism combining the screw 236 and the elongated hole 212 , it is preferable to be in a state where the support member 222 and the boss 230 are fixed by the screw 232 .
另外,在供给器单元200中,作为位置调整机构而设置将螺钉232和长孔222a组合而成的机构、以及将螺钉236和长孔212组合而成的机构这两个机构,能够利用它们对供给器单元200和框体110之间在保持带进给方向上的相对位置进行调整,但并不限定于此。在供给器单元200中,作为位置调整机构,也可以仅设置将凸起部230和支撑部件222进行固定的部分处设置的螺钉232和长孔222a组合而成的机构。另外,在供给器单元200中,作为位置调整机构,也可以仅设置将凸起部230和框体110固定的部分、即螺钉236和长孔212组合而成的机构。In addition, in the feeder unit 200, two mechanisms, the mechanism combining the screw 232 and the elongated hole 222a and the mechanism combining the screw 236 and the elongated hole 212, are provided as the position adjustment mechanism, and these two mechanisms can be used to adjust the position. The relative position between the feeder unit 200 and the housing 110 in the feeding direction of the holding tape is adjusted, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the feeder unit 200 , as the position adjustment mechanism, only a combination of the screw 232 and the elongated hole 222 a provided at the portion where the boss 230 and the support member 222 are fixed may be provided. In addition, in the feeder unit 200 , as the position adjustment mechanism, only a combination of the screw 236 and the elongated hole 212 may be provided, which fixes the boss 230 and the frame body 110 .
另外,对于供给器单元200,通过利用驱动部204使第1前端支撑部206沿保持带进给方向往复移动,从而使保持带进给爪单元208在图34及图35所示的位置和图36及图37所示的位置之间往复移动。由此,通过使保持带进给爪单元208往复移动,从而可以与供给器单元114相同地,将保持带沿保持带进给方向每次输送1个间距的量。In addition, with regard to the feeder unit 200, by using the drive unit 204 to reciprocate the first front end support portion 206 along the holding tape feeding direction, the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 is placed in the positions and diagrams shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 . 36 and reciprocating movement between the positions shown in Fig. 37. Thereby, by reciprocating the holding tape feed claw unit 208 , the holding tape can be fed by one pitch in the holding tape feeding direction similarly to the feeder unit 114 .
在这里,本实施方式的供给器单元200如上述所示,还具有第2前端支撑部209、返回方向保持带进给爪单元210以及联动机构211。下面,使用图32至图37以及图38至图43,对第2前端支撑部209、返回方向保持带进给爪单元210、联动机构211进行说明。图38是表示图32所示的供给器单元的概略结构的说明图。图39是表示图32所示的供给器单元的其他状态的概略结构的说明图。图40是表示图32所示的供给器单元的联动机构的概略结构的说明图。图41是表示框体的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。图42是用于说明图32所示的供给器单元的动作的说明图。图43是用于说明图32所示的供给器单元的动作的说明图。在图41中,为了说明供给器单元200而示出框体280。Here, the feeder unit 200 of this embodiment further includes the second front end support portion 209 , the return direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 , and the interlocking mechanism 211 as described above. Next, the second front end support portion 209 , the return direction holding belt feed claw unit 210 , and the interlocking mechanism 211 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 37 and FIGS. 38 to 43 . Fig. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 . Fig. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another state of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 . Fig. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of an interlocking mechanism of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 . FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of a housing. Fig. 42 is an explanatory view for explaining the operation of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 . Fig. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the feeder unit shown in Fig. 32 . In FIG. 41 , a housing 280 is shown for describing the feeder unit 200 .
如图38及图39所示,第2前端支撑部209是与框体110的细长箱体形状的面积最宽的面相对的板状部件,与驱动部204、第1前端支撑部206、保持带进给爪单元208的另一个面相对。即,第2前端支撑部209和支撑部件222配置在隔着驱动部204、第1前端支撑部206和保持带进给爪单元208的位置上。第2前端支撑部209经由连结部226、联动机构211固定在支撑部件222上。第2前端支撑部209是对后述的返回方向保持带进给爪单元210进行支撑的机构,利用连结部226与联动机构211连结。第2前端支撑部209的铅垂方向上侧的一部分从框体110露出。即,第2前端支撑部209的铅垂方向上侧的一部分,从框体110的形成引导槽120的面向框体110的外部露出。在第2前端支撑部209的铅垂方向上侧的一部分上,设置抓持部228。另外,支撑部件222和第2前端支撑部209以可以沿保持带进给方向移动的状态对第1前端支撑部206进行支撑。As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 , the second front end support portion 209 is a plate member facing the widest surface of the elongated box shape of the frame body 110, and is connected to the driving portion 204, the first front end support portion 206, The other face of the tape feed claw unit 208 is kept facing. That is, the second front end support portion 209 and the support member 222 are disposed at positions sandwiching the driving portion 204 , the first front end support portion 206 , and the holding tape feed claw unit 208 . The second front end support portion 209 is fixed to the support member 222 via the connection portion 226 and the linkage mechanism 211 . The second front end support portion 209 is a mechanism for supporting a return direction holding tape feed claw unit 210 described later, and is connected to the interlocking mechanism 211 by a connection portion 226 . Part of the vertically upper side of the second front end support portion 209 is exposed from the frame body 110 . That is, a part of the vertically upper side of the second front end support portion 209 is exposed from the outside of the frame body 110 where the guide groove 120 is formed and faces the frame body 110 . A gripping portion 228 is provided on a part of the vertically upper side of the second front end support portion 209 . In addition, the supporting member 222 and the second distal end support portion 209 support the first distal end support portion 206 in a movable state in the holding tape feeding direction.
连结部226由螺栓以及螺母等构成,将第2前端支撑部209固定在联动机构211上。抓持部228如上述所示,设置在第2前端支撑部209的铅垂方向上侧的一部分处。抓持部228是可以由操作人员抓持的部分。抓持部228形成为易于使操作人员将第2前端支撑部209沿与保持带进给方向平行的方向移动的形状。操作人员通过使第2前端支撑部209沿与保持带进给方向平行的方向移动,从而可以使保持带进给爪单元208和返回方向保持带进给爪单元210,沿与保持带进给方向平行的方向移动。The connecting portion 226 is composed of bolts, nuts, etc., and fixes the second front end support portion 209 to the linkage mechanism 211 . The grip portion 228 is provided on a part of the vertically upper side of the second front end support portion 209 as described above. The grip portion 228 is a portion that can be gripped by an operator. The grip portion 228 is formed in a shape that facilitates the operator to move the second front end support portion 209 in a direction parallel to the feeding direction of the holding belt. The operator moves the second front end support portion 209 in a direction parallel to the holding tape feeding direction, so that the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 and the returning direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 can be moved along the direction parallel to the holding tape feeding direction. Move in a parallel direction.
返回方向保持带进给爪单元210为与保持带进给爪单元208基本相同的结构。返回方向保持带进给爪单元210的朝向与支撑部202的表面正交,配置在远离保持带进给爪单元208的位置且与保持带进给爪单元208相对的位置上。返回方向保持带进给爪单元210固定在第2前端支撑部209上,与第2前端支撑部209一起沿直线移动方向(驱动部204的可动部移动的方向)移动。另外,返回方向保持带进给爪单元210使直线移动方向上的进给爪的朝向与保持带进给爪单元208相反。另外,返回方向保持带进给爪单元210使进给爪的凸部向与支撑部202侧相反的一侧凸出。The return direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 has basically the same structure as the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 . The direction of the return direction holding tape feed claw unit 210 is perpendicular to the surface of the support portion 202 and is arranged at a position away from the holding tape feed claw unit 208 and opposite to the holding tape feed claw unit 208 . The return direction holding belt feed claw unit 210 is fixed to the second front end support portion 209 and moves in the linear movement direction (the direction in which the movable portion of the drive portion 204 moves) together with the second front end support portion 209 . In addition, the returning direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 has the feeding claw in the linear movement direction facing opposite to the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 . In addition, the return direction holding tape feed claw unit 210 has the convex portion of the feed claw protrude toward the side opposite to the support portion 202 side.
联动机构211是将从驱动部204传递至第1前端支撑部206的动力向第2前端支撑部209传递的机构。联动机构211如图40所示,具有第1滑动机构242、传动部244以及第2滑动机构246。第1滑动机构242具有固定部242a和可动部242b。固定部242a固定在支撑部202上。可动部242b以可沿直线移动方向(驱动部204的可动部移动的方向)移动的状态支撑在固定部242a上。可动部242b固定在第1前端支撑部206上,与第1前端支撑部206一起沿直线移动方向移动。The interlocking mechanism 211 is a mechanism that transmits power transmitted from the drive unit 204 to the first distal end support portion 206 to the second distal end support portion 209 . As shown in FIG. 40 , the interlocking mechanism 211 has a first slide mechanism 242 , a transmission unit 244 , and a second slide mechanism 246 . The first slide mechanism 242 has a fixed portion 242a and a movable portion 242b. The fixing part 242a is fixed on the supporting part 202 . The movable part 242b is supported by the fixed part 242a in a state of being movable in a linear movement direction (the direction in which the movable part of the driving part 204 moves). The movable part 242b is fixed to the first front end support part 206, and moves along the linear movement direction together with the first front end support part 206. As shown in FIG.
传动部244是将从第1滑动机构242传递来的动力向第2滑动机构246传递的传动机构。传动部244具有经由销固定在支撑部上的齿轮。The transmission unit 244 is a transmission mechanism that transmits power transmitted from the first slide mechanism 242 to the second slide mechanism 246 . The transmission part 244 has a gear fixed to the support part via a pin.
第2滑动机构246具有固定部246a和可动部246b。固定部246a固定在支撑部202上。可动部246b以可沿直线移动方向(驱动部204的可动部移动的方向)移动的状态支撑在固定部246a上。可动部246b固定在第2前端支撑部209上,与第2前端支撑部209一起沿直线移动方向移动。The second slide mechanism 246 has a fixed portion 246a and a movable portion 246b. The fixing part 246a is fixed on the supporting part 202 . The movable part 246b is supported by the fixed part 246a in a state of being movable in a linear movement direction (the direction in which the movable part of the driving part 204 moves). The movable part 246b is fixed to the second front end support part 209, and moves in the linear movement direction together with the second front end support part 209. FIG.
联动机构211具有上述结构,作为传动部244,齿轮嵌入在第1滑动机构242的可动部242b上形成的齿轮槽以及在第2滑动机构246的可动部246b上形成的齿轮槽中。即,联动机构211利用齿轮齿条机构将传动部244和第1滑动机构242连结,利用齿轮齿条机构将传动部244和第2滑动机构246连结。另外,如图40所示,对于联动机构211,将传动部244和第1滑动机构242连结的位置、以及将传动部244和第2滑动机构246连结的位置,成为与齿轮相对的位置。由此,在供给器单元200中,如果齿轮旋转,则第1滑动机构242和第2滑动机构246沿直线移动方向向彼此相反的朝向移动。The linkage mechanism 211 has the above-mentioned structure, and as the transmission part 244 , gears are inserted into the gear grooves formed in the movable part 242b of the first slide mechanism 242 and the gear grooves formed in the movable part 246b of the second slide mechanism 246 . That is, the interlocking mechanism 211 connects the transmission part 244 and the 1st slide mechanism 242 by a rack and pinion mechanism, and connects the transmission part 244 and the 2nd slide mechanism 246 by a rack and pinion mechanism. In addition, as shown in FIG. 40, in the interlocking mechanism 211, the position where the transmission part 244 and the first slide mechanism 242 are connected, and the position where the transmission part 244 and the second slide mechanism 246 are connected are positions facing the gears. Accordingly, in the feeder unit 200, when the gear rotates, the first slide mechanism 242 and the second slide mechanism 246 move in directions opposite to each other along the linear movement direction.
在这里,对固定供给器单元200的框体280进行说明。如图41所示,框体280形成与上述框体110相同的引导槽282。引导槽282的形状为,将沿框体280的铅垂方向上侧的细长表面的长度方向形成的2条直线部283、285的一侧端部在折回部284处连结。即,引导槽282形成为下述U字形状,即,直线部283从框体280的一侧端部向另一侧端部附近延伸,在另一侧端部附近的折回部284处折回,直线部285延伸至一侧端部。引导槽282是对电子部件保持带进行引导的槽,从U字形状的一侧端部(供给侧的端部)供给电子部件保持带。引导槽282使所供给的电子部件保持带沿U字形状移动,从U字形状的一侧端部(排出侧的端部)排出。另外,引导槽282对保持带主体位于框体280的内部且电子部件露出于框体280外部的状态的电子部件保持带进行引导。框体280的折回部284在保持带的输送区域的外周侧配置引导部286a,在保持带的输送区域的内周侧配置有引导部286b。引导部286a、286b分别形成为沿折回的输送区域的外周和内周弯曲的曲面形状。框体280通过在折回部284处设置引导部286a、286b而可以利用折回部284使保持带沿适当的方向移动。Here, the housing 280 of the fixed feeder unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41 , the frame body 280 forms the same guide groove 282 as that of the frame body 110 described above. The shape of the guide groove 282 is such that one end of two linear portions 283 and 285 formed along the longitudinal direction of the vertically upper elongated surface of the frame body 280 is connected at the folded portion 284 . That is, the guide groove 282 is formed in a U-shape, that is, the straight portion 283 extends from one end of the frame body 280 to the vicinity of the other end, and is folded back at the turn-back portion 284 near the other end. The straight portion 285 extends to one end. The guide groove 282 is a groove for guiding the electronic component holding tape, and the electronic component holding tape is supplied from one end portion (end portion on the supply side) of the U-shape. The guide groove 282 moves the supplied electronic component holding tape along the U-shape, and is discharged from one end portion (the discharge-side end portion) of the U-shape. In addition, the guide groove 282 guides the electronic component holding tape in a state where the main body of the tape is located inside the housing 280 and the electronic components are exposed outside the housing 280 . In the folded portion 284 of the frame body 280 , a guide portion 286 a is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the conveying area of the holding tape, and a guide portion 286 b is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the conveying area of the holding tape. The guide portions 286a, 286b are each formed in a curved surface shape curved along the outer circumference and inner circumference of the folded-back conveyance area. The frame body 280 can move the holding belt in an appropriate direction by using the folded portion 284 by providing guide portions 286 a and 286 b at the folded portion 284 .
下面,使用图42和图43,对供给器单元200的电子部件保持带的进给动作进行说明。如图42所示,对于供给器单元200,在第1前端支撑部206上固定保持带进给爪单元208,在第2前端支撑部209上固定返回方向保持带进给爪单元210。Next, the feeding operation of the electronic component holding tape of the feeder unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43 . As shown in FIG. 42 , in the feeder unit 200 , the tape feed claw unit 208 is fixed and held on the first front end support portion 206 , and the return direction holding tape feed claw unit 210 is fixed on the second front end support portion 209 .
保持带进给爪单元208具有进给爪152。进给爪152与上述保持带进给爪单元148相同地,是具有在棒状部件的一侧端部凸出的凸部152a的部件。进给爪152配置在与电子部件保持带70的保持带主体的孔相对的位置上,凸部152a的形状为,保持带进给方向上的进给方向下游侧(进给方向的前侧)的面152b成为与进给方向正交的面,保持带进给方向上的进给方向上游侧(进给方向的后侧)的面152c成为相对于与进给方向正交的面倾斜的面,随着接近保持带,进给方向上的宽度变窄。进给爪152在与凸部152a相对的位置上有孔78的情况下,如图42所示成为凸部152a插入孔中的状态。在这里,保持带进给爪单元208配置在与位于引导槽282的直线部283中的保持带70相对的位置上,凸部152a配置在折回部284侧。保持带进给爪单元208将位于引导槽282的直线部283中的保持带70向吸附电子部件的保持区域PP输送。The holding tape feed claw unit 208 has a feed claw 152 . The feeding claw 152 is a member having a convex portion 152a protruding from one end portion of a rod-shaped member, similarly to the holding tape feeding claw unit 148 described above. The feed claw 152 is arranged at a position facing the hole of the holding tape main body of the electronic component holding tape 70, and the shape of the protrusion 152a is such that the holding tape is fed on the downstream side in the feeding direction (front side in the feeding direction). The surface 152b is a surface orthogonal to the feeding direction, and the surface 152c on the upstream side (rear side of the feeding direction) of the holding tape feeding direction is a surface inclined relative to the surface orthogonal to the feeding direction. , the width in the feed direction narrows as it approaches the holding belt. When the feed claw 152 has the hole 78 at a position facing the convex portion 152a, the convex portion 152a is inserted into the hole as shown in FIG. 42 . Here, the holding tape feed claw unit 208 is disposed at a position facing the holding tape 70 located in the straight portion 283 of the guide groove 282 , and the convex portion 152 a is disposed on the folded portion 284 side. The holding tape feed claw unit 208 feeds the holding tape 70 positioned in the straight portion 283 of the guide groove 282 toward the holding area PP where electronic components are attracted.
返回方向保持带进给爪单元210具有进给爪252。进给爪252与上述保持带进给爪单元208相同地,是具有在棒状部件的一侧端部凸出的凸部252a的部件。进给爪252配置在与保持带70的保持带主体的孔相对的位置上,凸部252a的形状为,保持带进给方向上的进给方向下游侧(进给方向的前侧)的面252b成为与进给方向正交的面,保持带进给方向上的进给方向上游侧(进给方向的后侧)的面252c成为相对于与进给方向正交的面倾斜的面,随着接近保持带,进给方向上的宽度变窄。进给爪252在与凸部252a相对的位置上有孔78的情况下,如图42所示成为凸部252a插入孔中的状态。在这里,返回方向保持带进给爪单元210配置与位于引导槽282的直线部285中的保持带70相对的位置上,凸部252a配置在与折回部284侧相反的一侧。即,返回方向保持带进给爪单元210的进给爪252配置为,在直线移动方向上与保持带进给爪单元208的进给爪152相反的朝向。返回方向保持带进给爪单元210将通过吸附电子部件的保持区域PP后的保持带70,向引导槽282的直线部285的排出部输送。The return direction holding belt feed claw unit 210 has a feed claw 252 . The feed claw 252 is a member having a convex portion 252 a protruding from one end portion of a rod-shaped member, similarly to the holding tape feed claw unit 208 described above. The feed claw 252 is arranged at a position facing the hole of the holding tape main body of the holding tape 70, and the shape of the protrusion 252a is a surface on the downstream side in the feeding direction (front side in the feeding direction) of the holding tape feeding direction. 252b becomes a surface perpendicular to the feeding direction, and the surface 252c holding the upstream side of the feeding direction (rear side in the feeding direction) in the belt feeding direction becomes a surface inclined with respect to the surface orthogonal to the feeding direction. As it approaches the holding belt, the width in the feed direction becomes narrower. When the feed claw 252 has the hole 78 at a position facing the convex portion 252a, the convex portion 252a is inserted into the hole as shown in FIG. 42 . Here, the return direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 is arranged at a position facing the holding tape 70 in the straight portion 285 of the guide groove 282, and the convex portion 252a is arranged on the opposite side to the folded portion 284 side. That is, the feed claw 252 of the return direction holding tape feed claw unit 210 is disposed in a direction opposite to that of the feed claw 152 of the holding tape feed claw unit 208 in the linear movement direction. The return direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 feeds the holding tape 70 passing through the holding area PP where the electronic component is sucked, to the discharge portion of the linear portion 285 of the guide groove 282 .
下面,使用图43,对供给器单元200的保持带进给动作进行说明。在步骤S6中,进给爪152的凸部152a向保持带70的保持带主体的孔78中插入,进给爪252的凸部向保持带主体的孔中插入。在这里,进给爪152的凸部插入至保持带进给方向上与保持区域PP相比位于上游侧(通过保持区域PP之前)的保持带70的孔中。进给爪252的凸部插入至保持带进给方向上与保持区域PP相比位于下游侧(通过保持区域PP之后)且在折回部284处折回的保持带的孔中。供给器单元200在如步骤S6所示,使进给爪152的凸部插入孔中、使进给爪252的凸部插入孔中的状态下,使驱动部204驱动,保持带进给爪单元208、返回方向保持带进给爪单元210沿保持带进给方向移动与保持带主体的1个孔间距对应的量。Next, the holding tape feeding operation of the feeder unit 200 will be described using FIG. 43 . In step S6, the protrusion 152a of the feeding claw 152 is inserted into the hole 78 of the holding belt main body of the holding belt 70, and the protrusion of the feeding claw 252 is inserted into the hole of the holding belt main body. Here, the protrusions of the feed claws 152 are inserted into the holes of the holding tape 70 located upstream (before passing the holding area PP) from the holding area PP in the holding tape feeding direction. The convex portion of the feed claw 252 is inserted into a hole of the holding tape that is located on the downstream side (after passing through the holding area PP) than the holding area PP in the holding tape feeding direction and is turned back at the turn-back portion 284 . In the feeder unit 200, as shown in step S6, the driving part 204 is driven in a state where the convex portion of the feed claw 152 is inserted into the hole and the convex portion of the feed claw 252 is inserted into the hole, and the tape feed claw unit is held. 208 . The returning direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 moves along the holding tape feeding direction by an amount corresponding to the distance between one hole of the holding tape main body.
如果供给器单元200在步骤S6的状态下,将保持带进给爪单元208、返回方向保持带进给爪单元210沿保持带进给方向输送,则利用进给爪152的凸部的与进给方向正交的面以及进给爪252的凸部的与进给方向正交的面,将孔向保持带进给方向推压,如步骤S7所示,使保持带进给爪单元208和保持带均向保持带进给方向移动。在这里,保持带进给爪单元208和返回方向保持带进给爪单元210,利用联动机构211向彼此相反的方向移动。如上述所示,返回方向保持带进给爪单元210,通过沿与保持带进给爪单元208相反的方向移动,从而可以将具有插入进给爪152、252的孔的保持带,沿保持带进给方向即引导槽282,向从引导部朝向排出部的方向输送。If the feeder unit 200 is in the state of step S6, and the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 and the return direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 are conveyed along the holding tape feeding direction, then the convex portion of the feeding claw 152 is utilized to feed the claw unit 208. The surface perpendicular to the feed direction and the surface perpendicular to the feed direction of the convex portion of the feed claw 252 push the hole to the feed direction of the holding tape, and as shown in step S7, the feed claw unit 208 and the feed claw unit 208 of the holding tape are kept The holding belts all move in the feeding direction of the holding belt. Here, the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 and the returning direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 are moved in opposite directions by the interlocking mechanism 211 . As described above, the return direction holds the tape feeding claw unit 210 by moving in the direction opposite to the holding tape feeding claw unit 208, so that the holding tape having holes inserted into the feeding claws 152, 252 can be moved along the holding tape. The feed direction, that is, the guide groove 282, feeds in the direction from the guide portion toward the discharge portion.
如果保持带进给爪单元208、返回方向保持带进给爪单元210沿保持带进给方向的移动结束(步骤S7),则供给器单元200使保持带主体所保持的前端的电子部件处于保持位置而待机。此时,位于保持位置(保持区域)PP的电子部件,电子部件主体被夹持并由切断部将引线切断。然后,在电子部件安装装置侧进行规定的处理,例如将保持带所保持的位于保持位置的电子部件向搭载头供给后,发送驱动指令,使驱动部204驱动,使保持带进给爪单元208、返回方向保持带进给爪单元210沿与保持带进给方向相反的方向,移动与保持带主体72的1个孔间距对应的量。如果供给器单元200在步骤S7的状态下,将保持带进给爪单元208、返回方向保持带进给爪单元210向与保持带进给方向相反的一侧输送,则进给爪152、252的凸部的倾斜面与孔接触,使进给爪152、252的凸部沿着倾斜向从孔中拔出的方向移动。由此,供给器单元200如步骤S8所示,使进给爪152、252的凸部从孔中脱离(步骤S8),保持带不移动,保持带进给爪单元208、返回方向保持带进给爪单元210向与保持带进给方向的相反侧移动。If the movement of the holding tape feeding claw unit 208, the return direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 in the holding tape feeding direction ends (step S7), the feeder unit 200 puts the electronic component at the front end held by the holding tape main body in a holding position. position and stand by. At this time, the lead wires of the electronic component located at the holding position (holding area) PP are clamped by the electronic component main body, and the cutting portion cuts off the leads. Then, predetermined processing is performed on the electronic component mounting apparatus side, for example, after supplying the electronic component at the holding position held by the holding tape to the mounting head, a drive command is sent to drive the drive unit 204 to feed the holding tape to the claw unit 208. . Return direction Holding tape feeding claw unit 210 moves by an amount corresponding to one hole pitch of holding tape main body 72 in a direction opposite to the holding tape feeding direction. If the feeder unit 200 is in the state of step S7, and the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 and the return direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 are transported to the opposite side to the holding tape feeding direction, the feeding claws 152, 252 The inclined surfaces of the protrusions of the feed claws 152 and 252 are in contact with the holes, so that the protrusions of the feed claws 152, 252 move along the inclination in the direction of pulling out from the holes. Thus, the feeder unit 200 disengages the protrusions of the feed claws 152, 252 from the holes as shown in step S8 (step S8), keeps the tape from moving, holds the tape feed claw unit 208, and keeps the tape forward in the return direction. The gripper unit 210 moves to the side opposite to the feeding direction of the holding tape.
然后,在供给器单元200从步骤S7所示的状态开始,使保持带进给爪单元208、返回方向保持带进给爪单元210沿与保持带进给方向相反的方向,移动与保持带主体72的1个孔间距对应的量后,如步骤S9所示,成为进给爪152、252的凸部插入与步骤S7中插入的孔相比位于上游侧的1个间距量的孔中的状态。然后,驱动部204立即向保持带进给方向驱动,将保持带主体72中保持的下一个电子部件向保持位置输送。Then, start from the state shown in step S7 in the feeder unit 200, make the holding tape feeding claw unit 208, the return direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 move and hold the tape main body in the direction opposite to the holding tape feeding direction. After an amount corresponding to 1 hole pitch of 72, as shown in step S9, the protrusions of the feed claws 152, 252 are inserted into the holes of 1 pitch on the upstream side compared with the holes inserted in step S7. . Immediately thereafter, the driving unit 204 is driven in the holding tape feeding direction to convey the next electronic component held in the holding tape main body 72 to the holding position.
供给器单元200如上述所示,通过利用驱动部204使保持带进给爪单元208以保持带主体72的1个孔间距对应的量沿进给方向往复运动,从而可以使保持带沿进给方向顺次移动1个间距的量。As described above, the feeder unit 200 can feed the holding tape along the feeding direction by reciprocating the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 by the driving unit 204 in the feeding direction by an amount corresponding to one hole pitch of the holding tape main body 72 . The direction moves sequentially by the amount of 1 pitch.
另外,供给器单元200通过设置返回方向保持带进给爪单元210,利用联动机构211,使返回方向保持带进给爪单元210与保持带进给爪单元208联动而进行驱动,从而可以将通过保持区域PP后的保持带沿进给方向输送。如上述所示,由于可以将通过保持区域PP后的保持带沿进给方向输送,所以可以在保持区域PP的上游和下游这两侧使保持带移动。由此,可以抑制在保持区域PP中保持带弯曲或保持带的位置偏移的情况。另外,本实施方式的供给器单元200,通过利用联动机构211使保持带进给爪单元208和返回方向保持带进给爪单元210联动地移动,从而可以利用1个驱动机构使2个进给爪移动。另外,通过联动地移动,可以将2个进给爪之间的距离维持固定,可以适当地输送保持带。In addition, the feeder unit 200 is provided with the return direction holding tape feed claw unit 210, and the return direction holding tape feed claw unit 210 is driven in conjunction with the holding tape feed claw unit 208 by using the linkage mechanism 211, so that The holding belt behind the holding area PP is conveyed in the feed direction. As described above, since the holding belt passing through the holding area PP can be conveyed in the feed direction, the holding belt can be moved both upstream and downstream of the holding area PP. Thereby, it is possible to suppress bending of the holding tape or misalignment of the holding tape in the holding area PP. In addition, in the feeder unit 200 of the present embodiment, the holding tape feeding claw unit 208 and the return direction holding tape feeding claw unit 210 are moved in conjunction with the interlocking mechanism 211, so that two feeding claws can be fed by one drive mechanism. The claw moves. In addition, by moving in conjunction, the distance between the two feed claws can be maintained constant, and the holding belt can be fed appropriately.
在这里,优选电子部件供给装置100如上述各实施方式所示,在保持带进给方向上,在供给器单元200中进给爪152的配置位置的下游侧、且与折回部相比的上游侧配置保持区域(保持位置)PP。即,优选在电子部件供给装置100中,将利用吸嘴32保持电子部件80的保持区域PP,配置在将电子部件保持带70向保持区域输送的进给爪152和引导槽282的折回部之间所夹持的位置之间。由此,可以抑制通过保持区域PP的电子部件保持带70弯曲或变形的情况,可以使保持区域PP处的电子部件保持带70的位置以及电子部件80的位置稳定。Here, it is preferable that the electronic component supply apparatus 100 is located downstream of the arrangement position of the feed claw 152 in the feeder unit 200 and upstream of the turn-back portion in the feeding direction of the holding tape as shown in the above-described embodiments. The side configuration holding area (holding position) PP. That is, it is preferable that in the electronic component supply apparatus 100, the holding area PP where the electronic component 80 is held by the suction nozzle 32 is arranged between the feed claw 152 that transports the electronic component holding tape 70 to the holding area and the folded-back portion of the guide groove 282. between the clamped positions. Thereby, bending or deformation of the electronic component holding tape 70 passing through the holding area PP can be suppressed, and the position of the electronic component holding tape 70 and the position of the electronic component 80 in the holding area PP can be stabilized.
图44是表示部件供给装置的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。图45是将图44的局部放大而表示的说明图。电子部件供给装置310具有与供给器单元连结的板状部件312,在框体上形成开口314。板状部件312与供给器单元的固定部一起沿输送方向移动。开口314在板状部件312的可动范围中的与板状部件312的端部重合的位置处,形成沿铅垂方向延伸的多个边314a、314b、314c、314d。在这里,边314a、314b、314c、314d形成在与各种保持带的孔的间隔以及电子部件相对于孔的配置对应的位置上。使用者针对保持带的孔的间隔以及电子部件相对于孔的配置的组合,使板状部件312的边的位置和与边314a、314b、314c、314d的条件一致的边对齐,从而可以由供给器单元将电子部件向保持区域输送。此外,在本实施方式中,与上述实施方式相同地,保持带的孔的间隔以及电子部件相对于孔的配置的组合为4种情况,但只要与组合对应而变更开口314的形状即可。Fig. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of the component supply device. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged part of FIG. 44 . The electronic component supply device 310 has a plate-shaped member 312 connected to the feeder unit, and an opening 314 is formed in the housing. The plate member 312 moves in the conveying direction together with the fixing portion of the feeder unit. The opening 314 forms a plurality of sides 314 a , 314 b , 314 c , and 314 d extending in the vertical direction at positions overlapping the ends of the plate member 312 within the movable range of the plate member 312 . Here, the sides 314a, 314b, 314c, and 314d are formed at positions corresponding to the intervals of the holes of the various holding tapes and the arrangement of the electronic components with respect to the holes. The user aligns the positions of the sides of the plate-shaped member 312 with the sides that match the conditions of the sides 314a, 314b, 314c, and 314d with respect to the combination of the spacing of the holes of the holding tape and the arrangement of the electronic components relative to the holes, so that the The controller unit transports the electronic components to the holding area. In addition, in the present embodiment, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, there are four kinds of combinations of the spacing of the holes of the tape and the arrangement of the electronic components with respect to the holes, but the shape of the opening 314 may be changed according to the combination.
图46是表示部件供给装置的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。图47是将图46的局部放大而表示的说明图。图46及图47所示的电子部件供给装置320在排出部配置有保持带排出引导部322。保持带排出引导部322以与排出部相对的面上的半圆筒与铅垂方向形成的角为60度的朝向进行配置。另外,保持带排出引导部322在与引导部122相对的面上配置板状部件。电子部件供给装置320通过配置保持带排出引导部322,从而可以使从排出部126排出的保持带沿半圆筒部改变方向,向铅垂方向下侧适当地进行引导。由此,可以对通过引导槽并从排出部排出的电子部件保持带的排出角度进行限制。保持带排出引导部322通过将与排出部相对的面设为圆筒,从而可以减小对电子部件保持带施加的负载,可以适当地使电子部件保持带改变方向。另外,保持带排出引导部322通过将圆筒部的倾斜角度设为相对于铅垂方向60度,从而可以减小对电子部件保持带施加的负载,可以适当地使电子部件保持带改变方向。此外,保持带排出引导部322通过采用图46、47的结构,从而可以顺畅地改变方向,可以向期望的位置排出电子部件保持带,但并不限定于该结构。Fig. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of the components supply device. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged part of FIG. 46 . In the electronic component supply apparatus 320 shown in FIGS. 46 and 47 , a holding tape discharge guide 322 is disposed on the discharge portion. The holding tape ejection guide 322 is arranged in a direction in which the angle formed by the semi-cylindrical and the vertical direction on the surface opposite to the ejection portion is 60 degrees. In addition, the holding tape discharge guide 322 is provided with a plate-shaped member on a surface facing the guide 122 . The electronic component supply apparatus 320 can change the direction of the holding tape ejected from the ejection portion 126 along the semi-cylindrical portion by disposing the holding tape ejection guide portion 322 and guide it appropriately downward in the vertical direction. Accordingly, the discharge angle of the electronic component holding tape that passes through the guide groove and is discharged from the discharge portion can be restricted. The holding tape ejection guide 322 can reduce the load applied to the electronic component holding tape by making the surface facing the ejection portion cylindrical, and can appropriately change the direction of the electronic component holding tape. In addition, the holding tape ejection guide 322 can reduce the load on the electronic component holding tape by setting the inclination angle of the cylindrical portion to 60 degrees with respect to the vertical direction, and can appropriately change the direction of the electronic component holding tape. In addition, since the holding tape ejection guide 322 adopts the structure of FIGS. 46 and 47 , the direction can be changed smoothly and the electronic component holding tape can be ejected to a desired position, but the structure is not limited to this.
图48是表示部件供给装置的其他例子的概略结构的说明图。图49是将图48的局部放大而表示的说明图。图48及图49所示的电子部件供给装置320,在引导部122上设置有部件放置箱324。部件放置箱324设置锁部326,锁部326与引导部122连结,支撑在引导部122上。部件放置箱324对向电子部件供给装置320供给的电子部件保持带进行收容。此外,电子部件保持带也可以与收容该电子部件保持带的箱子一起放置在部件放置箱324中。电子部件供给装置320通过设置部件放置箱324,可以缩短储存电子部件保持带的位置和引导部122之间的距离。由此,可以减小从储存电子部件保持带的位置向引导部122输送的期间对电子部件保持带施加的负载。由此,可以利用电子部件供给装置320适当地输送电子部件保持带。另外,可以抑制电子部件保持带因自重而断裂或将孔拉长的情况。Fig. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of the components supply device. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged part of FIG. 48 . In the electronic component supply device 320 shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 , a component storage box 324 is provided on the guide portion 122 . The component storage box 324 is provided with a lock portion 326 connected to the guide portion 122 and supported by the guide portion 122 . The component storage box 324 accommodates the electronic component holding tape supplied to the electronic component supply device 320 . In addition, the electronic component holding tape may be placed in the component storage box 324 together with a box accommodating the electronic component holding tape. The electronic component supply device 320 can shorten the distance between the position where the electronic component holding tape is stored and the guide part 122 by providing the component storage box 324 . Thereby, the load applied to the electronic component holding tape during conveyance from the position where the electronic component holding tape is stored to the guide portion 122 can be reduced. Accordingly, the electronic component holding tape can be appropriately conveyed by the electronic component supply device 320 . In addition, it is possible to suppress the electronic component holding tape from breaking due to its own weight or from elongating the hole.
下面,对部件供给单元14f进行说明。在这里,部件供给单元14f具有2个碗式供给器组合体90。2个碗式供给器组合体90并列地配置,基本上为相同的结构。下面,对1个碗式供给器组合体90进行说明。Next, the components supply unit 14f will be described. Here, the components supply unit 14f has two bowl feeder assemblies 90. The two bowl feeder assemblies 90 are arranged in parallel and basically have the same structure. Next, one bowl feeder assembly 90 will be described.
图50是表示碗式供给器组合体的概略结构的斜视图。图51是表示图50所示的碗式供给器组合体的概略结构的斜视图。碗式供给器组合体90如图50及图51所示,具有2个碗式供给器单元400和支撑机构401。在本实施方式中,碗式供给器单元400以及碗式供给器组合体90由控制部对动作进行控制。碗式供给器单元400以及碗式供给器组合体90可以将电子部件安装装置10所具有的控制装置20作为控制部使用,也可以是碗式供给器单元400以及碗式供给器组合体90具有控制部。Fig. 50 is a perspective view showing a schematic structure of the bowl feeder assembly. Fig. 51 is a perspective view showing a schematic structure of the bowl feeder assembly shown in Fig. 50 . The bowl feeder assembly 90 has two bowl feeder units 400 and a support mechanism 401 as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 . In this embodiment, the operation of the bowl feeder unit 400 and the bowl feeder assembly 90 is controlled by a control unit. The bowl feeder unit 400 and the bowl feeder assembly 90 may use the control device 20 included in the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 as a control unit, or the bowl feeder unit 400 and the bowl feeder assembly 90 may have control department.
支撑机构401是对2个碗式供给器单元400进行支撑的机构。支撑机构401具有支撑板491、支撑棒492以及连结部493。支撑板491是板状部件,设置并固定2个碗式供给器单元400。支撑板491的供给部件侧的前端与前侧收容器44的定位轴44b以及凹部44c连结。支撑棒492经由连结部493与支撑板491的远离前侧收容器44的一侧连结。支撑棒492的铅垂方向下侧的端部,支撑在设置电子部件安装装置10的设置面(地面)上。支撑机构401利用前侧收容器44和支撑棒492对设置有2个碗式供给器单元400的支撑板491进行支撑。支撑机构401通过在前侧收容器44和远离前侧收容器44的支撑棒492这2个部位处对支撑板491进行支撑,从而可以抑制支撑板491弯曲。由此,可以抑制碗式供给器单元400的振动成为支撑板491的振动而被吸收的情况,可以适当地对碗式供给器单元400进行驱动。The support mechanism 401 is a mechanism that supports the two bowl feeder units 400 . The support mechanism 401 has a support plate 491 , a support rod 492 and a connection part 493 . The support plate 491 is a plate-shaped member, and the two bowl feeder units 400 are installed and fixed. The front end of the support plate 491 on the supply member side is connected to the positioning shaft 44 b and the recess 44 c of the front container 44 . The support rod 492 is connected to the side of the support plate 491 away from the front container 44 via the connection portion 493 . The vertically lower end of the support rod 492 is supported on the installation surface (floor) on which the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 is installed. The support mechanism 401 supports the support plate 491 provided with the two bowl feeder units 400 by the front container 44 and the support rod 492 . The support mechanism 401 can suppress the support plate 491 from bending by supporting the support plate 491 at two locations of the front container 44 and the support bar 492 away from the front container 44 . Thereby, the vibration of the bowl feeder unit 400 can be suppressed from being absorbed as the vibration of the support plate 491, and the bowl feeder unit 400 can be driven appropriately.
碗式供给器组合体90所具有的1个碗式供给器单元400配置为,后述的收容碗与其他碗式供给器单元400的收容碗沿铅垂方向排成2列,且相对于保持位置(导轨422的前端、吸附位置)沿前后偏移。即,碗式供给器组合体90在Y方向上,2个碗式供给器单元400的后述收容碗配置在前后位置上。并且,在X方向(与后述的导轨延伸方向正交的方向、基板的输送方向)上,第1列的碗式供给器单元400所具有的收容碗和第2列的碗式供给器单元400所具有的收容碗之间的配置区域的至少一部分重合。即,碗式供给器组合体90在X方向上,2个碗式供给器单元400的后述收容碗的位置重合地配置。另外,碗式供给器组合体90在Y方向上,2个碗式供给器单元400的后述收容碗配置在前后位置上。由此,碗式供给器组合体90可以高效地配置碗式供给器单元400。具体地说,可以使X方向的宽度变窄,可以在电子部件安装装置10的部件可供给区域中配置更多的部件供给装置。One bowl feeder unit 400 of the bowl feeder assembly 90 is arranged so that the storage bowls described later and the storage bowls of other bowl feeder units 400 are arranged in two rows in the vertical direction, and are held with respect to each other. The positions (the front end of the guide rail 422 , the suction position) are shifted forward and backward. That is, in the bowl feeder assembly 90 , storage bowls described later of the two bowl feeder units 400 are arranged at front and rear positions in the Y direction. In addition, in the X direction (the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the guide rail described later, the conveying direction of the substrate), the storage bowls included in the bowl feeder units 400 in the first row and the bowl feeder units in the second row At least a part of the arrangement area between the storage bowls included in 400 overlaps. That is, in the bowl feeder assembly 90 , the bowl feeder units 400 of the two bowl feeder units 400 are arranged so that the bowl storage positions described later overlap with each other in the X direction. In addition, in the bowl feeder assembly 90 , storage bowls described later of the two bowl feeder units 400 are arranged at front and rear positions in the Y direction. Thereby, the bowl feeder assembly 90 can arrange the bowl feeder unit 400 efficiently. Specifically, the width in the X direction can be narrowed, and more component supply devices can be arranged in the component supplyable area of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 .
在本实施方式中,第1列的碗式供给器单元400所具有的收容碗和第2列的碗式供给器单元400(与第1列的碗式供给器单元400相比配置在远离保持位置的位置处)所具有的收容碗,在与导轨的延伸方向正交的方向(X方向、基板的输送方向)上,配置在小于收容碗的外径的2倍的区域中。这样,可以可靠地使X方向的宽度变窄,可以在电子部件安装装置10的部件可供给区域中配置更多的部件供给装置。In this embodiment, the storage bowls of the bowl feeder units 400 in the first row and the bowl feeder units 400 in the second row (compared with the bowl feeder units 400 in the first row are arranged at a distance from the holding bowl). position) is disposed in an area smaller than twice the outer diameter of the housing bowl in a direction (X direction, substrate conveyance direction) perpendicular to the direction in which the guide rails extend. In this way, the width in the X direction can be reliably narrowed, and more component supply devices can be arranged in the component supplyable area of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 .
下面,使用图52至图67B,对部件供给单元14f的碗式供给器组合体90的碗式供给器单元400进行说明。图52至图67B所示的碗式供给器单元400将碗式供给器用作为电子部件供给装置。首先,使用图52至图54,对碗式供给器单元400的整体结构进行说明。图52是表示部件供给单元的其他例子的侧视图。图53是表示部件供给单元的其他例子的俯视图。图54是表示从图52所示的部件供给单元中拆卸收容碗后的状态的侧视图。Next, the bowl feeder unit 400 of the bowl feeder assembly 90 of the component supply unit 14f will be described using FIGS. 52 to 67B. The bowl feeder unit 400 shown in FIGS. 52 to 67B uses a bowl feeder as an electronic component supply device. First, the overall structure of the bowl feeder unit 400 will be described using FIGS. 52 to 54 . Fig. 52 is a side view showing another example of the component supply unit. Fig. 53 is a plan view showing another example of the component supply unit. Fig. 54 is a side view showing a state in which the storage bowl is removed from the component supply unit shown in Fig. 52 .
碗式供给器单元400具有电子部件供给装置(碗式供给器)402、404、406、驱动装置408以及固定部410。即,碗式供给器单元400是具有3个电子部件供给装置402、404、406而可以在3个部位供给部件的机构。另外,碗式供给器单元400的1个驱动装置408成为电子部件供给装置402、404、406的驱动部。另外,在碗式供给器单元400中,固定部410对电子部件供给装置402、404、406以及驱动装置408进行支撑。固定部410具有沿铅垂方向延伸的框形状的支撑部442和支撑部444,在上端和下端对电子部件供给装置402、404、406以及驱动装置408进行支撑。另外,支撑部442和支撑部444延伸至后述的驱动装置408的旋转轴为止,在驱动装置408可以以电子部件供给装置402、404、406的对象部分为旋转轴中心进行转动的状态下,对驱动装置408进行支撑。The bowl feeder unit 400 has electronic component supply devices (bowl feeders) 402 , 404 , and 406 , a drive device 408 , and a fixing unit 410 . That is, the bowl feeder unit 400 is a mechanism that has three electronic component supply devices 402, 404, and 406 and can supply components at three locations. In addition, one drive device 408 of the bowl feeder unit 400 serves as a drive unit of the electronic component supply devices 402 , 404 , and 406 . In addition, in the bowl feeder unit 400 , the fixing unit 410 supports the electronic component supply devices 402 , 404 , and 406 and the drive device 408 . The fixing part 410 has frame-shaped support parts 442 and 444 extending in the vertical direction, and supports the electronic component supply devices 402 , 404 , and 406 and the drive device 408 at upper and lower ends. In addition, the supporting part 442 and the supporting part 444 extend to the rotation shaft of the drive device 408 described later, and in the state where the drive device 408 can rotate around the target part of the electronic component supply device 402, 404, 406 as the center of the rotation shaft, The drive unit 408 is supported.
电子部件供给装置402具有收容碗420a、导轨422a、支撑机构424a以及连结部436a。电子部件供给装置404具有收容碗420b、导轨422b、支撑机构424b以及连结部436b。电子部件供给装置406具有收容碗420c、导轨422c、支撑机构424c以及连结部436c。电子部件供给装置402、404、406在收容碗420a、420b、420c的水平方向上的位置重叠的位置上层叠配置,从铅垂方向上方顺次以收容碗420a、420b、420c的顺序配置。另外,电子部件供给装置402、404、406中的支撑机构424a、424b、424c并列配置在同一平面上。即,多条导轨422a、422b、422c的各自的保持位置配置在同一平面上。The electronic component supply apparatus 402 has a storage bowl 420a, a guide rail 422a, a support mechanism 424a, and a connection part 436a. The electronic component supply apparatus 404 has a storage bowl 420b, a guide rail 422b, a support mechanism 424b, and a connection part 436b. The electronic component supply device 406 has a storage bowl 420c, a guide rail 422c, a support mechanism 424c, and a connection part 436c. The electronic component supply devices 402, 404, 406 are stacked at positions where the storage bowls 420a, 420b, 420c overlap in the horizontal direction, and are arranged in the order of the storage bowls 420a, 420b, 420c from above in the vertical direction. Moreover, the supporting mechanisms 424a, 424b, and 424c in the electronic component supply apparatuses 402, 404, and 406 are arranged in parallel on the same plane. That is, the respective holding positions of the plurality of guide rails 422a, 422b, and 422c are arranged on the same plane.
电子部件供给装置402、404、406仅配置位置不同、以及因该配置位置不同的关系而导轨422a、422b、422c的形状不同,基本上为相同结构。下面,针对电子部件供给装置402、404、406的收容碗420a、420b、420c的共同点,以收容碗420进行说明。相同地,针对导轨422a、422b、422c的共同点,以导轨422进行说明。针对支撑机构424a、424b、424c的共同点,以支撑机构424进行说明。针对连结部436a、436b、436c的共同点,以连结部436进行说明。The electronic component supply apparatuses 402, 404, and 406 differ only in arrangement positions and the shapes of guide rails 422a, 422b, and 422c due to the difference in arrangement positions, and have basically the same structure. Next, the storage bowl 420 will be used as the description regarding the common points of the storage bowls 420 a , 420 b , and 420 c of the electronic component supply apparatuses 402 , 404 , and 406 . Similarly, for the common points of the guide rails 422a, 422b, and 422c, the guide rail 422 will be used for description. Regarding the common points of the support mechanisms 424a, 424b, and 424c, the support mechanism 424 will be used for description. The common points of the connecting parts 436a, 436b, and 436c will be described using the connecting part 436 .
收容碗420是放入有多个电子部件的容器。导轨422成为将放入收容碗420中的电子部件向吸附位置引导的引导部件。支撑机构424是在吸附位置对由导轨422引导的电子部件进行支撑的机构。连结部436与收容碗420以及驱动装置408的施振部连结,从驱动装置408向收容碗420传递振动。此外,在本实施方式中,在电子部件供给装置402、404、406中,连结部436和驱动装置408成为振动部。下面,对各部分进行详细说明。The storage bowl 420 is a container in which a plurality of electronic components are placed. The guide rail 422 serves as a guide member that guides the electronic component placed in the storage bowl 420 to the suction position. The support mechanism 424 is a mechanism that supports the electronic component guided by the guide rail 422 at the suction position. The connecting portion 436 is connected to the storage bowl 420 and the vibrating portion of the drive device 408 , and transmits vibration from the drive device 408 to the storage bowl 420 . In addition, in this embodiment, in the electronic component supply apparatuses 402, 404, 406, the connection part 436 and the drive device 408 become a vibrating part. Next, each part will be described in detail.
使用图55及图56,对收容碗420进行说明。图55是表示图53所示的部件供给单元的电子部件供给装置的收容碗和振动部的支撑部之间的关系的说明图。图56是表示图55所示的收容碗的概略结构的说明图。收容碗420如上述所示,是放入有多个电子部件的容器。收容碗420的作为容器的主体450,是底面为圆形、外缘向与底面垂直的方向延伸、上表面开放的箱体形状。收容碗420在主体450的底面上,具有向铅垂方向下侧延伸的凸起部451,向凸起部451中插入有用于与连结部436紧固的紧固部件452。紧固部件452是螺钉(安装螺钉),可以以可相对于凸起部451旋转的状态、且以不从凸起部451脱离的构造进行支撑。连结部436设置有由紧固部件452进行紧固的紧固孔(螺钉孔)454。收容碗420通过使紧固部件452紧固在紧固孔454中,从而固定在连结部436上。The storage bowl 420 will be described using FIGS. 55 and 56 . FIG. 55 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the storage bowl of the electronic component supply device of the component supply unit shown in FIG. 53 and the support portion of the vibration unit. Fig. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of the storage bowl shown in Fig. 55 . The storage bowl 420 is a container in which a plurality of electronic components are contained as described above. The main body 450 serving as a container of the storage bowl 420 has a box shape with a circular bottom, an outer edge extending in a direction perpendicular to the bottom, and an open top. The storage bowl 420 has a protrusion 451 extending vertically downward on the bottom surface of the main body 450 , and a fastening member 452 for fastening to the coupling portion 436 is inserted into the protrusion 451 . The fastening member 452 is a screw (mounting screw), and can be supported in a rotatable state with respect to the boss portion 451 and in a structure that does not detach from the boss portion 451 . The coupling portion 436 is provided with a fastening hole (screw hole) 454 fastened by a fastening member 452 . The storage bowl 420 is fixed to the coupling portion 436 by fastening the fastening member 452 into the fastening hole 454 .
如上述所示,收容碗420通过采用利用紧固部件452以可拆卸的状态固定于连结部436上的构造,从而可以从电子部件供给装置402、404、406以及碗式供给器单元400上,容易地对收容碗420进行拆卸。由此,可以容易地更换收容碗420。As described above, the storage bowl 420 is detachably fixed to the connecting portion 436 by the fastening member 452, so that the electronic component supply devices 402, 404, 406 and the bowl feeder unit 400 can be connected to each other. The storage bowl 420 is easily disassembled. Thus, the storage bowl 420 can be easily replaced.
并且,导轨422的一侧端部与收容碗420连结,另一侧端部与支撑机构424连结。导轨422形成有对电子部件进行引导的引导槽,使从收容碗420搬出的电子部件沿引导槽移动,并引导至与支撑机构424连结的部分。另外,如后所述,导轨422与收容碗420连结的部分固定在驱动装置408的振动部上,与收容碗420一起振动。另外,导轨422与支撑机构424连结的一侧端部,以可沿导轨422的延伸方向滑动(可沿一个方向滑动)的状态被支撑。In addition, one end of the guide rail 422 is connected to the storage bowl 420 , and the other end is connected to the support mechanism 424 . The guide rail 422 is formed with a guide groove for guiding electronic components, so that the electronic component carried out from the storage bowl 420 moves along the guide groove, and is guided to a part connected to the supporting mechanism 424 . In addition, as will be described later, the part where the guide rail 422 is connected to the storage bowl 420 is fixed to the vibrating part of the driving device 408 and vibrates together with the storage bowl 420 . In addition, one end portion of the guide rail 422 connected to the support mechanism 424 is supported in a state of being slidable (slidable in one direction) in the extending direction of the guide rail 422 .
图50、图51所示的2个碗式供给器单元400,均具有朝向铅垂方向配置的多个收容碗420a、420b、420c。将与多个导轨422a、422b、422c的各自的保持位置(吸附位置)最近的一个作为第1列的碗式供给器单元400,将与其相比远离保持位置的一个作为第2列的碗式供给器单元400。此时,第2列的碗式供给器单元400所具有的多个导轨422a、422b、422c,在第1列的碗式供给器单元400所具有的多个导轨422a、422b、422c的侧方,沿铅垂方向并列地配置。并且,如图53所示,它们的前端沿与多个导轨422a、422b、422c的延伸方向正交的方向展开,并且多个导轨422a、422b、422c的各自的保持位置、即支撑机构424a、424b、424c并列配置在同一平面上。The two bowl-type feeder units 400 shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 each have a plurality of storage bowls 420a, 420b, and 420c arranged in the vertical direction. The one closest to the respective holding positions (attracting positions) of the plurality of guide rails 422a, 422b, 422c is used as the bowl feeder unit 400 in the first row, and the one farther from the holding position is used as the bowl feeder unit 400 in the second row. feeder unit 400 . At this time, the plurality of guide rails 422a, 422b, 422c included in the bowl feeder unit 400 of the second row are located on the sides of the plurality of guide rails 422a, 422b, 422c included in the bowl feeder unit 400 of the first row. , arranged side by side along the vertical direction. And, as shown in FIG. 53 , their front ends are developed along a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the plurality of guide rails 422a, 422b, 422c, and the respective holding positions of the plurality of guide rails 422a, 422b, 422c, that is, the support mechanism 424a, 424b and 424c are arranged side by side on the same plane.
下面,使用图57A至图58B,对支撑机构424进行说明。图57A是表示图53所示的部件供给单元的电子部件供给装置的支撑机构的概略结构的斜视图。图57B是表示图57A所示的支撑机构的概略结构的正视图。图58A是表示图57A所示的支撑机构的其他状态的斜视图。图58B是表示图58A所示的支撑机构的概略结构的正视图。图57A及图57B是支撑机构424的位置调整用托架470闭合的状态,图58A及图58B是支撑机构424的位置调整用托架470打开的状态。另外,在图57B及图58B中,为了示出各部件的相对位置,在托架470的上侧虚拟示出引导槽464。Next, the supporting mechanism 424 will be described using FIGS. 57A to 58B . 57A is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a support mechanism of the electronic component supply device of the component supply unit shown in FIG. 53 . Fig. 57B is a front view showing a schematic structure of the support mechanism shown in Fig. 57A. Fig. 58A is a perspective view showing another state of the support mechanism shown in Fig. 57A. Fig. 58B is a front view showing a schematic structure of the support mechanism shown in Fig. 58A. 57A and 57B show the state where the position adjustment bracket 470 of the support mechanism 424 is closed, and FIGS. 58A and 58B show the state where the position adjustment bracket 470 of the support mechanism 424 is opened. In addition, in FIG. 57B and FIG. 58B , in order to show the relative positions of the components, the guide groove 464 is virtually shown on the upper side of the bracket 470 .
支撑机构424具有基座460、导轨支撑部462、引导槽464、以及吸附位置调整单元468。基座460是固定在碗式供给器单元400的固定部上的部件。导轨支撑部462是以可旋转的状态支撑在基座460上的轮部,从铅垂方向下侧对导轨422进行支撑。导轨支撑部462与在平行于导轨422的延伸方向的方向上的移动对应地进行旋转。由此,导轨422以可相对于支撑机构424在与延伸方向平行的方向移动的状态被支撑。引导槽464形成在基座460的导轨422的延伸方向的端部。引导槽464与导轨422的槽连结,接受由导轨422引导的电子部件。即,引导槽464接受通过导轨422的电子部件。The support mechanism 424 has a base 460 , a rail support portion 462 , a guide groove 464 , and an adsorption position adjustment unit 468 . The base 460 is a component fixed to a fixing portion of the bowl feeder unit 400 . The rail support portion 462 is a wheel portion rotatably supported on the base 460 , and supports the rail 422 from below in the vertical direction. The rail support portion 462 rotates corresponding to movement in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the rail 422 . Accordingly, the guide rail 422 is supported in a movable state in a direction parallel to the extending direction relative to the support mechanism 424 . The guide groove 464 is formed at an end portion of the base 460 in the extending direction of the guide rail 422 . The guide groove 464 is connected to the groove of the guide rail 422 and receives electronic components guided by the guide rail 422 . That is, the guide groove 464 accepts electronic components passing through the guide rail 422 .
吸附位置调整单元468是对支撑机构424中的电子部件的吸附位置进行调整的机构,具有位置调整用托架470、转动轴472、固定部474以及螺钉476。位置调整用托架470是配置在将引导槽464闭塞的位置上的部件,在导轨422侧的端部形成凸起480。位置调整用托架470通过利用凸起480将引导槽464闭塞,从而对通过引导槽464的电子部件进行支撑,以使其不会向与凸起480相比的电子部件移动方向的下游侧移动。由此,位置调整用托架470可以将电子部件保持在引导槽464的规定位置上。转动轴472是沿引导槽464的延伸方向伸出的轴,以可转动的状态固定在固定部474上。转动轴472对位置调整用托架470进行支撑,使位置调整用托架470成为可以沿引导槽464的延伸方向移动的状态、且可以以沿引导槽464的延伸方向伸出的轴为中心转动的状态。固定部474固定在基座460上。The adsorption position adjustment unit 468 is a mechanism for adjusting the adsorption position of the electronic component in the support mechanism 424 , and includes a position adjustment bracket 470 , a rotation shaft 472 , a fixing portion 474 , and a screw 476 . The position adjustment bracket 470 is a member disposed at a position closing the guide groove 464 , and a protrusion 480 is formed at an end portion on the side of the guide rail 422 . The position adjustment bracket 470 closes the guide groove 464 with the projection 480 , thereby supporting the electronic component passing through the guide groove 464 so that it does not move downstream of the projection 480 in the moving direction of the electronic component. . Accordingly, the position adjustment bracket 470 can hold the electronic component at a predetermined position in the guide groove 464 . The rotation shaft 472 is a shaft protruding in the direction in which the guide groove 464 extends, and is rotatably fixed to the fixing portion 474 . The rotation shaft 472 supports the bracket 470 for position adjustment so that the bracket 470 for position adjustment can move along the direction in which the guide groove 464 extends, and can rotate about the shaft protruding in the direction in which the guide groove 464 extends. status. The fixing part 474 is fixed on the base 460 .
螺钉476是将位置调整用托架470向固定部474上固定的部件,螺钉476向在位置调整用托架470上形成的长孔482中插入。长孔482是将引导槽464的延伸方向作为长度方向的孔。在吸附位置调整单元468中,通过利用螺钉476将位置调整用托架470固定在固定部474上,从而对位置调整用托架470进行固定,使位置调整用托架470成为可以相对于固定部474沿引导槽464的延伸方向移动的状态、且可以以沿引导槽464的延伸方向伸出的轴为中心转动的状态。The screw 476 is a member for fixing the position adjustment bracket 470 to the fixing portion 474 , and the screw 476 is inserted into a long hole 482 formed in the position adjustment bracket 470 . The elongated hole 482 is a hole whose longitudinal direction is the direction in which the guide groove 464 extends. In the adsorption position adjustment unit 468, the bracket 470 for position adjustment is fixed on the fixed part 474 by using the screw 476, thereby the bracket 470 for position adjustment is fixed, so that the bracket 470 for position adjustment can be fixed relative to the fixed part. 474 is in a state of moving along the direction in which the guide groove 464 extends, and is in a state of being able to rotate around an axis protruding in the direction in which the guide groove 464 extends.
吸附位置调整单元468具有上述结构,如图57A及图57B所示,通过利用螺钉476将位置调整用托架470固定在固定部474上,从而可以在支撑机构424的规定位置对电子部件进行支撑。另外,吸附位置调整单元468如图58A及图58B所示,通过将螺钉476从位置调整用托架470上卸下,从而可以打开引导槽464的电子部件移动方向下游侧的端部490。由此,可以将供给至导轨422以及引导槽464的电子部件,从引导槽464的前端(电子部件移动方向下游侧的端部)排出。如上述所示,通过形成可以将电子部件从引导槽464的前端排出的机构,在更换收容碗420而变更所供给的电子部件的情况下,可以简单地排出残留在导轨422及引导槽464中的电子部件。The adsorption position adjustment unit 468 has the above-mentioned structure, and as shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B , by fixing the position adjustment bracket 470 to the fixing part 474 with the screw 476, the electronic component can be supported at a predetermined position of the support mechanism 424. . 58A and 58B, by removing the screw 476 from the position adjustment bracket 470, the suction position adjustment unit 468 can open the downstream end 490 of the guide groove 464 in the moving direction of the electronic component. Thereby, the electronic components supplied to the guide rail 422 and the guide groove 464 can be discharged from the front end of the guide groove 464 (end portion on the downstream side in the moving direction of the electronic component). As described above, by forming a mechanism capable of ejecting electronic components from the front end of the guide groove 464, when the electronic components to be supplied are changed by replacing the storage bowl 420, the electronic components remaining in the guide rail 422 and the guide groove 464 can be easily discharged. electronic components.
电子部件供给装置402、404、406通过使位置调整用托架470成为下述构造,即,成为可以相对于固定部474而沿引导槽464的延伸方向移动的状态,且利用螺钉476固定,从而可以容易地对引导槽464的延伸方向上的位置调整用托架470的位置进行调整。由此,可以与电子部件的种类相对应,对支撑电子部件的位置进行变更。即,可以与电子部件的吸附位置相对应而调整凸起480的位置。由此,即使在所供给的电子部件为不同种类的情况下,也可以在适当的吸附位置对电子部件进行支撑。The electronic component supply apparatuses 402, 404, 406 make the bracket 470 for position adjustment into the following structure, that is, become the state that can move along the extending direction of the guide groove 464 with respect to the fixed part 474, and fix it with the screw 476, thereby The position of the position adjustment bracket 470 in the extending direction of the guide groove 464 can be easily adjusted. Thereby, the position which supports an electronic component can be changed according to the kind of electronic component. That is, the position of the protrusion 480 can be adjusted corresponding to the suction position of the electronic component. Thereby, even when the supplied electronic components are of different types, the electronic components can be supported at appropriate suction positions.
另外,电子部件供给装置402、404、406通过使收容碗420成为上述结构,并使支撑机构424成为上述结构,从而易于更换收容碗420,且可以容易地排出在更换时残留的电子部件。由此,可以容易地变更由电子部件供给装置402、404、406供给的电子部件的种类。In addition, the electronic component supply apparatuses 402, 404, 406 make the storage bowl 420 the above-mentioned structure and the support mechanism 424 the above-mentioned structure, so that the storage bowl 420 can be easily replaced, and electronic components remaining during replacement can be easily discharged. Thereby, the kind of the electronic component supplied by the electronic component supply apparatus 402, 404, 406 can be changed easily.
下面,使用图52至图54以及图59至图64,对驱动装置408进行说明。图59是表示图53所示的部件供给单元的电子部件供给装置的驱动装置的概略结构的俯视图。图60是表示图59所示的驱动装置的概略结构的斜视图。图61是将图59所示的驱动装置的概略结构放大而表示的放大俯视图。图62是表示图59所示的驱动装置的概略结构的侧视图。图63是表示图59所示的驱动装置的概略结构的侧视剖面图。图64是用于说明图59所示的驱动装置的动作的说明图。Next, the driving device 408 will be described using FIGS. 52 to 54 and FIGS. 59 to 64 . FIG. 59 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of a drive device of the electronic component supply device of the component supply unit shown in FIG. 53 . Fig. 60 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the driving device shown in Fig. 59 . Fig. 61 is an enlarged plan view showing an enlarged schematic configuration of the driving device shown in Fig. 59 . Fig. 62 is a side view showing a schematic configuration of the driving device shown in Fig. 59 . Fig. 63 is a side sectional view showing a schematic configuration of the driving device shown in Fig. 59 . FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the driving device shown in FIG. 59 .
驱动装置408如图59至图62所示,具有电动机430、轴432、直线导轨433、安装挡块部434、导轨支撑部502、基端导轨(臂部)504、固定部506以及转动部508。As shown in FIGS. 59 to 62, the driving device 408 has a motor 430, a shaft 432, a linear guide 433, an installation stopper 434, a guide support 502, a proximal guide (arm) 504, a fixed part 506, and a rotating part 508. .
电动机430如图59至图63所示,是驱动装置408的驱动源,具有电动机主体550、偏心轴552、轴承554以及直线导轨556。电动机430通过由电动机主体550使轴550a旋转,从而使偏心轴552旋转。电动机430经由偏心轴552和轴承554传递旋转力,使直线导轨556旋转。As shown in FIGS. 59 to 63 , the motor 430 is a drive source of the drive device 408 and has a motor body 550 , an eccentric shaft 552 , a bearing 554 , and a linear guide 556 . The motor 430 rotates the eccentric shaft 552 by rotating the shaft 550 a with the motor main body 550 . The motor 430 transmits rotational force via the eccentric shaft 552 and the bearing 554 to rotate the linear guide 556 .
轴432如图59至图63所示,利用固定在固定部上的轴承562、564,以可旋转的状态被支撑。另外,轴承562、564利用与轴432连结的垫圈566,以不向铅垂方向移动的状态被支撑。As shown in FIGS. 59 to 63 , the shaft 432 is rotatably supported by bearings 562 and 564 fixed to the fixed portion. In addition, the bearings 562 and 564 are supported by a washer 566 connected to the shaft 432 so as not to move in the vertical direction.
直线导轨433的一侧端部附近以可旋转的状态支撑在直线导轨556的外末端上,另一侧端部附近固定在安装挡块部434上。另外,直线导轨433以可绕轴432旋转的状态被支撑。在这里,在直线导轨433和直线导轨556中,直线导轨433成为导轨单元,直线导轨556成为滑动单元。由此,直线导轨433以连结位置可以移动的状态与直线导轨556连结。即,直线导轨433与直线导轨556连结的位置变化。利用这种结构,通过使直线导轨556旋转,从而直线导轨433以轴432为中心进行转动。The vicinity of one end of the linear guide 433 is rotatably supported by the outer end of the linear guide 556 , and the vicinity of the other end is fixed to the mounting stopper 434 . In addition, the linear guide 433 is supported in a rotatable state around the shaft 432 . Here, among the linear guide 433 and the linear guide 556, the linear guide 433 serves as a rail unit, and the linear guide 556 serves as a slide unit. Thus, the linear guide 433 is connected to the linear guide 556 in a state where the connection position can move. That is, the position at which the linear guide 433 is connected to the linear guide 556 changes. With such a configuration, by rotating the linear guide 556 , the linear guide 433 turns around the shaft 432 .
安装挡块部434以可绕轴432转动的状态被支撑,与直线导轨433连结。安装挡块部434和直线导轨433利用连结部件570连结。安装挡块部434是沿与直线导轨433的延伸方向正交的水平方向伸出的细长的板状部件,端部与导轨支撑部502连结。另外,安装挡块部434与直线导轨433连结的板状部件的上表面与连结部436连结。另外,安装挡块部434在与各连结部436连结的位置,配置与直线导轨433连结的细长的板状部件相同的部件,上表面与连结部436连结。安装挡块部434还如图52至图53所示,设置沿铅垂方向延伸的棒部,该棒部与细长的板状部件的端部连结。由此,安装挡块部434、和与连结部436连结的细长的板状部件以轴432为旋转轴一体地转动。The attachment stopper portion 434 is supported in a state to be rotatable about the shaft 432 , and is connected to the linear guide 433 . The attachment stopper portion 434 and the linear guide rail 433 are connected by a connection member 570 . The mounting stopper portion 434 is an elongated plate-shaped member protruding in a horizontal direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the linear guide rail 433 , and its end is connected to the rail support portion 502 . In addition, the upper surface of the plate-shaped member where the attachment stopper portion 434 is connected to the linear guide rail 433 is connected to the connection portion 436 . In addition, the attachment stopper portion 434 has the same elongated plate member as the linear guide rail 433 connected to each connecting portion 436 , and its upper surface is connected to the connecting portion 436 . Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53 , the attachment stopper portion 434 is provided with a rod portion extending in the vertical direction, and the rod portion is connected to an end portion of an elongated plate-shaped member. As a result, the attachment stopper portion 434 and the elongated plate-like member connected to the connection portion 436 integrally rotate around the shaft 432 as a rotation axis.
导轨支撑部502与安装挡块部434的端部连结。基端导轨(臂部)504的一侧端部与导轨支撑部502连结,另一侧端部与导轨422连结。基端导轨504利用导轨支撑部502,将安装挡块部434的转动运动变换为直线运动并进行传递。另外,基端导轨504与收容碗420的电子部件的供给部连结,将从收容碗420供给来的电子部件向导轨422引导。固定部506固定在驱动装置408的不移动的部分即基座等上。转动部508以可转动的状态支撑在固定部506上。转动部508具有以可转动的状态支撑在固定部506上的固定端520、以及作为基端导轨504和导轨422的连结部的可动端522。对于转动部508,可动端522与基端导轨504和导轨422之间的连结部连结,对基端导轨504和导轨422之间的连结部的移动区域进行限制。The rail support portion 502 is connected to an end portion of the mounting stopper portion 434 . One end of the proximal rail (arm portion) 504 is connected to the rail support portion 502 , and the other end is connected to the rail 422 . The proximal end rail 504 converts the rotational motion of the mounting stopper portion 434 into a linear motion by using the rail support portion 502 and transmits it. In addition, the base end guide rail 504 is connected to the electronic component supply part of the storage bowl 420 , and guides the electronic component supplied from the storage bowl 420 to the guide rail 422 . The fixed part 506 is fixed to a base or the like which is a non-moving part of the drive device 408 . The rotating part 508 is supported on the fixed part 506 in a rotatable state. The rotating part 508 has a fixed end 520 rotatably supported by the fixed part 506 , and a movable end 522 serving as a connecting part between the base end rail 504 and the guide rail 422 . In the rotating portion 508 , the movable end 522 is connected to the connection portion between the proximal rail 504 and the rail 422 , and the movement range of the connection portion between the proximal rail 504 and the rail 422 is restricted.
驱动装置408具有上述结构,如图64所示,电动机430是驱动源,向直线导轨433传递驱动力而旋转。另外,安装挡块部434以可绕轴432转动的状态被固定,通过使直线导轨433旋转,从而以轴432的旋转轴为中心转动。安装挡块部434的转动向导轨支撑部502传递。导轨支撑部502将安装挡块部434的转动方向的驱动力变换为直线方向的驱动力,使基端导轨(臂部)504沿与导轨的延伸方向平行的方向往复运动。此时,设置在基端导轨504和导轨422之间的连结部上的转动部508,以固定端520为中心,使基端导轨504和导轨422之间的连结部即可动端522转动。驱动装置408如上述所示形成,通过使安装挡块部434和基端导轨504振动,从而使经由连结部436安装在安装挡块部434上的收容碗420和与基端导轨504连结的导轨422振动。碗式供给器单元400通过利用驱动装置408使收容碗420振动,从而使放入收容碗420中的电子部件在收容碗420内移动,向导轨422供给。另外,碗式供给器单元400通过利用驱动装置408使导轨422振动,从而将在导轨422内引导的电子部件向支撑机构424供给。The driving device 408 has the above-mentioned structure, and as shown in FIG. 64 , the motor 430 is a driving source, and rotates while transmitting a driving force to the linear guide 433 . In addition, the attachment stopper part 434 is fixed in a rotatable state around the shaft 432 , and rotates around the rotation axis of the shaft 432 by rotating the linear guide 433 . The rotation of the mounting stopper portion 434 is transmitted to the rail support portion 502 . The rail support portion 502 converts the rotational driving force of the mounting stopper portion 434 into a linear driving force to reciprocate the base end rail (arm portion) 504 in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the rail. At this time, the rotating part 508 provided on the connection part between the base end guide rail 504 and the guide rail 422 rotates the connection part between the base end guide rail 504 and the guide rail 422 , that is, the movable end 522 around the fixed end 520 . The driving device 408 is formed as described above, and vibrates the installation stopper part 434 and the base end guide rail 504 so that the storage bowl 420 mounted on the installation stopper part 434 and the guide rail connected to the base end guide rail 504 via the connection part 436 are vibrated. 422 vibrations. The bowl feeder unit 400 vibrates the storage bowl 420 by the driving device 408 to move the electronic components put in the storage bowl 420 in the storage bowl 420 and supply them to the guide rail 422 . In addition, the bowl feeder unit 400 supplies the electronic components guided in the guide rail 422 to the support mechanism 424 by vibrating the guide rail 422 by the driving device 408 .
碗式供给器单元400通过如上述所示将部件供给装置402、404、406的收容碗沿铅垂方向层叠,从而可以有效地利用水平方向的区域,可以节省空间而配置多个部件供给装置。由此,碗式供给器单元400可以向吸附位置供给多个电子部件。另外,碗式供给器单元400通过如上述所示将部件供给装置402、404、406的收容碗沿铅垂方向层叠,从而可以将支撑机构424与水平方向接近地配置。由此,可以接近电子部件的吸附位置,可以减小部件吸附时的搭载头的移动距离。另外,碗式供给器单元400通过将1个驱动装置408作为3个部件供给装置402、404、406的驱动部使用,从而可以减少驱动源,可以使装置结构简化。另外,通过利用固定部410对部件供给装置402、404、406的旋转轴进行支撑,从而可以使各部分稳定地振动。另外,在上述实施方式的碗式供给器单元400中,将部件供给装置设为3个,但并不限定于此,部件供给装置的数量并不限定。The bowl feeder unit 400 stacks the storage bowls of the component supply devices 402, 404, and 406 in the vertical direction as described above, so that the horizontal area can be effectively used, and a plurality of component supply devices can be arranged in a space-saving manner. Thus, the bowl feeder unit 400 can supply a plurality of electronic components to the suction position. In addition, in the bowl feeder unit 400 , by stacking the storage bowls of the component supply devices 402 , 404 , and 406 in the vertical direction as described above, the support mechanism 424 can be arranged close to the horizontal direction. Thereby, the suction position of the electronic component can be approached, and the moving distance of the mounting head at the time of component suction can be reduced. In addition, the bowl feeder unit 400 can reduce the number of drive sources by using one drive device 408 as a drive unit for the three component supply devices 402, 404, and 406, and can simplify the device structure. In addition, by supporting the rotation shafts of the component supply devices 402 , 404 , and 406 by the fixing unit 410 , each part can be stably vibrated. In addition, in the bowl feeder unit 400 of the above-mentioned embodiment, three component supply devices are provided, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the number of component supply devices is not limited.
另外,在本实施方式中,作为碗式供给器单元400的驱动部,使用了使收容碗420振动的驱动机构,但并不限定于此。构成碗式供给器单元400的电子部件供给装置(碗式供给器),只要可以通过使收容碗420震颤而向导轨422供给电子部件80即可。例如,作为驱动部,也可以使用使收容碗420摆动的驱动部。In addition, in this embodiment, although the drive mechanism which vibrates the storage bowl 420 is used as the drive part of the bowl feeder unit 400, it is not limited to this. The electronic component supply device (bowl feeder) constituting the bowl feeder unit 400 may supply the electronic component 80 to the rail 422 by vibrating the storage bowl 420 . For example, a drive unit that swings the storage bowl 420 may be used as the drive unit.
图65是将电子部件供给装置的一部分放大而表示的斜视图。碗式供给器单元400的部件供给装置402、404、406,如图65所示,具有对在导轨422的收容碗420侧的端部处有无电子部件进行检测的起始端侧部件检测传感器580a、580b、580c。起始端侧部件检测传感器580a、580b、580c对在导轨422的收容碗420侧的端部处是否存在电子部件进行检测。作为起始端侧部件检测传感器580a、580b、580c,可以使用激光传感器。碗式供给器单元400通过利用起始端侧部件检测传感器580a、580b、580c对在导轨422的收容碗420侧的端部处是否存在电子部件进行检测,从而可以对电子部件是否停留在导轨422上而处于装满状态进行检测。例如,在起始端侧部件检测传感器580a、580b、580c检测出电子部件的状态在一定时间内持续检测出的情况下,碗式供给器单元400由于电子部件在规定位置处停留而成为无法向导轨422的前方前进的状态,所以可以判定为装满状态。Fig. 65 is an enlarged perspective view showing a part of the electronic component supply device. The component supply devices 402, 404, and 406 of the bowl feeder unit 400, as shown in FIG. , 580b, 580c. The starting end side component detection sensors 580 a , 580 b , 580 c detect the presence or absence of electronic components at the ends of the guide rail 422 on the housing bowl 420 side. Laser sensors can be used as the starting end side component detection sensors 580a, 580b, and 580c. The bowl feeder unit 400 can detect whether or not the electronic components are staying on the guide rail 422 by detecting whether or not the electronic components are present at the end of the guide rail 422 on the storage bowl 420 side by using the starting end side component detection sensors 580a, 580b, 580c. And in full state to detect. For example, when the state of the electronic component detection sensor 580a, 580b, 580c on the head end side detects the state of the electronic component continuously for a certain period of time, the bowl feeder unit 400 becomes unable to guide the rail due to the electronic component staying at a predetermined position. 422 ahead of the state, so it can be judged as a full state.
图66是将电子部件供给装置的一部分放大而表示的斜视图。碗式供给器单元400的部件供给装置402、404、406如图66所示,具有对在导轨422的前端(吸附位置、保持位置)有无电子部件进行检测的保持位置侧部件检测传感器582a、582b、582c。保持位置侧部件检测传感器582a、582b、582c对在所对应的导轨422的前端侧即保持位置处是否存在电子部件进行检测。保持位置侧部件检测传感器582a是具有发光部584a和受光部586a的光学式传感器。发光部584a和受光部586a这两者配置在隔着保持位置的位置上。保持位置侧部件检测传感器582a在从发光部584a输出的测定光由受光部586a受光的情况下,检测出在测定区域(在本实施方式中为保持位置)没有电子部件。保持位置侧部件检测传感器582a在从发光部584a输出的测定光没有由受光部586a受光的情况下,检测出在测定区域(在本实施方式中为保持位置)存在电子部件。相同地,保持位置侧部件检测传感器582b也是具有发光部584b和受光部586b的光学式传感器,保持位置侧部件检测传感器582c也是具有发光部584c和受光部586c的光学式传感器。保持位置侧部件检测传感器582a、582b、582c利用相同的结构对有无电子部件进行检测。碗式供给器单元400利用保持位置侧部件检测传感器582a、582b、582c对在保持位置有无电子部件进行检测,基于检测结果对碗式供给器单元400进行驱动。碗式供给器单元400例如在利用保持位置侧部件检测传感器582a、582b、582c判定为保持位置没有电子部件的情况下,使驱动装置408进行驱动,输送电子部件。Fig. 66 is an enlarged perspective view showing a part of the electronic component supply device. As shown in FIG. 66, the component supply devices 402, 404, and 406 of the bowl feeder unit 400 include a holding position side component detection sensor 582a for detecting the presence or absence of electronic components at the front end (attraction position, holding position) of the guide rail 422, 582b, 582c. The holding position side component detection sensors 582 a , 582 b , and 582 c detect whether or not an electronic component is present at the holding position, which is the front end side of the corresponding guide rail 422 . The holding position side member detection sensor 582a is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit 584a and a light receiving unit 586a. Both the light emitting unit 584a and the light receiving unit 586a are arranged at positions interposing the holding position. The holding position side component detection sensor 582a detects that there is no electronic component in the measurement area (holding position in this embodiment) when the measurement light output from the light emitting unit 584a is received by the light receiving unit 586a. The holding position side component detection sensor 582a detects the presence of an electronic component in the measurement area (holding position in this embodiment) when the measurement light output from the light emitting unit 584a is not received by the light receiving unit 586a. Similarly, the holding position side component detection sensor 582b is also an optical sensor having a light emitting unit 584b and a light receiving unit 586b, and the holding position side component detection sensor 582c is also an optical sensor having a light emitting unit 584c and a light receiving unit 586c. Holding position side component detection sensors 582a, 582b, and 582c detect the presence or absence of electronic components with the same configuration. The bowl feeder unit 400 detects the presence or absence of electronic components at the holding positions by the holding position side component detection sensors 582a, 582b, and 582c, and drives the bowl feeder unit 400 based on the detection results. The bowl feeder unit 400 drives the drive device 408 and conveys the electronic component, for example, when it is determined by the component detection sensors 582a, 582b, and 582c on the holding position side that there is no electronic component at the holding position.
另外,电子部件安装装置10也可以在利用搭载头15的吸嘴32,执行对碗式供给器单元400的保持位置的电子部件进行保持的动作的情况下,在利用保持位置侧部件检测传感器582a、582b、582c检测出在保持位置处存在电子部件的状况的情况下,执行对保持位置的电子部件进行保持的保持动作,在利用保持位置侧部件检测传感器582a、582b、582c检测出在保持位置处没有电子部件的状况的情况下待机。由此,电子部件安装装置10可以更可靠地保持电子部件,可以抑制在保持位置处没有电子部件的情况下执行保持动作的情况。由此,电子部件安装装置可以更高效地执行电子部件的保持动作。In addition, when the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 uses the suction nozzle 32 of the mounting head 15 to perform the operation of holding the electronic component at the holding position of the bowl feeder unit 400, it may use the holding position side component detection sensor 582a , 582b, 582c detect that there is an electronic component at the holding position, perform a holding operation for holding the electronic component at the holding position, and use the holding position side component detection sensors 582a, 582b, 582c to detect that the electronic component is at the holding position Standby in the absence of electronic components. Thereby, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can more reliably hold the electronic component, and can suppress the situation where the holding operation is performed without the electronic component at the holding position. Accordingly, the electronic component mounting apparatus can more efficiently perform the holding operation of the electronic component.
图67A是将电子部件供给装置的一部分放大而表示的斜视图。图67B是从其他方向表示图67A所示的电子部件供给装置的一部分的斜视图。此外,在图67A、图67B中,示出碗式供给器单元400的部件供给装置402,但部件供给装置404、406也具有相同的结构。部件供给装置402具有送风部590,其在收容碗420的电子部件位于将收容碗420和导轨422连接的基端导轨504的导轨422侧的端部时,向铅垂方向上侧(箭头591的方向)喷射空气。送风部590通过向基端导轨504的导轨422侧的端部喷射箭头591方向的空气,从而使位于该位置的电子部件返回收容碗420。Fig. 67A is an enlarged perspective view showing a part of the electronic component supply device. Fig. 67B is a perspective view showing a part of the electronic component supply device shown in Fig. 67A from another direction. In addition, in FIG. 67A, FIG. 67B, although the component supply apparatus 402 of the bowl type feeder unit 400 is shown, the component supply apparatus 404,406 also has the same structure. The component supply device 402 has an air blower 590 that blows upward in the vertical direction (arrow 591 ) when the electronic component of the storage bowl 420 is located at the end of the proximal guide rail 504 that connects the storage bowl 420 and the guide rail 422 on the side of the guide rail 422 . direction) to inject air. The air blower 590 blows air in the direction of the arrow 591 toward the end of the base end rail 504 on the side of the guide rail 422 to return the electronic component located at that position to the housing bowl 420 .
基端导轨504在与收容碗420之间的连结部上配置有引导部592。引导部592将在从收容碗420向基端导轨504输送的电子部件中不是合适朝向的电子部件向收容碗420引导。即,引导部592使得在向基端导轨504输送的电子部件中以不合适的朝向输送的电子部件,不会进入基端导轨504。具体地说,引导部592在不适当的朝向的电子部件的引线所接触的位置处配置板状部件,将引线发生接触的电子部件向收容碗420引导。The base end rail 504 is provided with a guide portion 592 at a connection portion with the storage bowl 420 . The guide part 592 guides the electronic components that are not properly oriented among the electronic components conveyed from the storage bowl 420 to the base end rail 504 toward the storage bowl 420 . That is, the guide portion 592 prevents electronic components conveyed in an inappropriate orientation among the electronic components conveyed to the proximal rail 504 from entering the proximal rail 504 . Specifically, the guide portion 592 arranges a plate-shaped member at a position where a lead wire of an electronic component in an inappropriate direction contacts, and guides the electronic component with the lead wire contacted to the storage bowl 420 .
另外,基端导轨504在送风部590喷射空气的区域的铅垂方向上侧设置有掉落部594。掉落部594配置在基端导轨504的外侧(远离收容碗420的一侧),设置有随着朝向铅垂方向上侧而逐渐接近收容碗420的倾斜部。掉落部594利用倾斜部,将通过送风部590喷射空气而被向铅垂方向上侧抬起的电子部件,向收容碗420侧引导。由此,可以抑制电子部件向收容碗420的外侧飞出。In addition, the proximal end rail 504 is provided with a drop portion 594 on the upper side in the vertical direction of the region where the air blower 590 blows air. The drop portion 594 is disposed outside the proximal end rail 504 (on the side away from the storage bowl 420 ), and has an inclined portion that gradually approaches the storage bowl 420 as it goes upward in the vertical direction. The drop portion 594 guides the electronic component lifted vertically upward by the air blown from the blower portion 590 to the storage bowl 420 side by using the inclined portion. Thereby, it is possible to suppress electronic components from flying out of the housing bowl 420 .
如图67A及图67B所示,部件供给装置402通过设置送风部590,使朝向导轨422移动的电子部件返回收容碗420,从而可以将电子部件适当地向导轨422引导。例如,部件供给装置402通过利用送风部590定期地进行送风,从而可以定期地使位于对象位置的电子部件返回收容碗420。由此,可以将相对于导轨422倾斜地输送且在对象区域没有搬入导轨422的电子部件排除。另外,部件供给装置402也可以利用送风部590,将没能由引导部592排除的朝向不合适的电子部件排除。此外,在本实施方式中,作为使导轨422起始端的基端导轨504上的电子部件返回收容碗420的机构,设置有送风部590,但并不限定于此。例如,也可以取代送风部590而使用机械机构。As shown in FIGS. 67A and 67B , the component supply device 402 can properly guide the electronic components to the guide rail 422 by providing the air blower 590 to return the electronic components moving toward the guide rail 422 to the storage bowl 420 . For example, the component supply device 402 can periodically return the electronic component located at the target position to the storage bowl 420 by regularly blowing air from the air blower 590 . Thereby, it is possible to exclude electronic components that are conveyed obliquely with respect to the guide rail 422 and are not carried into the guide rail 422 in the target area. In addition, the component supply device 402 may use the blower unit 590 to remove electronic components in an inappropriate orientation that cannot be removed by the guide unit 592 . In addition, in this embodiment, an air blower 590 is provided as a mechanism for returning the electronic components on the proximal guide rail 504 at the leading end of the guide rail 422 to the housing bowl 420 , but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a mechanical mechanism may be used instead of the air blower 590 .
下面,对电子部件安装装置的各部分的动作进行说明。此外,下述说明的电子部件的各部分的动作,均可以通过由控制装置20对各部分的动作进行控制而执行。Next, the operation of each part of the electronic component mounting apparatus will be described. In addition, the operation of each part of the electronic component described below can be executed by controlling the operation of each part by the control device 20 .
使用图68至图74,对电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状识别动作进行说明。图68是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状识别动作的说明图。图69是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状识别动作的说明图。图70是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状识别动作的说明图。图71是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状识别动作的说明图。图72是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状识别动作的说明图。图73是表示识别动作的检测结果的一个例子的示意图。图74是表示识别动作的检测结果的一个例子的示意图。The shape recognition operation of the electronic component of the electronic component mounting apparatus will be described using FIGS. 68 to 74 . FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electronic component shape recognition operation of the electronic component mounting device. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electronic component shape recognition operation of the electronic component mounting device. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electronic component shape recognition operation of the electronic component mounting device. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electronic component shape recognition operation of the electronic component mounting device. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electronic component shape recognition operation of the electronic component mounting device. FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing an example of detection results of recognition actions. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing an example of detection results of recognition actions.
电子部件安装装置10如上述所示,使用激光识别装置38对电子部件的形状进行测量。激光识别装置38如图68所示,在光源38a和受光元件38b之间配置有电子部件80的状态下,从光源38a输出激光,利用受光元件38b检测到达的激光,从而对配置在光源38a和受光元件38b之间的部件的形状进行检测。另外,激光识别装置38在对由吸嘴32吸附的电子部件80的一个方向的形状进行检测后,利用吸嘴驱动部34使吸嘴32移动或旋转,使电子部件80移动或转动,再次进行形状检测。如上述所示,激光识别装置38通过使电子部件80旋转,从而如图69所示,使得向电子部件80照射激光的方向以及受光元件38b相对于电子部件80的角度变化。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 measures the shape of an electronic component using the laser recognition device 38 as described above. As shown in FIG. 68, the laser recognition device 38 outputs laser light from the light source 38a in the state where the electronic component 80 is disposed between the light source 38a and the light receiving element 38b, and detects the arriving laser light by the light receiving element 38b, thereby detecting the incoming laser light arranged between the light source 38a and the light receiving element 38b. The shape of the member between the light receiving elements 38b is detected. In addition, after the laser recognition device 38 detects the shape in one direction of the electronic component 80 sucked by the suction nozzle 32, the suction nozzle 32 is moved or rotated by the suction nozzle drive unit 34, and the electronic component 80 is moved or rotated, and the process is performed again. shape detection. As described above, by rotating the electronic component 80 , the laser recognition device 38 changes the direction of irradiating laser light on the electronic component 80 and the angle of the light receiving element 38 b relative to the electronic component 80 as shown in FIG. 69 .
电子部件安装装置10如图70所示,作为步骤S11,与电子部件80的Z轴方向的高度相对应,在光源38a和受光元件38b之间配置有电子部件80的状态下,由激光识别装置38从光源38a向一定区域照射激光。然后,在电子部件安装装置10中,作为步骤S12,开始电子部件80的旋转(θ方向的旋转)。As shown in FIG. 70, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, as step S11, corresponds to the height of the electronic component 80 in the Z-axis direction, and in the state where the electronic component 80 is arranged between the light source 38a and the light receiving element 38b, the laser recognition device 38 irradiates a certain area with laser light from a light source 38a. Then, in the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , as step S12 , the rotation of the electronic component 80 (rotation in the θ direction) is started.
然后,电子部件安装装置10在电子部件80旋转的旋转速度达到一定速度后,作为步骤S13,开始利用激光识别装置38进行电子部件80的规定朝向的形状测量。此时,激光识别装置38在光源38a和受光元件38b之间配置有电子部件80的状态下,从光源38a向一定区域照射激光,并利用受光元件38b对激光进行受光。在这里,被电子部件80拦截的激光没有到达受光元件38b或者强度降低。由此,激光识别装置38可以根据由受光元件38b受光的激光的分布,对所测定的角度的剖面中的电子部件80的形状进行检测。在本实施方式中,激光识别装置38对由受光元件38b受光的激光的端部进行检测,对该朝向中的电子部件80的最外侧形状进行检测。在电子部件安装装置10中,作为步骤S14,在使电子部件80旋转的同时,利用步骤S13的方法反复进行电子部件80的形状检测,从而对电子部件80的旋转一周的形状进行检测。由此,可以对电子部件80的全部方向的形状进行检测。激光识别装置38如上述所示,对旋转一周的方向的形状进行检测,如图71所示,将各方向形状的检测结果叠加,从而可以准确地检测出电子部件80的三维形状(最外侧部分的形状)。Then, when the rotation speed of the electronic component 80 reaches a constant speed, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 starts measuring the shape of the electronic component 80 in a predetermined orientation by the laser recognition device 38 as step S13 . At this time, the laser recognition device 38 irradiates laser light to a certain area from the light source 38a with the electronic component 80 disposed between the light source 38a and the light receiving element 38b, and receives the laser light by the light receiving element 38b. Here, the laser light intercepted by the electronic component 80 does not reach the light-receiving element 38 b or its intensity decreases. Thereby, the laser recognition device 38 can detect the shape of the electronic component 80 in the cross section of the measured angle based on the distribution of the laser light received by the light receiving element 38b. In this embodiment, the laser recognition device 38 detects the edge part of the laser light received by the light receiving element 38b, and detects the outermost shape of the electronic component 80 in this direction. In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , as step S14 , while rotating the electronic component 80 , the shape detection of the electronic component 80 is repeated by the method of step S13 , thereby detecting the shape of the electronic component 80 in one rotation. Thereby, the shape of the electronic component 80 can be detected in all directions. As mentioned above, the laser recognition device 38 detects the shape in the direction of one rotation, and as shown in FIG. shape).
在这里,如上述所示,本实施方式的电子部件安装装置10,将作为径向引线型电子部件的电子部件80向基板8上搭载。电子部件安装装置10在对图72所示的电子部件80的形状进行检测的情况下,随着进行测量的Z轴方向的高度不同而检测出的形状不同。即,电子部件安装装置10的激光识别装置38,如图72所示在线A处执行检测的情况下、在线B处执行检测的情况下、在线C处执行检测的情况下、在线D处执行检测的情况下所检测出的形状为不同形状。Here, as described above, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 of the present embodiment mounts the electronic component 80 which is a radial lead type electronic component on the substrate 8 . When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 detects the shape of the electronic component 80 shown in FIG. 72, the detected shape differs depending on the height in the Z-axis direction for measurement. That is, the laser recognition device 38 of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, as shown in FIG. The detected shape in the case is a different shape.
例如,如果激光识别装置38在图72所示的线A处进行形状测量,则如图73所示,可以检测出电子部件80的主体82的形状。另外,如果激光识别装置38在图72所示的线B处进行形状测量,则如图74所示,可以检测出电子部件80的引线84的形状。此外,由于激光识别装置38对电子部件的测量高度的最外侧部分的形状进行检测,所以作为电子部件的形状,检测出与电子部件的最外侧部分(最外侧的引线84)相关的形状。另外,如果激光识别装置38在图72所示的线C处进行形状测量,则可以检测出主体82的下表面位置的形状,如果在图72所示的线D处进行形状测量,则可以检测出引线84的下表面位置的形状。电子部件安装装置10通过调整吸附有电子部件80的吸嘴32的Z轴方向的高度,从而可以使激光识别装置38对电子部件80的形状进行测量的位置成为各种位置。For example, if the laser recognition device 38 performs shape measurement on the line A shown in FIG. 72 , the shape of the main body 82 of the electronic component 80 can be detected as shown in FIG. 73 . In addition, if the laser recognition device 38 performs shape measurement on the line B shown in FIG. 72 , the shape of the lead wire 84 of the electronic component 80 can be detected as shown in FIG. 74 . In addition, since the laser recognition device 38 detects the shape of the outermost portion of the electronic component at the measured height, a shape related to the outermost portion (the outermost lead 84 ) of the electronic component is detected as the shape of the electronic component. In addition, if the laser recognition device 38 performs shape measurement at the line C shown in FIG. The shape of the lower surface position of the lead wire 84. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can adjust the height of the suction nozzle 32 holding the electronic component 80 in the Z-axis direction so that the position where the laser recognition device 38 measures the shape of the electronic component 80 can be various positions.
图75是用于说明电子部件安装装置的电子部件的形状的识别动作的说明图。另外,在电子部件安装装置10中,作为径向引线型电子部件的电子部件,有时使用图75所示的电子部件80a。电子部件80a在主体82a的一部分上形成切口89。电子部件80a的形成了切口89的部分成为与其他电子部件不同的形状。另外,电子部件80a可以根据形成有切口89的位置而判定朝向。75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recognition operation of the shape of the electronic component by the electronic component mounting device. In addition, in the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , an electronic component 80 a shown in FIG. 75 may be used as an electronic component of the radial lead type electronic component. The electronic component 80a forms a cutout 89 in a part of the main body 82a. The portion of the electronic component 80a in which the notch 89 is formed has a shape different from that of other electronic components. In addition, the electronic component 80a can determine the orientation from the position where the notch 89 is formed.
在这里,本实施方式的电子部件安装装置10的控制部60,在由操作人员预先设定了搭载对象的电子部件、即吸嘴所吸附的电子部件的位置(电子部件的Z轴方向上的位置)的情况下,利用激光识别装置38对由操作人员设定的位置的电子部件形状进行检测。如上述所示,电子部件安装装置10通过基于操作人员所设定的位置,对电子部件的形状进行测量,从而可以将电子部件的特征形状部分作为测量位置,可以更高精度地执行电子部件的种类识别以及电子部件的朝向的检测。Here, the control unit 60 of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment sets in advance the position of the electronic component to be mounted, that is, the electronic component to be picked up by the suction nozzle (the position of the electronic component in the Z-axis direction of the electronic component) by the operator. position), the shape of the electronic component at the position set by the operator is detected by the laser recognition device 38 . As described above, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 measures the shape of the electronic component based on the position set by the operator, so that the characteristic shape part of the electronic component can be used as the measurement position, and the electronic component can be mounted more accurately. Type identification and detection of the orientation of electronic components.
此外,针对电子部件安装装置10使用激光识别装置38进行电子部件的形状识别的情况进行了说明,但并不限定于此。在电子部件安装装置10中,作为状态检测部,也可以使用对支撑在框体11上的电子部件形状进行三维测量的照相机(本实施方式的VCS单元17)。此外,也可以使用除了VCS以外的公知的对电子部件形状进行三维测量的照相机。通过利用对电子部件形状进行三维测量的照相机,对测定对象的电子部件的引线前端部的间隔、引线的弯曲形状、部件主体形状等进行测量,从而可以执行相同的处理。In addition, although the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 demonstrated the case where the shape recognition of an electronic component was performed using the laser recognition device 38, it is not limited to this. In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , a camera (the VCS unit 17 of the present embodiment) that three-dimensionally measures the shape of the electronic component supported on the housing 11 may be used as the state detection unit. In addition, a known camera for three-dimensionally measuring the shape of an electronic component other than the VCS may be used. The same process can be performed by measuring the distance between the lead ends of the electronic component to be measured, the bent shape of the lead, the shape of the component body, etc., using a camera that three-dimensionally measures the shape of the electronic component.
图76是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。使用图76,对电子部件安装装置10的整体处理动作的概略进行说明。此外,图76所示的处理是通过由控制装置20控制各部分的动作而执行的。在电子部件安装装置10中,作为步骤S52,读入生产程序。生产程序是由专用的生产程序生成装置生成的,或基于所输入的各种数据而由控制装置20生成的。FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. The outline of the overall processing operation of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 will be described using FIG. 76 . In addition, the processing shown in FIG. 76 is executed by controlling the operation of each part by the control device 20 . In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, a production program is read as step S52. The production program is generated by a dedicated production program generation device, or by the control device 20 based on various input data.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S52中读入生产程序后,作为步骤S54,对装置的状态进行检测。具体地说,对部件供给单元14f、14r的结构、已填充的电子部件的种类、已准备的吸嘴的种类等进行检测。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S54中对装置的状态进行检测并准备结束后,作为步骤S56,将基板搬入。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S56中搬入基板,向安装电子部件的位置配置基板后,作为步骤S58,将电子部件向基板安装。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S58中电子部件的安装结束后,作为步骤S60将基板搬出。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S60中将基板搬出后,作为步骤S62,对生产是否结束进行判定。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S62中判定为生产没有结束(否)的情况下,进入步骤S56,执行步骤S56至步骤S60的处理。即,执行基于生产程序向基板安装电子部件的处理。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S62中判定为生产结束(是)的情况下,结束本处理。After reading the production program in step S52, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 detects the state of the apparatus as step S54. Specifically, the configurations of the component supply units 14f and 14r, the types of filled electronic components, the types of prepared suction nozzles, and the like are detected. After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 detects the state of the apparatus in step S54 and completes the preparation, as step S56 , the board is carried in. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 carries in a board|substrate in step S56, arrange|positions a board|substrate to the position to mount an electronic component, and as a step S58, mounts an electronic part on a board|substrate. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 carries out the board|substrate as step S60 after completion|finish of mounting of an electronic component in step S58. After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 unloads the substrate in step S60, it is determined in step S62 whether or not the production has been completed. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S62 that production has not been completed (No), it proceeds to step S56 and executes the processing from step S56 to step S60 . That is, a process of mounting electronic components on a substrate based on a production program is performed. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S62 that the production has been completed (YES), it ends this process.
电子部件安装装置10通过如上所述,在读取生产程序并进行各种设定后,向基板安装电子部件,从而可以制造出安装有电子部件的基板。另外,在电子部件安装装置10中,作为电子部件,将具有主体和与该主体连接的引线的引线型电子部件向基板安装,具体地说,通过将引线向基板上形成的孔(插入孔)中插入,从而可以将该电子部件向基板安装。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 reads the production program and performs various settings as described above, and then mounts the electronic component on the substrate, thereby manufacturing the substrate on which the electronic component is mounted. In addition, in the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, as an electronic component, a lead type electronic component having a main body and a lead connected to the main body is mounted on a substrate, specifically, by inserting the lead into a hole (insertion hole) formed on the substrate. Inserted in, so that the electronic components can be mounted on the substrate.
图77是表示操作画面的一个例子的说明图。图78是表示操作画面的一部分的说明图。图79A是表示部件供给角度的一个例子的说明图。图79B是表示部件供给角度的一个例子的说明图。图80是表示操作画面的一个例子的说明图。图81是表示操作画面的一个例子的说明图。图82是表示操作画面的一部分的说明图。图83A至图83D是分别表示电子部件的测定位置的一个例子的说明图。Fig. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an operation screen. Fig. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the operation screen. Fig. 79A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a component supply angle. Fig. 79B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a component supply angle. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an operation screen. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an operation screen. Fig. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the operation screen. 83A to 83D are explanatory views each showing an example of a measurement position of an electronic component.
下面,使用图77至图83D,对将向电子部件安装装置10安装的电子部件的各种信息进行登录的处理的一个例子进行说明。电子部件安装装置10基于登录后的电子部件的信息,对基于生产程序的安装处理的各种值进行确定,基于确定后的值,执行电子部件的安装。此外,电子部件的各种信息可以作为生产程序的一部分而登录,也可以作为多个生产程序共用的电子部件单体的信息而登录。Next, an example of the process of registering various information of the electronic component mounted on the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 is demonstrated using FIG. 77 to FIG. 83D. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 specifies various values of the mounting process by the production program based on the registered electronic component information, and executes mounting of the electronic component based on the specified values. In addition, various information on electronic components may be registered as a part of the production process, or may be registered as information on a single electronic component shared by a plurality of production processes.
电子部件安装装置10在显示部42(触摸面板42a或者图像监视器42b)上显示图77所示的操作画面602。操作画面602对各种输入项目进行显示。操作人员通过在由操作画面602显示的状态下进行各种操作,从而可以输入电子部件的信息。此外,在图77中,示出了将电子部件的信息作为部件数据而输入的画面,但电子部件安装装置10也可以输入基板数据、搭载数据、吸附数据、图像数据。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 displays an operation screen 602 shown in FIG. 77 on the display unit 42 (the touch panel 42 a or the image monitor 42 b ). The operation screen 602 displays various input items. An operator can input information on electronic components by performing various operations in a state displayed on the operation screen 602 . 77 shows a screen for inputting information on electronic components as component data, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 may also input board data, mounting data, suction data, and image data.
图77所示的操作画面602显示用于输入电子部件的部件类别的输入项目604和用于输入封装形状的输入项目606。另外,操作画面602包含:输入包含电子部件的横、长、高度、引线长度在内的外形尺寸的项目;在定心方式中选择使用激光(激光识别装置38)还是使用图像(VCS单元17)的项目;输入封装尺寸(电子部件主体的大小)的项目等。并且,在操作画面602中还显示:用于显示封装形状、定心、附加信息、扩展、检查等的详细项目的标签。另外,在本实施方式的操作画面602中,作为封装形状的详细项目,包含表示向保持位置供给的电子部件的角度的部件提供角度的输入项目608、保持带种类的输入项目、以及表示电子部件的配置间距的间距信息的输入项目。An operation screen 602 shown in FIG. 77 displays an input item 604 for inputting a component category of an electronic component and an input item 606 for inputting a package shape. In addition, the operation screen 602 includes items for inputting external dimensions including the width, length, height, and lead length of the electronic component; and selecting whether to use laser (laser recognition device 38 ) or image (VCS unit 17 ) in the centering method. items; items for entering the package size (size of the body of the electronic part), etc. In addition, tabs for displaying detailed items such as package shape, centering, additional information, expansion, and inspection are also displayed on the operation screen 602 . In addition, in the operation screen 602 of this embodiment, as detailed items of the package shape, an input item 608 indicating the angle of electronic components supplied to the holding position, an input item 608 indicating the type of holding tape, and an input item indicating the angle of the electronic component are included. The input item for the spacing information of the configured spacing.
在这里,输入项目604是用于输入所登录的电子部件的种类的项目,如果选择项目,则如图78所示,在下拉菜单中显示选择项的列表610。在列表610中,除了各种电子部件的种类之外,还显示插入部件和其他部件的选择项。操作人员通过使光标612对准期望的选择项,进行确定操作,从而可以向部件类别的输入项目604中输入信息。Here, the input item 604 is an item for inputting the type of electronic component to be registered, and when an item is selected, a list 610 of selected items is displayed on the pull-down menu as shown in FIG. 78 . In the list 610 , in addition to the types of various electronic components, options for inserting components and other components are displayed. The operator can input information into the input item 604 of the component category by aligning the cursor 612 with a desired selection item and performing a confirmation operation.
在输入项目608中,作为表示向所输入的保持位置供给的电子部件的角度的部件提供角度,可以选择0°、90°、180°、270°或其他。例如,如图79A所示,在对象电子部件为电子部件614的情况下,电子部件614每次旋转90°后的状态分别为0°、90°、180°、270°的姿态。操作人员基于电子部件614向电子部件供给装置的保持位置供给时的姿态成为哪种姿态,而向输入项目608输入角度。此外,电子部件614的角度的基准位置可以由操作人员设定。In the input item 608, 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, or others can be selected as the component providing angle indicating the angle of the electronic component supplied to the input holding position. For example, as shown in FIG. 79A , when the target electronic component is the electronic component 614 , the states of the electronic component 614 after every 90° rotation are 0°, 90°, 180°, and 270° attitudes. The operator inputs an angle to the input item 608 based on the posture of the electronic component 614 when it is supplied to the holding position of the electronic component supply apparatus. In addition, the reference position of the angle of the electronic component 614 may be set by an operator.
另外,在电子部件安装装置10中,如图79B所示,有时电子部件616以相对于保持带618倾斜规定角度的状态被保持。在这里,电子部件616为薄膜电容器。操作人员在如电子部件616所示姿态不符合0°、90°、180°、270°中的任一种的情况下,在“其他”中输入电子部件616的角度。在这里,在对电子部件616进行保持的情况下,在搭载头15中,作为吸嘴32优选使用对电子部件616进行夹持而实施保持的抓持吸嘴。电子部件安装装置10在使用抓持吸嘴对电子部件616进行保持的情况下,通过基于向输入项目608的“其他”中输入的部件提供角度,对吸嘴的角度进行调整,从而可以使抓持吸嘴的接触面成为与电子部件616的倾斜对应的角度,可以减少保持错误的发生。In addition, in the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , as shown in FIG. 79B , the electronic component 616 may be held in a state inclined at a predetermined angle with respect to the holding tape 618 . Here, the electronic component 616 is a film capacitor. When the posture shown by the electronic component 616 does not correspond to any of 0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°, the operator inputs the angle of the electronic component 616 in "Other". Here, when holding the electronic component 616 , in the mounting head 15 , it is preferable to use a gripping nozzle for holding the electronic component 616 as the suction nozzle 32 . When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 holds the electronic component 616 using the gripping nozzle, the angle of the nozzle can be adjusted based on the angle provided to the component input in "Other" of the input item 608, so that the gripping nozzle can be adjusted. The contact surface of the holding nozzle is formed at an angle corresponding to the inclination of the electronic component 616, so that the occurrence of holding errors can be reduced.
在电子部件安装装置10中,如果在显示部42(触摸面板42a或者图像监视器42b)上显示图77所示的操作画面602的状态下,通过操作部40选择附加信息的标签,则在操作画面602的局部显示图80所示的操作画面620。在操作画面620中,包含搭载压入量的输入项目622和吸附压入量的输入项目624。另外,操作画面620还显示下述选择项目:是否进行试运行、是否利用传感器确认部件释放、是否进行部件吸附位置的校正、是否执行自动示教、是否执行部件跳过。另外,还显示部件废弃的项目,其用于输入在将部件废弃的情况下(判定为处于无法安装部件的状态的情况下)的电子部件处理方法。In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, when the operation screen 602 shown in FIG. An operation screen 620 shown in FIG. 80 is displayed on a part of the screen 602 . The operation screen 620 includes an input item 622 of a loading pushing amount and an input item 624 of an adsorption pushing amount. In addition, the operation screen 620 also displays the following selection items: whether to perform a test run, whether to confirm component release by a sensor, whether to perform component suction position correction, whether to perform automatic teaching, and whether to perform component skipping. In addition, an item of component disposal for inputting an electronic component processing method when the component is discarded (when it is determined that the component cannot be mounted) is also displayed.
输入项目622是用于设定在搭载时将电子部件从基板上表面压入的尺寸的项目。“0”是设计值中使电子部件和基板之间的距离成为0的值。在电子部件安装装置10中,如果数值向正向变大,则使电子部件移动至与基板相比向铅垂方向下侧压入的状态。通过设定压入量,可以抑制由于基板的平坦度等的影响,而在部件没有到达基板的状态下进行搭载,发生搭载偏移或在搭载时部件在焊料上滑动的情况。此外,为了将电子部件更可靠地向基板安装,优选将初始值设为正值,例如设为0.5mm。The input item 622 is an item for setting the size of the electronic component to be press-fitted from the upper surface of the substrate at the time of mounting. "0" is a value which makes the distance between an electronic component and a board|substrate zero among design values. In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, when the numerical value becomes larger in the positive direction, the electronic component is moved to a state of being pressed in below the substrate in the vertical direction. By setting the push-in amount, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of mounting misalignment or component slipping on the solder when mounting without reaching the substrate due to the influence of the flatness of the substrate, etc. In addition, in order to more reliably mount the electronic component on the board, it is preferable to set the initial value to a positive value, for example, to 0.5 mm.
输入项目624为部件保持时的压入量。即,用于设定在电子部件供给装置的保持位置处由吸嘴保持电子部件的情况下的吸嘴和电子部件之间的距离的项目。“0”是设计值中使电子部件和吸嘴的保持部之间的距离为0的值。在电子部件安装装置10中,如果数值向正向变大,则使吸嘴移动至与电子部件相比向铅垂方向下侧压入的状态。通过设定压入量,从而可以抑制由于部件尺寸(高度)波动等的影响,使得吸嘴无法到达电子部件,无法对部件进行吸附或者抓持的情况,或者发生芯片形状的电子部件竖起等现象。此外,为了更可靠地利用吸嘴对电子部件进行保持,优选将初始值设为正值,例如设为0.2mm。The input item 624 is the pushing amount at the time of component holding. That is, it is an item for setting the distance between the suction nozzle and the electronic component when the electronic component is held by the suction nozzle at the holding position of the electronic component supply apparatus. "0" is a value that makes the distance between the electronic component and the holding portion of the suction nozzle 0 among design values. In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , when the numerical value becomes larger toward the positive direction, the suction nozzle is moved to a state where the electronic component is pushed downward in the vertical direction. By setting the push-in amount, it is possible to suppress the influence of the component size (height) fluctuation, etc., so that the suction nozzle cannot reach the electronic component, the component cannot be adsorbed or grasped, or the chip-shaped electronic component is raised, etc. Phenomenon. Moreover, in order to hold an electronic component by a suction nozzle more reliably, it is preferable to set an initial value to a positive value, for example, to 0.2 mm.
另外,操作画面620显示部件层的输入项目。部件层的输入项目是对同一搭载层内的每个部件的优先度进行设定的项目。通过设定该项目,在以最优化顺序进行生产的情况下,可以设定该电子部件的搭载顺序的优先度。In addition, the operation screen 620 displays input items of the component layer. The input item of the component layer is an item for setting the priority of each component in the same mounting layer. By setting this item, it is possible to set the priority of the mounting order of the electronic components when the production is performed in the optimum order.
另外,操作画面620显示夹持吸嘴数据的输入项目。在这里,所谓夹持吸嘴,是抓持并保持电子部件的抓持吸嘴。按压位置是在抓持时对电子部件进行按压的位置。水平方向间隙是以负数输入抓持吸嘴的固定侧臂部的按压面和部件之间的间隙的项目。吸附时吸嘴方向是用于输入以0度供给部件时的吸附时吸嘴方向的项目。吸附高度微调值是用于输入抓持时的抓持高度(吸附高度)的偏移值的项目。In addition, the operation screen 620 displays input items of gripping nozzle data. Here, the gripping nozzle is a gripping nozzle that grips and holds an electronic component. The pressing position is a position where the electronic component is pressed when gripped. Horizontal clearance is an item for inputting the clearance between the pressing surface of the fixed side arm of the gripping nozzle and the part with a negative number. The suction nozzle direction is an item for inputting the suction nozzle direction when parts are supplied at 0 degrees. The suction height fine-tuning value is an item for inputting an offset value of the grasping height (suction height) at the time of grasping.
在电子部件安装装置10中,如果在显示部42(触摸面板42a或者图像监视器42b)上显示图77所示的操作画面602的状态下,通过操作部40对扩展的标签进行选择,则在操作画面602的局部显示图81所示的操作画面630。在操作画面630中,显示对由激光识别装置38执行的电子部件的状态检测处理的各种条件进行设定的项目。在操作画面630中包含;设定吸嘴移动速度的输入项目、激光高度的输入项目632以及部件形状的输入项目634。在这里,θ速度(测量时)是输入激光识别时的吸嘴的θ轴加速度的项目,θ速度(测量之外)是输入在激光定心后的旋转、例如用于得到搭载角度的旋转等的情况下的吸嘴的θ轴加速度的项目。In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, when the operation screen 602 shown in FIG. An operation screen 630 shown in FIG. 81 is displayed on a part of the operation screen 602 . On the operation screen 630 , items for setting various conditions of the state detection process of the electronic component executed by the laser recognition device 38 are displayed. The operation screen 630 includes an input item 632 for setting the moving speed of the nozzle, an input item 632 for the laser height, and an input item 634 for the component shape. Here, θ speed (during measurement) is an item for inputting the θ-axis acceleration of the nozzle during laser recognition, and θ speed (other than measurement) is an input of rotation after laser centering, such as rotation for obtaining a mounting angle, etc. In the case of the θ-axis acceleration item of the nozzle.
输入项目632是输入从测量时的吸嘴前端至激光照射面的距离的项目。输入项目634是输入测定对象的电子部件的形状的项目,如图82所示,从显示选择项的列表636中利用光标638进行指定,从而输入部件形状的信息。通过在输入项目634中输入部件的形状、具体地说电子部件的主体形状,从而可以确定在利用激光识别装置38对电子部件的形状进行识别的情况下,判定是否为该电子部件的特征点。例如,在向输入项目634中输入了无缺角的情况下,对4个顶点进行检测。在图83A所示的电子部件640、641的情况下,分别对1至4这4个顶点的位置进行检测。由此,可以对位置偏移、角度偏移进行检测。另外,在向输入项目634中输入了有缺角的情况下,对5至8个顶点进行检测。在图83B所示的电子部件642的情况下,对1至6这6个顶点的位置进行检测。在图83B所示的电子部件643的情况下,对1至8这8个顶点的位置进行检测。由此,可以对位置偏移、角度偏移进行检测。在向输入项目634中输入了PLCC的情况下,对8个顶点进行检测。在图83C所示的电子部件644的情况下,对1至8这8个顶点的位置进行检测。另外,在PLCC的情况下,可以从检测出的8个顶点中使用4个点,对位置偏移、角度偏移进行检测。另外,在向输入项目634中输入了挠性的情况下,对使XY方向的部件宽度成为最小的附近的8个点进行检测。在图83D所示的电子部件646、647的情况下,对1至8这8个点的位置进行检测。在图83D所示的电子部件643的情况下,对1至8这8个顶点的位置进行检测。由此,可以对位置偏移、角度偏移进行检测。The input item 632 is an item for inputting the distance from the tip of the suction nozzle to the laser irradiation surface at the time of measurement. The input item 634 is an item for inputting the shape of the electronic component to be measured. As shown in FIG. 82 , the component shape information is input by specifying it with a cursor 638 from a list 636 of display options. By inputting the shape of the component, specifically the main body shape of the electronic component, in the input item 634 , when the shape of the electronic component is recognized by the laser recognition device 38 , it can be determined whether it is a feature point of the electronic component. For example, when no notch is input in the input item 634, four vertices are detected. In the case of the electronic components 640 and 641 shown in FIG. 83A , the positions of four vertices 1 to 4 are respectively detected. Thus, it is possible to detect positional deviation and angular deviation. In addition, when a missing corner is input to the input item 634, 5 to 8 vertices are detected. In the case of the electronic component 642 shown in FIG. 83B , the positions of six vertices 1 to 6 are detected. In the case of the electronic component 643 shown in FIG. 83B , the positions of eight vertices 1 to 8 are detected. Thus, it is possible to detect positional deviation and angular deviation. When PLCC is input to the input item 634, eight vertices are detected. In the case of the electronic component 644 shown in FIG. 83C , the positions of eight vertices 1 to 8 are detected. In addition, in the case of PLCC, positional deviation and angular deviation can be detected using 4 points out of 8 detected vertices. In addition, when flexibility is input in the input item 634, 8 points in the vicinity which make the member width of an XY direction minimum are detected. In the case of the electronic components 646 and 647 shown in FIG. 83D , the positions of eight points 1 to 8 are detected. In the case of the electronic component 643 shown in FIG. 83D , the positions of eight vertices 1 to 8 are detected. Thus, it is possible to detect positional deviation and angular deviation.
电子部件安装装置10可以如上述所示对操作画面602、620、630等进行显示,取得与电子部件关联的各种信息。电子部件安装装置10通过基于所取得的与电子部件关联的各种信息,进行电子部件的安装处理,从而可以适当地将电子部件向基板搭载。另外,电子部件安装装置10通过设置适合没有引线的无引线电子部件(搭载型电子部件)、和带有向基板插入的引线的引线型电子部件(插入型电子部件)的各种输入项目,从而可以执行与各个电子部件相对应的处理。例如,在电子部件安装装置10中,作为部件类别,可以输入表示为插入型电子部件的插入部件。由此,电子部件安装装置10通过对部件类别进行检测,可以对是搭载型电子部件还是插入型电子部件进行检测,即,对在安装时是否将引线向基板的孔(插入孔)中插入(插入还是搭载)进行检测。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can display the operation screens 602, 620, 630, etc. as described above, and acquire various information related to electronic components. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can appropriately mount the electronic component on the board by performing the mounting process of the electronic component based on the acquired various information related to the electronic component. In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 provides various input items suitable for leadless electronic components without leads (mount-on electronic components) and lead-type electronic components with leads inserted into the board (plug-in electronic components). Processing corresponding to each electronic component can be performed. For example, in the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, as a component type, an insertion component indicated as an insertion type electronic component can be input. Thus, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can detect whether it is a mount-type electronic component or an insertion-type electronic component by detecting the type of the component, that is, whether the lead wire is inserted into the hole (insertion hole) of the substrate during mounting ( plugged in or piggybacked) for detection.
使用图84及图85,对电子部件的形状的识别动作进行说明。图84及图85分别是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。图84及图85所示的处理是通过由控制部60控制各部分的动作而执行的。The recognition operation of the shape of an electronic component will be described using FIGS. 84 and 85 . 84 and 85 are flowcharts each showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. The processing shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 is executed by controlling the operation of each part by the control unit 60 .
图84所示的处理是对测量电子部件形状的位置进行设定的处理。在这里,控制部60可以在每次对电子部件的形状进行测量时进行图84所示的处理,也可以在对向基板搭载电子部件的搭载动作进行设定时,针对全部电子部件执行,在实际的电子部件搭载处理时,也可以基于事先执行并确定的结果(测量位置的设定结果)进行形状测量。The processing shown in FIG. 84 is processing for setting a position for measuring the shape of an electronic component. Here, the control unit 60 may perform the processing shown in FIG. 84 every time the shape of the electronic component is measured, or may execute it for all electronic components when setting the mounting operation of the electronic component on the substrate. In the actual electronic component mounting process, shape measurement can also be performed based on the result (measurement position setting result) performed and determined in advance.
作为步骤S112,控制部60对是否有测量位置设定进行判定。在这里,所谓测量位置设定,是指对于对象的电子部件,由操作人员设定的对形状进行测量的位置的信息、上述操作画面中的激光高度的输入值。控制部60在步骤S112中判定为有设定(是)的情况下,作为步骤S114,基于设定而设定测量位置,即,将操作人员所设定的测量位置设定为该电子部件的测量位置,结束本处理。另外,控制部60在步骤S112中判定为无设定(否)的情况下,作为步骤S116,将基准位置设定为测量位置,结束本处理。在这里,所谓基准位置,是指根据电子部件的类别、即电容器或IC芯片等而设定的基准测量位置。As step S112, the control unit 60 determines whether or not a measurement position is set. Here, the "measurement position setting" refers to the information on the position for measuring the shape of the target electronic component set by the operator, and the input value of the laser height on the above-mentioned operation screen. When the control unit 60 determines in step S112 that there is a setting (Yes), as step S114, the measurement position is set based on the setting, that is, the measurement position set by the operator is set as the position of the electronic component. The position is measured, and this process ends. In addition, when it is determined in step S112 that there is no setting (No), the control unit 60 sets the reference position as the measurement position in step S116 and ends this process. Here, the reference position refers to a reference measurement position set according to the type of electronic component, that is, a capacitor, an IC chip, or the like.
电子部件安装装置10,可以如上述所示由操作人员对测量位置进行设定,可以将操作人员任意设定的位置作为测量位置。另外,电子部件安装装置10可以对1个电子部件的测量位置设定多个。例如,在径向引线型电子部件的情况下,可以对主体和引线这2个部位的形状进行测量。另外,电子部件安装装置10在设定了测量位置的情况下,基于设定取得该电子部件的该测量位置处的形状的信息。此外,作为形状的信息,可以使用利用激光识别装置38进行测量后的结果,也可以使用由操作人员输入的该电子部件的形状数据。In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, the measurement position can be set by the operator as described above, and a position arbitrarily set by the operator can be used as the measurement position. In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 may set a plurality of measurement positions for one electronic component. For example, in the case of a radial lead type electronic component, the shapes of two parts, the main body and the lead, can be measured. In addition, when the measurement position is set, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 acquires information on the shape of the electronic component at the measurement position based on the setting. In addition, as the information on the shape, the result of measurement by the laser recognition device 38 may be used, or the shape data of the electronic component input by the operator may be used.
下面,图85所示的处理是电子部件安装前的处理,具体地说,是电子部件形状的测量处理以及基于测量结果的判定处理。此外,控制部60针对要保持的全部电子部件执行图85的处理。作为步骤S120,控制部60取得保持对象的电子部件的数据。在这里,所谓保持对象(吸附对象、抓持对象)的电子部件的数据,是指用于将该电子部件向基板上搭载所需的各种信息。保持对象的电子部件的数据是保持该电子部件的部件供给装置100的位置、电子部件的形状数据、电子部件的吸附高度(保持高度)、由激光识别装置38对电子部件进行测量的测量位置的信息等。Next, the processing shown in FIG. 85 is the processing before mounting the electronic component, specifically, the measurement processing of the shape of the electronic component and the determination processing based on the measurement result. In addition, the control unit 60 executes the process of FIG. 85 for all electronic components to be held. As step S120, the control part 60 acquires the data of the electronic component of a storage object. Here, the data of an electronic component to be held (attraction target, grip target) refers to various information necessary for mounting the electronic component on a substrate. The data of the electronic component to be held is the position of the component supply device 100 holding the electronic component, the shape data of the electronic component, the suction height (holding height) of the electronic component, and the measurement position of the electronic component by the laser recognition device 38 . information etc.
在步骤S120中取得数据后,作为步骤S122,控制部60确定测量位置。即,控制部60基于步骤S120中取得的数据,确定对电子部件的形状进行检测的位置、即电子部件的Z轴方向上的位置。此外,控制部60也可以在电子部件的吸附前进行步骤S120以及步骤S122的处理。After acquiring the data in step S120, the control unit 60 specifies the measurement position as step S122. That is, the control part 60 specifies the position which detects the shape of an electronic component, ie, the position in the Z-axis direction of an electronic component based on the data acquired in step S120. In addition, the control part 60 may perform the process of step S120 and step S122 before adsorption|suction of an electronic component.
在步骤S122中确定测量位置、且利用吸嘴吸附了电子部件的情况下,作为步骤S124,控制部60对电子部件的Z轴位置进行调整。即,控制部60通过使吸嘴沿Z轴方向移动,从而使步骤S122中确定的电子部件的测量位置向激光识别装置38的测量区域移动。控制部60在步骤S124中对电子部件的Z轴位置进行调整后,作为步骤S126,对电子部件的形状进行测量。即,控制部60使用激光识别装置38,对电子部件的测量位置处的形状进行检测。When the measurement position is specified in step S122 and the electronic component is picked up by the suction nozzle, the control unit 60 adjusts the Z-axis position of the electronic component as step S124. That is, the control part 60 moves the measurement position of the electronic component specified in step S122 to the measurement area|region of the laser recognition device 38 by moving a suction nozzle to Z-axis direction. The control part 60 measures the shape of an electronic component as step S126 after adjusting the Z-axis position of an electronic component in step S124. That is, the control unit 60 detects the shape of the electronic component at the measurement position using the laser recognition device 38 .
控制部60在步骤S126中对电子部件的测量位置处的形状进行检测后,作为步骤S128,对测量是否结束进行判定。即,控制部60对步骤S122中确定的测量位置处的形状测量是否结束进行判定。控制部60在步骤S128中判定为测量没有结束(否)的情况下,进入步骤S124,再次进行步骤S124和步骤S126的处理,对测量没有结束的测量位置的形状进行测量。控制部60通过如上述所示反复进行电子部件的位置调整和形状测量,从而对所设定的测量位置的形状进行检测。After the control part 60 detects the shape at the measurement position of an electronic component in step S126, it determines whether measurement is complete|finished as step S128. That is, the control unit 60 determines whether the shape measurement at the measurement position specified in step S122 has been completed. When it is determined in step S128 that the measurement has not been completed (No), the control unit 60 proceeds to step S124 and performs the processing of steps S124 and S126 again to measure the shape of the measurement position where the measurement has not been completed. The control part 60 detects the shape of the set measurement position by repeating position adjustment and shape measurement of an electronic component as mentioned above.
控制部60在步骤S128中判定为测量结束(是)的情况下,作为步骤S130,将测量结果和基准数据进行比较。在这里,基准数据是步骤S120中取得的吸附对象(保持对象)的电子部件形状的数据。控制部60通过将测量结果和基准数据进行比较,从而对所吸附的电子部件是否为与基准数据一致的形状,电子部件的朝向是否与基准数据的朝向一致等进行判定。When the control unit 60 determines in step S128 that the measurement has been completed (Yes), in step S130 , the measurement result is compared with the reference data. Here, the reference data is data on the shape of the electronic component to be sucked (to be held) acquired in step S120. The control unit 60 compares the measurement result with the reference data to determine whether the attracted electronic component has a shape matching the reference data, whether the orientation of the electronic component matches the reference data, and the like.
在步骤S130中进行比较后,作为步骤S132,控制部60对部件是否适当进行判定。具体地说,控制部60在步骤S132中对是否以可安装的状态吸附了电子部件进行判定。控制部60在步骤S132中判定为部件不适当(否)的情况下,作为步骤S134,将吸嘴所吸附的电子部件废弃,结束本处理。控制部60使搭载头以及吸嘴向与部件储存部19相对的位置移动,通过将该吸嘴所保持的电子部件放入部件储存部19,从而将电子部件废弃。此外,控制部60再次执行将同一种类的电子部件向基板的同一搭载位置(安装位置)安装的处理。After the comparison in step S130, as step S132, the control unit 60 determines whether or not the component is appropriate. Specifically, in step S132, the control unit 60 determines whether or not the electronic component has been sucked in a mountable state. When the control part 60 judges in step S132 that a component is not suitable (No), as step S134, the electronic component picked up by the suction nozzle is discarded, and this process is complete|finished. The control unit 60 moves the mounting head and the suction nozzle to a position facing the component storage unit 19 , and puts the electronic component held by the suction nozzle into the component storage unit 19 to discard the electronic component. In addition, the control unit 60 executes again the process of mounting the same type of electronic component on the same mounting position (mounting position) on the substrate.
控制部60在步骤S132中判定为部件适当(是)的情况下,作为步骤S136,对部件的方向(吸嘴的旋转方向上的方向)是否适当进行判定。即,对所吸附的电子部件是否与基准的朝向相同进行判定。此外,作为步骤S136,本实施方式的控制部60对电子部件是否反转进行判定。控制部60在步骤S136中判定为方向不适当,即电子部件为反转后的状态(否)的情况下,在步骤S138中使电子部件反转后,进入步骤S140。When the control unit 60 determines in step S132 that the component is appropriate (Yes), as step S136 , it determines whether the direction of the component (direction in the rotation direction of the suction nozzle) is appropriate. That is, it is determined whether or not the attracted electronic component is oriented in the same direction as the reference. Moreover, as step S136, the control part 60 of this embodiment judges whether an electronic component is reversed. When the control part 60 determines in step S136 that the direction is inappropriate, that is, the electronic component is in an inverted state (No), it inverts the electronic component in step S138, and then proceeds to step S140.
控制部60在步骤S136中判定为是的情况下或者执行了步骤S138的处理的情况下,作为步骤S140,基于保持位置,对电子部件的搭载位置(安装位置)进行微调。例如,基于电子部件的形状的检测结果,对吸嘴吸附着电子部件的位置进行检测,基于保持位置相对于基准位置的偏移,对安装时的吸嘴和基板的相对位置进行调整。控制部60在执行步骤S140的处理后,结束本处理。另外,控制部60在进行图85的步骤S140的处理后,对所判定的电子部件基于步骤S140的结果而将电子部件向基板上搭载。When the determination in step S136 is YES or when the process of step S138 is executed, the control unit 60 finely adjusts the mounting position (mounting position) of the electronic component based on the holding position as step S140 . For example, the position where the suction nozzle picks up the electronic component is detected based on the shape detection result of the electronic component, and the relative position between the suction nozzle and the substrate during mounting is adjusted based on the deviation of the holding position from the reference position. The control unit 60 ends this process after executing the process of step S140. Moreover, after performing the process of step S140 of FIG. 85, the control part 60 mounts an electronic component on a board|substrate based on the result of step S140 with respect to the electronic component determined.
电子部件安装装置10通过如上述所示使用激光识别装置38对电子部件的形状进行检测,基于其结果,进行各种处理,从而可以更适当地向基板上搭载电子部件。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 detects the shape of the electronic component using the laser recognition device 38 as described above, and performs various processes based on the result, so that the electronic component can be more appropriately mounted on the board.
电子部件安装装置10在图85所示的流程图的步骤S134中将电子部件废弃,但也可以在判定为电子部件的引线形状不适当的情况下,执行对引线形状进行修正的处理。即,也可以在步骤S134中不将电子部件废弃,而是将电子部件的引线校正(加工)为可插入的形状,并向搭载位置(安装位置)安装。在电子部件安装装置10中,可以利用电子部件供给装置100的切断单元的用于夹持电子部件的机构,对电子部件的引线进行修正,也可以利用另外设置的修正机构对电子部件的引线进行修正。如上述所示,作为对引线的形状进行加工的加工单元,可以使用对电子部件的主体或者引线进行夹持的机构、另外设置的修正机构等各种单元。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 discards the electronic component in step S134 of the flowchart shown in FIG. 85 , but may execute a process of correcting the lead shape when determining that the lead shape of the electronic component is not appropriate. That is, instead of discarding the electronic component in step S134 , the leads of the electronic component may be corrected (processed) into an insertable shape and mounted at the mounting position (mounting position). In the electronic component mounting device 10, the lead wires of the electronic components can be corrected by using the mechanism for clamping the electronic components of the cutting unit of the electronic component supply device 100, or the lead wires of the electronic components can be corrected by using an additional correction mechanism. fix. As described above, as the processing means for processing the shape of the lead wire, various means such as a mechanism for clamping the main body of the electronic component or the lead wire, and a separately provided correction mechanism can be used.
下面,使用图86及图87,对确定电子部件的搭载顺序(安装顺序)的确定动作进行说明。搭载顺序中包含插入的电子部件的顺序。图86是用于说明电子部件安装装置的动作的说明图。Next, the determination operation for determining the mounting order (mounting order) of electronic components will be described using FIGS. 86 and 87 . The mounting sequence includes the sequence of inserted electronic components. Fig. 86 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
本实施方式的电子部件安装装置10,作为生产程序的数据而具有图86所示的列表302。列表302是与基板的搭载点(包含向基板插入的点)对应的搭载层的信息和插入部件指定的信息。在这里,所谓搭载层,是指确定电子部件的搭载顺序时使用的优先级的信息,以1至7的数值进行设定。在这里,对于搭载层,数值越小越判定为搭载顺序靠前,数值越大越判定为搭载顺序靠后。此外,搭载层是由操作人员考虑各种信息而设定的值。所谓插入部件指定,是表示向搭载点上搭载的电子部件是否为插入部件的项目。此外,在图86中,以“是”表示指定为插入部件的搭载点。在这里,所谓插入部件主要是指径向引线型电子部件等将引线向形成在基板上的孔中插入的电子部件。此外,插入部件指定也是由操作人员设定的信息。因此,对于不依赖于电子部件的种类而由操作人员判定为插入部件的搭载点,可以将插入部件指定设为“是”。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 of this embodiment has a list 302 shown in FIG. 86 as data of a production program. The list 302 contains information on mounting layers corresponding to mounting points of the substrate (including points inserted into the substrate) and information specifying insertion components. Here, the "mounting layer" refers to priority information used when determining the mounting order of electronic components, and is set with a numerical value of 1 to 7. Here, with regard to the loading layer, the smaller the numerical value, the higher the loading order is, and the larger the numerical value, the lower the loading order is. In addition, the loading layer is a value set by an operator in consideration of various information. The insertion component designation is an item indicating whether or not the electronic component mounted on the mounting point is an insertion component. In addition, in FIG. 86 , "Yes" indicates that a mounting point designated as an insertion component is indicated. Here, the insertion member mainly refers to an electronic component such as a radial lead type electronic component in which leads are inserted into holes formed in a substrate. In addition, the designation of insertion parts is also information set by the operator. Therefore, the designation of the insertion component may be set to “Yes” for the mounting point determined by the operator as the insertion component regardless of the type of the electronic component.
电子部件安装装置10使用列表302的信息,生成搭载顺序列表304。在这里,在搭载顺序列表304中,列表上侧的搭载点成为先搭载电子部件的搭载点,列表下侧的搭载点成为后搭载电子部件的搭载点。即,在搭载顺序列表304中,搭载电子部件的顺序以先后顺序从上方开始顺序表示。在这里,搭载顺序列表304的内部层是基于搭载层和插入部件指定由控制部60确定的层的信息。控制部60从内部层的数值较小的搭载点开始顺序对搭载电子部件的搭载点进行确定。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 generates the mounting order list 304 using the information of the list 302 . Here, in the mounting sequence list 304 , the mounting points on the upper side of the list are the mounting points where the electronic components are mounted first, and the mounting points on the lower side of the list are the mounting points where the electronic components are mounted later. That is, in the mounting order list 304 , the order of mounting electronic components is shown sequentially from the top. Here, the internal layers of the mounting order list 304 are information specifying a layer specified by the control unit 60 based on the mounting layer and the insertion component. The control unit 60 specifies the mounting points where the electronic components are mounted in order from the mounting point with the smaller numerical value of the inner layer.
图87是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。图87所示的处理是基于列表302生成搭载顺序列表304的处理的一个例子。图87所示的处理是通过由控制部60控制各部分的动作而执行的。作为步骤S200,控制部60读出生产程序。控制部60从外部的装置读出生产程序,或从电子部件安装装置10的存储部读出生产程序。控制部60在步骤S200中读出生产程序后,作为步骤S202,取得搭载点n的信息。具体地说,取得搭载点n的搭载层的信息和插入部件指定的信息。Fig. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. The process shown in FIG. 87 is an example of the process of generating the installation order list 304 based on the list 302 . The processing shown in FIG. 87 is executed by controlling the operation of each part by the control unit 60 . As step S200, the control unit 60 reads out the production program. The control unit 60 reads the production program from an external device, or reads the production program from the storage unit of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 . After reading the production program in step S200, the control unit 60 acquires information on the mounting point n as step S202. Specifically, the information on the mounting layer of the mounting point n and the information specifying the insertion part are acquired.
控制部60在步骤S202中取得搭载点n的信息后,作为步骤S204,对是否搭载点n=插入部件、即搭载点n的插入部件指定的信息是否为“是”进行判定。控制部60在步骤S204中判定为不是搭载点n=插入部件(否)的情况下,作为步骤S206,设为内部层=搭载层。即,控制部60在搭载点n的插入部件指定的信息不为“是”的情况下,将搭载层的数值设为内部层的数值。控制部60在进行步骤S206的处理后,进入步骤S210。控制部60在步骤S204中判定为搭载点n=插入部件(是)的情况下,作为步骤S208,设为内部层=搭载层+7。即,控制部60在搭载点n的插入部件指定的信息为“是”的情况下,将搭载层的数值与7相加后得到的数值设为内部层的数值。控制部60在进行步骤S208的处理后,进入步骤S210。After the control unit 60 acquires the information of the mounting point n in step S202, as step S204, it is determined whether the mounting point n=insert part, that is, the information specifying the insertion part of the mounting point n is "Yes". When the control unit 60 determines in step S204 that it is not the mounting point n=insert component (No), it sets as step S206 that the internal layer=mounting layer. That is, the control unit 60 sets the numerical value of the mounting layer to the numerical value of the inner layer when the information of the designation of the insertion component of the mounting point n is not “Yes”. After the control part 60 performs the process of step S206, it progresses to step S210. When the control unit 60 determines in step S204 that mounting point n=insert component (Yes), it sets internal layer=mounting layer+7 as step S208. That is, the control unit 60 sets the numerical value obtained by adding 7 to the numerical value of the mounting layer as the numerical value of the internal layer when the information of the insertion component designation of the mounting point n is “Yes”. After the control part 60 performs the process of step S208, it progresses to step S210.
控制部60在进行步骤S206或者步骤S208的处理后,作为步骤S210,对搭载数据是否结束、即是否针对全部搭载点计算了内部层进行判定。控制部60在步骤S210中判定为没有结束(否)的情况下,作为步骤S212,将搭载点n设为n+1后进入步骤S202。即,将内部层的检测对象的搭载点作为下一个搭载点,进行上述的处理。After performing the process of step S206 or step S208 , the control unit 60 determines whether the loading data is completed, that is, whether the inner layer has been calculated for all the loading points, as step S210 . When the control part 60 judges in step S210 that it is not finished (No), as step S212, it sets the mounting point n to n+1, and progresses to step S202. That is, the above-described processing is performed with the mounting point of the detection target in the inner layer being the next mounting point.
控制部60在步骤S210中判定为结束(是)、即对全部搭载点的内部层进行了设定的情况下,作为步骤S214,对搭载顺序进行确定。即,控制部60基于所设定的内部层和各种条件,确定向搭载点搭载电子部件的顺序。控制部60在对搭载顺序进行确定后,生成搭载顺序列表,结束本处理。When the control unit 60 determines in step S210 that it is completed (YES), that is, when the internal layers of all the mounting points have been set, as step S214 , the mounting order is determined. That is, the control unit 60 determines the order of mounting electronic components on the mounting points based on the set internal layers and various conditions. After determining the installation order, the control unit 60 creates an installation order list, and ends this process.
如上述所示,电子部件安装装置10通过设置可以由操作人员对是否为插入部件进行设定的项目,对设定为插入部件的搭载点的内部层进行一定的加法运算,从而可以使插入部件顺序靠后地向基板上搭载。另外,操作人员仅通过对是否为插入部件进行判定,就可以使对象的电子部件的搭载顺序靠后。由此,在搭载层的设定时,不需要考虑用于搭载层的层而设定电子部件的搭载层。由此,可以减少确定搭载层的操作给操作人员造成的负担。As mentioned above, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can make the insertion part Mounted on the substrate in sequence. In addition, the operator can lower the mounting order of the electronic components to be targeted only by determining whether or not they are insertion components. Accordingly, when setting the mounting layer, it is not necessary to set the mounting layer of the electronic component in consideration of the layer used for the mounting layer. Thus, the burden on the operator in the operation of specifying the loading floor can be reduced.
使用图88,对电子部件安装装置的部件供给装置的动作进行说明。图88是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。图88所示的处理是通过由部件供给控制部64基于控制部60的处理,对部件供给装置的各部分的动作进行控制而执行的。此外,图88所示的处理是在保持区域中没有配置电子部件的状态下开始的。作为步骤S260,部件供给控制部64使保持带移动1个间距的量。即,部件供给控制部64通过使供给器单元的进给爪进行1次往复移动或者沿进给方向移动,从而使保持带移动1个间距的量。由此,使保持带主体上保持的电子部件向保持区域移动。The operation of the component supply device of the electronic component mounting apparatus will be described using FIG. 88 . Fig. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. The processing shown in FIG. 88 is executed by the components supply control unit 64 controlling the operation of each part of the components supply device based on the processing of the control unit 60 . Note that the processing shown in FIG. 88 is started in a state where no electronic components are placed in the holding area. As step S260, the component supply control unit 64 moves the holding belt by one pitch. That is, the component supply control unit 64 moves the holding belt by one pitch by reciprocating once or moving the feeding claw of the feeder unit once or in the feeding direction. As a result, the electronic component held on the holding tape main body is moved to the holding area.
部件供给控制部64在步骤S260中使电子部件向保持区域移动后,作为步骤S262,将移动至保持区域中的电子部件的引线切断。即,部件供给控制部64利用切断单元,将引线的位于部件主体和保持带主体之间的部分切断。部件供给控制部64在步骤S262中将引线切断后,作为步骤S264,维持夹持状态。即,部件供给控制部64在利用切断单元将引线切断后,维持由切断后的齿夹持引线的状态。After the component supply control unit 64 moves the electronic component to the holding area in step S260, as step S262, the lead wire of the electronic component moved to the holding area is cut. That is, the component supply control unit 64 cuts the portion of the lead wire located between the component main body and the holding tape main body using the cutting unit. After the component supply control unit 64 cuts the lead wire in step S262, the clamping state is maintained in step S264. That is, after the lead wire is cut by the cutting means, the component supply control unit 64 maintains a state in which the lead wire is sandwiched by the cut teeth.
部件供给控制部64在步骤S264中维持夹持状态后,作为步骤S266,对吸嘴32是否保持(吸附或抓持)电子部件进行判定。部件供给控制部64在步骤S266中判定为吸嘴上没有保持电子部件(否)的情况下,进入步骤S264。部件供给控制部64在判定为吸嘴上保持电子部件之前,维持电子部件的夹持状态。After the component supply control unit 64 maintains the gripping state in step S264 , as step S266 , it is determined whether the suction nozzle 32 holds (suctions or grips) the electronic component. When the component supply control part 64 determines in step S266 that the electronic component is not held on the suction nozzle (No), it progresses to step S264. The component supply control unit 64 maintains the clamped state of the electronic component until it determines that the electronic component is held on the suction nozzle.
部件供给控制部64在步骤S266中判定为吸嘴上保持电子部件(是)的情况下,作为步骤S268,释放电子部件,即解除夹持状态。由此,切断引线而从保持带分离的电子部件,利用吸嘴向规定的搭载位置(安装位置)移动,并向基板上搭载。When the component supply control unit 64 determines in step S266 that the electronic component is held on the suction nozzle (Yes), in step S268 , the electronic component is released, that is, the clamped state is released. As a result, the electronic component separated from the holding tape by cutting the lead wire is moved to a predetermined mounting position (mounting position) by the suction nozzle, and mounted on the substrate.
部件供给控制部64在步骤S268中释放电子部件后,作为步骤S270,对是否存在保持带进给请求进行判定。在这里,所谓保持带进给请求是指使保持带移动1个间距的量,使下一个电子部件向保持区域移动的请求。部件供给控制部64在步骤S270中判定为有请求(是)的情况下,进入步骤S260,再次执行上述处理。After the component supply control unit 64 releases the electronic component in step S268, as step S270, it is determined whether or not there is a holding tape feed request. Here, the holding tape feed request refers to a request to move the holding tape by one pitch to move the next electronic component to the holding area. When the component supply control part 64 judges in step S270 that there is a request (Yes), it progresses to step S260, and performs the said process again.
部件供给控制部64在步骤S270中判定为无请求(否)的情况下,作为步骤S272,对处理是否结束进行判定。部件供给控制部64在步骤S272中判定为处理没有结束(否)的情况下,进入步骤S270。另外,部件供给控制部64在步骤S272中判定为处理结束(是)的情况下,结束本处理。When the component supply control unit 64 determines in step S270 that there is no request (No), it determines in step S272 whether or not the processing has ended. When the components supply control part 64 determines in step S272 that the processing has not been completed (No), it proceeds to step S270. In addition, when the component supply control part 64 determines with processing completion|finish (Yes) in step S272, this processing is complete|finish.
部件供给控制部64在如上述所示使电子部件向保持区域移动,将引线切断并夹持,使吸嘴吸附电子部件后,通过解除夹持,从而可以使吸嘴以可移动的状态吸附径向引线型电子部件。The component supply control unit 64 moves the electronic component to the holding area as described above, cuts and clamps the lead wire, and makes the suction nozzle suck the electronic component, and then releases the clamp so that the suction nozzle can suck the diameter in a movable state. to leaded electronic components.
图89是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。此外,图89所示的处理动作是从搬入基板后至向基板上搭载电子部件完成为止的动作。另外,图89所示的处理动作是通过由控制部60对各部分的动作进行控制而执行的。Fig. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. In addition, the processing operation shown in FIG. 89 is an operation after carrying in a board|substrate to completion of mounting an electronic component on a board|substrate. In addition, the processing operation shown in FIG. 89 is executed by controlling the operation of each part by the control unit 60 .
作为步骤S302,控制部60搬入基板。具体地说,控制部60利用基板输送部12将搭载电子部件的对象基板向规定位置输送。控制部60在步骤S302中搬入基板后,作为步骤S304,进行保持移动。在这里,所谓保持移动(吸附移动),是指使搭载头主体30移动至吸嘴32与位于部件供给单元14的保持区域中的电子部件80相对的位置的处理动作。As step S302, the control unit 60 carries in the substrate. Specifically, the control unit 60 uses the substrate transport unit 12 to transport the target substrate on which the electronic component is mounted to a predetermined position. After the control unit 60 carries in the substrate in step S302, it performs holding movement in step S304. Here, the holding movement (suction movement) refers to a processing operation of moving the head body 30 to a position where the suction nozzle 32 faces the electronic component 80 located in the holding area of the component supply unit 14 .
控制部60在步骤S304中进行吸附移动后,作为步骤S306,使吸嘴32下降。即,控制部60使吸嘴32向下方移动至可以保持(吸附、抓持)电子部件80的位置。控制部60在步骤S306中使吸嘴32下降后,作为步骤S308,利用吸嘴32对部件进行保持,作为步骤S310,使吸嘴32上升。控制部60在步骤S310中使吸嘴上升至规定位置后,具体地说,使电子部件80移动至激光识别装置38的测量位置后,作为步骤S312,对由吸嘴32吸附的电子部件的形状进行检测。控制部60在步骤S312中对电子部件的形状进行检测后,作为步骤S314,使吸嘴上升。此外,控制部60如上述所示对步骤S312的部件形状进行检测,判定为所保持的电子部件为不可搭载的情况下,将电子部件废弃,再次吸附电子部件。控制部60在使吸嘴上升至规定位置后,作为步骤S316,进行搭载移动,即,进行使由吸嘴32吸附的电子部件向与基板8的搭载位置(安装位置)相对的位置移动的处理动作,作为步骤S318,使吸嘴32下降,作为步骤S320,进行部件搭载(部件安装),即,进行从吸嘴32上释放电子部件80的处理动作,作为步骤S322,使吸嘴32上升。即,控制部60执行步骤S312至步骤S320的处理动作,执行上述安装处理。After the control unit 60 performs suction movement in step S304, the suction nozzle 32 is lowered in step S306. That is, the control unit 60 moves the suction nozzle 32 downward to a position where the electronic component 80 can be held (adsorbed, grasped). After the control unit 60 lowers the suction nozzle 32 in step S306, the component is held by the suction nozzle 32 in step S308, and the suction nozzle 32 is raised in step S310. After the control unit 60 raises the suction nozzle to a predetermined position in step S310, specifically, after moving the electronic component 80 to the measurement position of the laser recognition device 38, as step S312, the shape of the electronic component sucked by the suction nozzle 32 is checked. to test. After the control part 60 detects the shape of an electronic component in step S312, it raises a suction nozzle as step S314. In addition, the control unit 60 detects the component shape in step S312 as described above, and when it determines that the held electronic component is unmountable, discards the electronic component and adsorbs the electronic component again. After the control unit 60 raises the suction nozzle to a predetermined position, as step S316, it performs mounting movement, that is, a process of moving the electronic component sucked by the suction nozzle 32 to a position facing the mounting position (mounting position) of the substrate 8 . In the operation, as step S318, the suction nozzle 32 is lowered, as in step S320, component mounting (component mounting), that is, a processing operation of releasing the electronic component 80 from the suction nozzle 32 is performed, and as step S322, the suction nozzle 32 is raised. That is, the control unit 60 executes the processing operations from step S312 to step S320 to execute the above-mentioned installation processing.
控制部60在步骤S322中使吸嘴上升的情况下,作为步骤S324,对全部部件的搭载是否已完成、即预定向基板8上搭载的电子部件的安装处理是否已完成进行判定。控制部60在步骤S324中判定为全部部件的搭载还没有完成(否)、即预定进行搭载的电子部件还有残留的情况下,进入步骤S304,执行将下一个电子部件向基板8上搭载的处理动作。如上述所示,控制部60反复进行上述处理动作,直至完成向基板上搭载全部部件为止。控制部60在步骤S324中判定为全部部件的搭载已经完成(是)的情况下,结束本处理。When the control unit 60 raises the suction nozzle in step S322, as step S324, it is determined whether the mounting of all components is completed, that is, whether the mounting process of the electronic components to be mounted on the substrate 8 is completed. In step S324, the control unit 60 determines that the mounting of all components has not been completed (No), that is, when there are still electronic components scheduled to be mounted, the control unit 60 proceeds to step S304, and executes the process of mounting the next electronic component on the substrate 8. Handle actions. As described above, the control unit 60 repeats the above-mentioned processing operations until all the components are mounted on the substrate. When it is determined in step S324 that the mounting of all components has been completed (Yes), the control unit 60 ends this process.
下面,使用图90,说明吸嘴对部件供给装置100中保持的电子部件进行吸附之前和之后的部件供给装置100和搭载头15的动作。图90是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。图90所示的处理是通过由控制部60对各部分的动作进行控制而执行的。Next, the operations of the component supply apparatus 100 and the mounting head 15 before and after the suction nozzles suction the electronic components held in the component supply apparatus 100 will be described using FIG. 90 . FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. The processing shown in FIG. 90 is executed by controlling the operation of each part by the control unit 60 .
作为步骤S340,控制部60进行搭载头15的XY吸附移动,并且开始使部件供给装置100对电子部件进行夹持。即,作为步骤S340,控制部60使搭载头15沿XY方向移动,使吸嘴32向保持区域移动。另外,控制部60向部件供给装置100的保持区域中配置电子部件,然后,将引线切断,成为夹持状态。As step S340 , the control unit 60 performs the XY suction movement of the mounting head 15 and starts clamping the electronic component by the component supply device 100 . That is, as step S340, the control part 60 moves the mounting head 15 to XY direction, and moves the suction nozzle 32 to a holding|maintenance area. In addition, the control unit 60 arranges the electronic component in the holding area of the component supply device 100 , and then cuts the lead wires to bring it into a clamped state.
控制部60进行步骤S340的处理,作为步骤S342,在搭载头15的保持位置移动结束的情况下,即,在使搭载头15的吸嘴32向保持区域移动后,作为步骤S344,对夹持等待时间和经过时间进行比较,作为步骤S346,对是否经过了等待时间,即经过时间是否大于或等于夹持等待时间进行判定。The control unit 60 performs the processing of step S340, and as step S342, when the movement of the holding position of the mounting head 15 is completed, that is, after moving the suction nozzle 32 of the mounting head 15 to the holding area, as step S344, the holding position is moved to the holding position. The waiting time is compared with the elapsed time, and as step S346, it is determined whether the waiting time has elapsed, that is, whether the elapsed time is greater than or equal to the clamping waiting time.
控制部60在步骤S346中判定为没有经过等待时间(否)、即经过时间小于夹持等待时间的情况下,进入步骤S344。控制部60反复进行步骤S344、S346的处理,直至经过等待时间为止。In step S346 , the control unit 60 proceeds to step S344 when it is determined that the waiting time has not elapsed (No), that is, the elapsed time is less than the clamping waiting time. The control unit 60 repeats the processing of steps S344 and S346 until the waiting time elapses.
控制部60在步骤S346中判定为经过了等待时间(是)的情况下,作为步骤S348,进行Z轴吸附下降。即,控制部60使吸嘴向Z轴方向下侧移动至可以对位于保持区域中的电子部件进行吸附的位置。控制部60在步骤S348中进行Z轴吸附下降后,在步骤S350中进行部件吸附,即,利用吸嘴对电子部件进行吸附,作为步骤S352,将夹持解除等待时间和现有的Z轴下降时等待时间进行比较。在这里,所谓夹持解除等待时间,是指将正由部件供给装置100夹持的电子部件的夹持状态解除所需的处理时间。现有的Z轴下降时等待时间是搭载头的吸嘴在吸附电子部件的位置处待机的时间。此外,现有的Z轴下降时等待时间是预先设定的值,是电子部件的吸附处理所需的时间。When it is determined in step S346 that the waiting time has elapsed (Yes), the control unit 60 performs a Z-axis suction drop as step S348 . That is, the control unit 60 moves the suction nozzle to the lower side in the Z-axis direction to a position where the electronic component located in the holding area can be suctioned. After the control unit 60 performs the Z-axis suction drop in step S348, it performs component suction in step S350, that is, uses the suction nozzle to suction the electronic component, and as step S352, the clamp release waiting time and the existing Z-axis drop Waiting time for comparison. Here, the “clamp release waiting time” refers to the processing time required to release the clamped state of the electronic component being clamped by the component supply apparatus 100 . The conventional Z-axis descending waiting time is the waiting time for the suction nozzle of the mounting head at the position where the electronic component is picked up. In addition, the waiting time when the conventional Z-axis descends is a preset value, and is the time required for the adsorption process of the electronic component.
控制部60在步骤S352中进行比较后,作为步骤S354,对是否夹持解除等待时间较大、即是否为现有的Z轴下降时等待时间<夹持解除等待时间进行判定。控制部60在步骤S354中判定为夹持解除等待时间较大(是)、即现有的Z轴下降时等待时间<夹持解除等待时间的情况下,作为步骤S356,以夹持解除等待时间进行待机,进入步骤S360。另外,控制部60在步骤S354中判定为夹持解除等待时间不大(否)、即现有的Z轴下降时等待时间≧夹持解除等待时间的情况下,作为步骤S358,以现有的Z轴下降时等待时间进行待机,进入步骤S360。After the comparison in step S352, the control unit 60 determines in step S354 whether the unclamp waiting time is relatively large, that is, whether the conventional Z-axis descending waiting time<clamp unclamping waiting time. In step S354, the control unit 60 judges that the clamp release waiting time is relatively large (Yes), that is, when the existing Z-axis descending waiting time < clamp release waiting time, as step S356, the clamp release waiting time Stand by and go to step S360. In addition, when the control unit 60 determines in step S354 that the waiting time for clamp release is not large (No), that is, when the conventional Z-axis descending waiting time≧clamp release waiting time, as step S358, the conventional When the Z-axis descends, it waits for the time to wait, and proceeds to step S360.
控制部60在进行步骤S356、S358的处理后,作为步骤S360,进行搭载头的Z轴吸附上升和部件供给装置的供给动作,结束本处理。After the control unit 60 performs the processes of steps S356 and S358, as step S360, the Z-axis suction lift of the mounting head and the supply operation of the component supply device are performed, and this process ends.
电子部件安装装置10通过执行图89及图90所示的处理动作,从而可以向基板上搭载电子部件。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can mount electronic components on the substrate by executing the processing operations shown in FIGS. 89 and 90 .
下面,使用图91至图92B,说明由吸嘴对位于电子部件供给装置100的保持位置的电子部件进行保持的情况下的处理的一个例子。图91是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。图92A是用于说明电子部件安装装置的动作的说明图。图92B是用于说明电子部件安装装置的动作的说明图。图91所示的处理可以通过由电子部件安装装置10的控制装置20对各部分进行控制而执行。Next, an example of the processing in the case of holding the electronic component at the holding position of the electronic component supply apparatus 100 by the suction nozzle will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 92B . FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. FIG. 92A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the electronic component mounting device. FIG. 92B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the electronic component mounting device. The processing shown in FIG. 91 can be executed by controlling each part by the control device 20 of the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 .
在电子部件安装装置10中,作为步骤S402,由吸嘴执行电子部件的保持动作。即,电子部件安装装置10执行由吸嘴保持(吸附、抓持)位于电子部件供给装置的保持区域的电子部件的动作。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S402中执行保持动作后,作为步骤S404,对电子部件的保持状态进行检测。具体地说,利用激光识别装置38或VCS单元17,对吸嘴是否保持电子部件进行检测。In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, as step S402, the electronic component is held by the suction nozzle. That is, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 performs an operation of holding (suctioning, gripping) an electronic component located in the holding area of the electronic component supply apparatus by the suction nozzle. After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 executes the holding operation in step S402, as step S404, the holding state of the electronic component is detected. Specifically, whether or not the suction nozzle holds an electronic component is detected by the laser recognition device 38 or the VCS unit 17 .
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S404中对保持状态进行检测后,作为步骤S406,对吸嘴是否保持电子部件进行判定。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S406中判定为保持电子部件(是)的情况下,结束本处理。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S406中判定为没有保持电子部件(否)的情况下,作为步骤S408,对电子部件供给装置的保持位置的状态进行检测。例如,电子部件安装装置10由高度传感器37对保持位置的高度进行检测,对在保持位置上是否存在电子部件进行检测。此外,也可以由拍摄装置36进行拍摄而对有无电子部件进行检测。After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 detects the holding state in step S404, as step S406, it is determined whether the suction nozzle holds the electronic component. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S406 that the electronic component is held (Yes), this process ends. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S406 that the electronic component is not held (No), as step S408 , the state of the holding position of the electronic component supply apparatus is detected. For example, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 detects the height of the holding position by the height sensor 37 and detects whether or not an electronic component is present at the holding position. In addition, the presence or absence of electronic components may be detected by imaging with the imaging device 36 .
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S408中对保持位置的状态进行检测后,在步骤S410中对在保持位置上是否存在电子部件进行判定。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S410中判定为存在电子部件(是)的情况下,进入步骤S416,在判定为没有电子部件(否)的情况下,进入步骤S412。在这里,电子部件安装装置10基于利用高度传感器37得到的保持位置的高度,对有无电子部件进行检测。例如,如图92A所示,在保持区域上存在电子部件80的情况下,保持区域的高度变高,如图92B所示,在保持区域上没有电子部件80的情况下,保持区域的高度变低(成为保持带的位置)。由此,电子部件安装装置10在保持区域的高度比阈值高的情况下,判定为存在电子部件,在比阈值低的情况下,判定为无电子部件。After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 detects the state of the holding position in step S408, it determines in step S410 whether or not there is an electronic component in the holding position. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 proceeds to step S416 when determining that there is an electronic component in step S410 (Yes), and proceeds to step S412 when determining that there is no electronic component (No). Here, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 detects the presence or absence of electronic components based on the height of the holding position obtained by the height sensor 37 . For example, as shown in FIG. 92A, when there is an electronic component 80 on the holding area, the height of the holding area becomes higher, and as shown in FIG. 92B, when there is no electronic component 80 on the holding area, the height of the holding area becomes higher. Low (becomes the holding strap position). Accordingly, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines that the electronic component exists when the height of the holding area is higher than the threshold, and determines that there is no electronic component when the height is lower than the threshold.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S410中判定为否的情况下,作为步骤S412,对进给动作次数是否大于或等于阈值次数进行判定。在这里,所谓进给动作,是指电子部件供给装置100与电子部件的配置间隔相对应而对保持带进行输送的动作。步骤S412的进给动作次数是在无法吸附电子部件的状态下进行进给动作的次数。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S412中判定为进给动作次数大于或等于阈值次数(是)的情况下,进入步骤S416,在判定为进给动作次数不大于或等于阈值次数(否)的情况下,进入步骤S414。When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines No in step S410 , as step S412 , it is determined whether the number of feeding operations is greater than or equal to the threshold number of times. Here, the feeding operation refers to an operation in which the electronic component supply apparatus 100 conveys the holding tape corresponding to the arrangement interval of the electronic components. The number of feed operations in step S412 is the number of feed operations performed in a state where electronic components cannot be sucked. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S412 that the number of feeding operations is greater than or equal to the threshold number of times (Yes), it proceeds to step S416, and when it determines that the number of feeding operations is not greater than or equal to the threshold number of times (No). , go to step S414.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S412中判定为否的情况下,作为步骤S414,执行保持带进给动作,进入步骤S402。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S410或者步骤S412中判定为是的情况下,作为步骤S416执行错误处理,结束本处理。在这里,电子部件安装装置10在步骤S410中判定为是的情况下,作为错误处理,通知在保持位置剩余电子部件这一情况。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S412中判定为是的情况下,作为错误处理,通知即使在电子部件供给装置100中进行了一定次数的进给动作也无法确认部件这一情况。When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines No in step S412, it executes a holding tape feeding operation as step S414, and proceeds to step S402. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 judges as YES in step S410 or step S412, it executes error processing as step S416, and ends this process. Here, when the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines Yes in step S410, it notifies that an electronic component remains at the holding position as an error process. When the determination in step S412 is YES, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 notifies that the component cannot be confirmed even if the electronic component supply apparatus 100 performs a certain number of feeding operations as an error process.
如上述所示,电子部件安装装置10在保持位置上没有剩余电子部件的情况下,通过对保持带进行输送,再次执行电子部件的保持动作,从而即使在保持带上存在没有配置电子部件的部分,也不必使装置停止,可以继续进行电子部件的安装。另外,电子部件安装装置10即使在电子部件供给装置100中切断引线后的电子部件没有被吸嘴保持而从保持位置移动的情况下,在保持位置上没有剩余电子部件时,通过继续进行安装动作,可以更高效地安装电子部件。As described above, when there is no electronic component remaining at the holding position, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 carries out the holding operation of the electronic component again by conveying the holding tape. , and the installation of electronic components can be continued without stopping the device. In addition, even if the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 moves from the holding position without being held by the suction nozzle in the electronic component supply apparatus 100 after cutting the lead wire, if there is no remaining electronic component at the holding position, the mounting operation is continued. , allowing for more efficient mounting of electronic components.
图93是表示吸嘴的一个例子的说明图。图94是用于说明图93的吸嘴的保持动作的说明图。图93及图94是表示抓持吸嘴(夹持吸嘴)的一个例子的图。图93及图94所示的吸嘴690具有固定臂692和可动臂694。在吸嘴690中,可动臂694的支点695以可转动的状态固定在吸嘴690的主体上,可动臂694可以以支点695为轴,使与固定臂692相对的部分从接近固定臂692的方向向远离的方向移动。在可动臂694中,在隔着支点695的、相对于吸嘴690的主体部分而与固定臂692接近或远离的部分的相反侧,连结驱动部696。驱动部696利用驱动吸嘴的驱动源(空气压力)而移动。可动臂694通过驱动部696的移动,从而使与固定臂692相对的部分从接近固定臂692的方向向远离的方向移动。Fig. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a suction nozzle. Fig. 94 is an explanatory view for explaining the holding operation of the suction nozzle of Fig. 93 . 93 and 94 are diagrams showing an example of a gripping nozzle (clamping nozzle). The suction nozzle 690 shown in FIGS. 93 and 94 has a fixed arm 692 and a movable arm 694 . In the suction nozzle 690, the fulcrum 695 of the movable arm 694 is fixed on the main body of the suction nozzle 690 in a rotatable state, and the movable arm 694 can use the fulcrum 695 as the axis to make the part opposite to the fixed arm 692 approach the fixed arm The direction of 692 moves away. In the movable arm 694 , the drive unit 696 is connected to the opposite side of the portion approaching or separating from the fixed arm 692 with respect to the body portion of the suction nozzle 690 across the fulcrum 695 . The drive unit 696 is moved by a drive source (air pressure) that drives the suction nozzle. The movable arm 694 moves the part opposing the fixed arm 692 from the direction approaching the fixed arm 692 to the direction away from the fixed arm 692 by the movement of the driving part 696 .
吸嘴690在固定臂692和可动臂694之间存在电子部件80的状态下,通过使固定臂692和可动臂694之间的距离缩短,从而可以如图94所示抓持电子部件80。The suction nozzle 690 can hold the electronic component 80 as shown in FIG. .
抓持吸嘴并不限定于吸嘴690,可以是各种形状。图95A至图95D分别是表示吸嘴的一个例子的说明图。图95A所示的吸嘴690a、图95B所示的吸嘴690b,图95C所示的吸嘴690c以及图95D所示的吸嘴690d,分别是固定臂和可动臂之间的间隔及可动范围不同的吸嘴。因此,对于吸嘴690a至吸嘴690d,可抓持的电子部件的形状不同。The grip nozzle is not limited to the nozzle 690, and may have various shapes. 95A to 95D are explanatory views each showing an example of a suction nozzle. The suction nozzle 690a shown in FIG. 95A, the suction nozzle 690b shown in FIG. 95B, the suction nozzle 690c shown in FIG. 95C and the suction nozzle 690d shown in FIG. Nozzles with different ranges of movement. Therefore, the shapes of electronic components that can be grasped differ from the suction nozzle 690a to the suction nozzle 690d.
电子部件安装装置10通过与要保持的电子部件的种类相应地选择保持该电子部件的吸嘴的种类,从而可以适当地保持电子部件。具体地说,通过与要保持的电子部件对应地选择是使用吸附吸嘴还是使用抓持吸嘴,且在各个种类的吸嘴中对使用哪个吸嘴进行切换,从而可以利用1台电子部件安装装置安装更多种类的电子部件。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can appropriately hold the electronic component by selecting the type of the suction nozzle holding the electronic component according to the type of the electronic component to be held. Specifically, by selecting whether to use a suction nozzle or a grip nozzle according to the electronic components to be held, and switching which nozzle to use among each type of nozzle, it is possible to mount electronic components with one unit. The device mounts a wider variety of electronic components.
下面,使用图96,对电子部件安装装置安装电子部件的期间的处理的一个例子进行说明。图96是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。在电子部件安装装置10中,作为步骤S450,对由搭载头的各吸嘴保持的电子部件进行确定。即,对下一个由吸嘴保持的电子部件的种类进行确定。Next, an example of processing during mounting of electronic components by the electronic component mounting apparatus will be described using FIG. 96 . FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, the electronic component held by each suction nozzle of a mounting head is specified as step S450. That is, the type of the electronic component to be held by the suction nozzle next is specified.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S450中确定电子部件后,作为步骤S452,对是否存在吸嘴的更换进行判定。电子部件安装装置10如果在步骤S452中判定为没有吸嘴更换(否),则进入步骤S456。电子部件安装装置10如果在步骤S452中判定为存在吸嘴的更换(是),则作为步骤S454,执行吸嘴的更换。具体地说,电子部件安装装置10使搭载头15向更换吸嘴保持机构18移动,使搭载头所保持的吸嘴向更换吸嘴保持机构18移动,将保持在更换吸嘴保持机构18上并在下一次要使用的吸嘴向搭载头上安装。电子部件安装装置10利用更换吸嘴保持机构18将安装在搭载头上的吸嘴,从吸附吸嘴更换为抓持吸嘴、或改变吸附吸嘴的种类、或改变抓持吸嘴的种类。电子部件安装装置10在进行步骤S454的处理后,或者在步骤S452中判定为否的情况下,作为步骤S456,执行电子部件的保持动作,即,使用安装在搭载头15上的吸嘴,执行在步骤S450中确定的电子部件的保持动作,结束本处理。After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 specifies the electronic component in step S450, it determines whether the suction nozzle has been replaced as step S452. If it is determined in step S452 that the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 has not replaced the nozzle (No), it will proceed to step S456. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S452 that there is replacement of the suction nozzle (Yes), it executes the replacement of the suction nozzle in step S454 . Specifically, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 moves the mounting head 15 to the replacement nozzle holding mechanism 18, moves the nozzle held by the mounting head to the replacement nozzle holding mechanism 18, and holds the nozzle on the replacement nozzle holding mechanism 18. Install the nozzle to be used next time on the loading head. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 uses the replacement nozzle holding mechanism 18 to replace the nozzles mounted on the mounting head from suction nozzles to gripping nozzles, or to change the type of suction nozzles, or to change the type of gripping nozzles. After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 performs the process of step S454, or in the case of determining No in step S452, as step S456, the holding operation of the electronic component is performed, that is, using the suction nozzle mounted on the mounting head 15, performing The holding operation of the electronic component determined in step S450 ends this process.
电子部件安装装置10如图96所示,通过与电子部件的种类相应地而对搭载头所安装的吸嘴进行更换,从而可以利用更适当的吸嘴对电子部件进行保持。另外,由于可以对吸嘴进行更换,所以可以利用1个电子部件安装装置10对引线型电子部件、搭载型电子部件这两者适当地进行保持。另外,可以对更多种类的电子部件进行保持。电子部件安装装置10由于均是对引线型电子部件、搭载型电子部件这两者的主体部分、即没有引线的部分进行保持,所以可以使用通用的吸嘴对两种电子部件进行保持。由此,即使不设置对引线进行保持的专用吸嘴,也可以对引线型电子部件进行保持。此外,由于可以得到上述效果,所以优选对引线型电子部件的主体进行保持,但也可以设置对引线进行保持的吸嘴。As shown in FIG. 96 , the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can hold the electronic component with a more appropriate suction nozzle by changing the suction nozzle mounted on the mounting head according to the type of electronic component. In addition, since the suction nozzle can be replaced, both the lead-type electronic component and the mount-type electronic component can be appropriately held by one electronic component mounting apparatus 10 . In addition, more kinds of electronic components can be held. Since the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 holds the main parts of both the lead type electronic component and the mount type electronic component, that is, the portion without leads, a common suction nozzle can be used to hold both types of electronic components. Thereby, it is possible to hold the lead type electronic component without providing a dedicated suction nozzle for holding the lead wire. In addition, since the above-mentioned effects can be obtained, it is preferable to hold the main body of the lead type electronic component, but a suction nozzle for holding the lead wires may also be provided.
下面,使用图97及图98,对从执行准备处理(生产程序的设定、各部分的准备、部件供给装置的调整等)直至开始生产为止的处理的一个例子进行说明。图97是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。图98是用于说明电子部件安装装置的动作的说明图。此外,图97的处理可以作为从生产暂时中止至再次开始为止的处理而执行。Next, an example of processing from execution of preparatory processing (setting of production program, preparation of each part, adjustment of parts supply device, etc.) to start of production will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 . FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the electronic component mounting apparatus. In addition, the process of FIG. 97 may be performed as the process from suspension of production until it resumes.
在电子部件安装装置10中,作为步骤S460,执行准备处理,作为步骤S462,利用电子部件供给装置100的切断单元将电子部件的引线切断,夹持电子部件。此外,步骤S462的处理作为步骤S460的准备处理的部分处理而执行。另外,电子部件安装装置10在将电子部件夹持后,不利用搭载头进行保持。In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , as step S460 , a preparatory process is executed, and as step S462 , the lead wires of the electronic component are cut by the cutting unit of the electronic component supply apparatus 100 to sandwich the electronic component. In addition, the process of step S462 is executed as part of the preparatory process of step S460. In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 does not hold the electronic component by the mounting head after sandwiching it.
电子部件安装装置10在执行步骤S462的处理后,作为步骤S464,输出信息。具体地说,将图98所示的画面698作为消息显示。在画面698中,显示“维持夹持状态?”这一消息以及“是”按钮699a、“否”按钮699b。After executing the process of step S462, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 outputs information as step S464. Specifically, a screen 698 shown in FIG. 98 is displayed as a message. On the screen 698, a message "Maintain clamped state?", a "Yes" button 699a, and a "No" button 699b are displayed.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S464中显示消息,对按钮699a、699b中的某一个进行选择并确定后,作为步骤S466,对是否维持夹持状态进行判定。电子部件安装装置10如果在步骤S466中判定为不维持夹持状态(否),即选择了按钮699b,则作为步骤S467,解除夹持状态,释放电子部件,结束本处理。在此情况下,操作人员从保持区域对电子部件进行回收。此外,在本实施方式中,对是否维持夹持状态进行询问,但也可以相反地对是否解除夹持状态进行询问。在此情况下,“是”及“否”的对应功能相反。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 displays a message in step S464, selects and confirms any one of the buttons 699a and 699b, and then determines whether or not to maintain the clamping state as step S466. If the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S466 that the clamped state is not maintained (No), that is, the button 699 b is selected, the clamped state is released in step S467 , the electronic component is released, and this process ends. In this case, the operator recovers the electronic components from the holding area. In addition, in this embodiment, an inquiry is made as to whether or not to maintain the clamped state, but it is also possible to inquire as to whether or not to release the clamped state. In this case, the corresponding functions of "yes" and "no" are reversed.
电子部件安装装置10如果在步骤S466中判定为维持夹持状态(是),即选择了按钮699a,则作为步骤S468,维持夹持状态,作为步骤S469,在生产开始后,使用夹持的电子部件,结束本处理。If the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S466 that the clamping state is maintained (Yes), that is, the button 699a is selected, then as step S468, the clamping state is maintained, and as step S469, after the start of production, the clamped electronic component is used. part, end this process.
电子部件安装装置10如图97所示,在为了对电子部件的切断位置进行调整等目的而进行准备处理时,通过将切断了引线的电子部件在生产开始后,作为该电子部件供给装置的第1个电子部件使用,可以减轻操作人员的负担。具体地说,可以节省回收电子部件的时间,另外,可以减少用手将回收后的电子部件向基板插入的时间。As shown in FIG. 97, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, when performing preparatory processing for the purpose of adjusting the cutting position of the electronic component, etc., uses the electronic component whose leads have been cut as the first batch of the electronic component supply apparatus after the start of production. The use of one electronic part can reduce the burden on the operator. Specifically, time for collecting electronic components can be saved, and time for manually inserting collected electronic components into a board can be reduced.
下面,使用图99,对电子部件安装装置10在电子部件安装时执行的处理的一个例子进行说明。图99是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。Next, an example of processing executed by the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 at the time of electronic component mounting will be described using FIG. 99 . FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device.
电子部件安装装置10作为步骤S470,对安装电子部件的位置进行确定,作为步骤S472,对安装位置的高度进行检测。此外,对于安装位置的基板的高度,可以由高度传感器37进行检测。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S472中对高度进行检测后,作为步骤S474,对高度是否小于或等于阈值(基准值)(搭载头和测定位置之间的距离是否比阈值(基准值)长)进行判定。即,电子部件安装装置10对在基板的安装电子部件的位置上是否什么也没搭载进行判定。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 specifies the position where the electronic component is mounted as step S470, and detects the height of the mounting position as step S472. In addition, the height of the substrate at the mounting position can be detected by the height sensor 37 . After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 detects the height in step S472, as step S474, it checks whether the height is less than or equal to the threshold value (reference value) (whether the distance between the mounting head and the measurement position is longer than the threshold value (reference value)). determination. That is, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines whether or not there is nothing mounted on the position on the substrate where the electronic component is mounted.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S474中判定为高度没有小于或等于阈值(否)、即高度比阈值高的情况下,判定为在安装位置上搭载了某些部件,作为步骤S476进行错误处理,结束本处理。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S474中判定为高度小于或等于阈值(是)的情况下,判定为在安装位置上没有搭载任何部件,作为步骤S478,执行电子部件的安装处理,结束本处理。When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S474 that the height is not less than or equal to the threshold value (No), that is, when the height is higher than the threshold value, it determines that some components are mounted on the mounting position, performs error processing as step S476, and ends. This processing. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S474 that the height is smaller than or equal to the threshold value (Yes), it determines that no component is mounted on the mounting position, executes electronic component mounting processing in step S478 , and ends the processing.
电子部件安装装置10如图99所示,对搭载电子部件的位置的基板高度进行检测,在基板高度较高的情况下,通过执行错误处理,从而可以抑制在基板的搭载位置上存在其他部件等障碍物的情况下,执行对电子部件进行安装的动作的情况。由此,可以在抑制使基板或电子部件损伤的同时,安装电子部件。此外,在图99中,为了可以使处理变得简单,而利用高度传感器37对基板的高度进行检测,但也可以利用拍摄装置36对基板上的安装位置的状态进行检测。As shown in FIG. 99, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 detects the height of the substrate at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and when the height of the substrate is high, by performing error processing, it is possible to suppress the presence of other components, etc., at the mounting position of the substrate. In the case of an obstacle, when performing an action to mount an electronic component. Thereby, electronic components can be mounted while suppressing damage to a board|substrate or an electronic component. In addition, in FIG. 99 , the height sensor 37 is used to detect the height of the board in order to simplify the process, but the imaging device 36 may be used to detect the state of the mounting position on the board.
下面,使用图100至图109,说明在电子部件安装装置的处理动作中,将电子部件向基板的搭载位置(安装位置)安装的动作,具体地说,使吸嘴沿Z轴方向移动时的动作。图100是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。图101是表示引线型电子部件的一个例子的说明图。此外,优选图100所示的处理基于生产程序、示教结果而在准备动作(最优化处理)时执行。在此情况下,电子部件安装装置10在生产时、即实际执行将电子部件向基板安装的处理时,只要基于利用准备动作计算出的结果,对动作进行控制即可。此外,电子部件安装装置10也可以在生产时、即实际执行将电子部件向基板安装的处理时,进行图100所示的处理。另外,电子部件安装装置10对每个向基板安装的电子部件执行图100所示的处理。Next, using FIGS. 100 to 109, in the processing operation of the electronic component mounting apparatus, the operation of mounting electronic components to the mounting position (mounting position) of the substrate, specifically, the operation of moving the suction nozzle in the Z-axis direction will be described. action. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a lead type electronic component. In addition, it is preferable that the processing shown in FIG. 100 is executed during the preparatory operation (optimization processing) based on the production program and the teaching result. In this case, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 only needs to control the operation based on the result calculated by the preparatory operation at the time of production, that is, when the process of actually mounting the electronic component on the board is performed. In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 may perform the process shown in FIG. 100 at the time of production, that is, when actually performing the process of mounting the electronic component on the board. In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 executes the process shown in FIG. 100 for each electronic component mounted on the board.
作为步骤S502,电子部件安装装置10对是否为引线型电子部件进行判定。即,电子部件安装装置10对向基板搭载的电子部件(处理对象的电子部件)是否为将引线向基板的插入孔中插入的电子部件进行判定。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S502中判定为不是引线型电子部件(否)的情况下,作为步骤S504,以第1速度基准对Z轴方向的移动模式进行计算,结束本处理。此外,对于步骤S504的处理,在后面记述。As step S502, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines whether it is a lead type electronic component. That is, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines whether or not the electronic component mounted on the substrate (electronic component to be processed) is an electronic component in which leads are inserted into the insertion holes of the substrate. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S502 that it is not a lead type electronic component (No), as step S504 , the movement pattern in the Z-axis direction is calculated using the first speed reference, and this process ends. In addition, the processing of step S504 will be described later.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S502中,判定为是引线型部件(是)的情况下,作为步骤S506,判定是否对引线进行了成型。在这里,所谓对引线进行了成型,是指引线不是直线形状而是形成有弯曲部、曲折部的状态。例如,在如图101所示的电子部件700所示,在与主体702连结的引线704上形成有弯曲部的情况下,成为对引线704进行了成型的电子部件。作为对引线进行了成型的电子部件,使连接器等励磁。此外,电子部件通过对引线进行成型,即,设置弯曲部或曲折部,从而可以在向插入孔中插入后不易被拔出。即,成型后的部分起到防止脱离的作用。When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S502 that it is a lead-type component (Yes), it determines in step S506 whether or not the lead is molded. Here, the term "formed leads" refers to a state where the lead wires are not in a straight shape but have bent portions and meandering portions formed therein. For example, in the electronic component 700 shown in FIG. 101 , when a bent portion is formed on the lead wire 704 connected to the main body 702 , the lead wire 704 is molded. Connectors and the like are excited as electronic components with lead wires molded. In addition, the lead wire of the electronic component is molded, that is, provided with a bent portion or a meander portion, so that it is difficult to be pulled out after being inserted into the insertion hole. That is, the molded portion functions to prevent detachment.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S506中判定为引线没有进行成型(否)的情况下,作为步骤S508,以第2速度基准对Z轴方向的移动模式进行计算,结束本处理。此外,对于步骤S508的处理,在后面记述。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S506中判定为引线已经进行成型(是)的情况下,作为步骤S510,以第3速度基准对Z轴方向的移动模式进行计算,结束本处理。此外,对于步骤S510的处理,在后面记述。When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S506 that the leads are not molded (No), as step S508 , the movement pattern in the Z-axis direction is calculated using the second speed reference, and this process ends. In addition, the processing of step S508 will be described later. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S506 that the leads have already been molded (Yes), as step S510 , the movement pattern in the Z-axis direction is calculated using the third speed reference, and the process ends. In addition, the processing of step S510 will be described later.
下面,使用图102及图103,对步骤S504的处理即基于第1速度基准计算Z轴方向的移动模式的方法进行说明。图102是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。图103是表示吸嘴的移动速度和时间之间的关系的说明图。在这里,步骤S504在判定为电子部件不是引线型电子部件、即是不将引线向插入孔中插入的搭载型电子部件的情况下执行。即,在处理对象的电子部件为搭载型电子部件的情况下执行。Next, the process of step S504, that is, the method of calculating the movement pattern in the Z-axis direction based on the first speed reference, will be described using FIG. 102 and FIG. 103 . Fig. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. Fig. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the moving speed of the suction nozzle and time. Here, step S504 is performed when it is determined that the electronic component is not a lead-type electronic component, that is, a mount-type electronic component in which a lead wire is not inserted into the insertion hole. That is, it is executed when the electronic component to be processed is an on-board electronic component.
电子部件安装装置10作为步骤S520,取得部件高度。具体地说,取得电子部件的高度的信息。所谓电子部件的高度是电子部件的Z轴方向的高度。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S520中对部件高度进行检测后,作为步骤S522,对安装位置和吸嘴之间的Z轴方向的距离进行计算。具体地说,计算在搭载头移动至安装位置并使吸嘴沿Z轴方向移动时的安装位置、与吸嘴之间的距离。此外,步骤S520和步骤S522的处理顺序可以相反。另外,步骤S520、步骤S522的信息可以基于预先输入的条件而取得,也可以通过测量取得。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 acquires the component height as step S520. Specifically, information on the height of the electronic component is acquired. The height of the electronic component refers to the height of the electronic component in the Z-axis direction. After detecting the component height in step S520, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 calculates the distance in the Z-axis direction between the mounting position and the suction nozzle as step S522. Specifically, the distance between the mounting position and the suction nozzle when the mounting head moves to the mounting position and the suction nozzle is moved in the Z-axis direction is calculated. In addition, the processing order of step S520 and step S522 may be reversed. In addition, the information in step S520 and step S522 may be obtained based on pre-input conditions, or may be obtained through measurement.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S522中对安装位置和吸嘴之间的距离进行计算后,作为步骤S524,对从速度V1向速度V2减速的条件进行确定,作为步骤S526,对从速度V2减速的条件进行确定,结束本处理。在这里,速度V1、V2是Z轴方向的移动速度。所谓从速度V1向速度V2减速的条件,是指在向Z轴方向移动时使吸嘴的移动速度从速度V1向速度V2减速的条件。在电子部件安装装置10中,所谓从速度V2减速的条件,是指在向Z轴方向移动时使吸嘴的移动速度从速度V2进一步减速的条件。After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 calculates the distance between the mounting position and the suction nozzle in step S522, as step S524, the condition for decelerating from the speed V1 to the speed V2 is determined, and as step S526, the condition for decelerating from the speed V2 is determined. Conditions are determined, and this process ends. Here, the speeds V1 and V2 are moving speeds in the Z-axis direction. The condition for decelerating from the speed V1 to the speed V2 refers to a condition for decelerating the moving speed of the suction nozzle from the speed V1 to the speed V2 when moving in the Z-axis direction. In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , the condition for decelerating from the speed V2 refers to a condition for further decelerating the moving speed of the suction nozzle from the speed V2 when moving in the Z-axis direction.
电子部件安装装置10通过在步骤S524和步骤S526中,对使吸嘴的移动速度变更(减速)的条件进行确定,从而对图103所示的吸嘴的移动模式进行确定。在图103中,示出了吸嘴的移动速度和时间之间的关系、即各时间的吸嘴移动速度。图103所示的基于第1速度基准的移动模式为,如果吸嘴开始向安装位置移动(吸嘴下降),则加速至速度V1,然后,直至时间t1为止以速度V1移动。然后,吸嘴在时间t1开始减速,在时间t2减速至速度V2。在这里,时间t2是使电子部件的下端和基板之间的距离成为所设定的距离的时间。具体地说,是电子部件的下端和基板接近至一定距离的时间。然后,吸嘴直至时间t3为止以固定速度移动,在时间t3开始减速,然后停止。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 specifies the movement pattern of the suction nozzle shown in FIG. 103 by specifying the conditions for changing (decelerating) the movement speed of the suction nozzle in steps S524 and S526 . In FIG. 103 , the relationship between the moving speed of the nozzle and time, that is, the moving speed of the nozzle at each time is shown. The movement pattern based on the first speed reference shown in FIG. 103 is that when the nozzle starts to move to the mounting position (the nozzle descends), it accelerates to the speed V1, and then moves at the speed V1 until time t1. Then, the suction nozzle starts decelerating at time t1 and decelerates to speed V2 at time t2. Here, time t2 is the time for making the distance between the lower end of the electronic component and the substrate a set distance. Specifically, it is the time when the lower end of the electronic component and the substrate approach to a certain distance. Then, the suction nozzle moves at a constant speed until time t3, starts to decelerate at time t3, and then stops.
电子部件安装装置10通过以图103的移动模式使电子部件移动,从而可以在时间t1内,以速度(第1速度)V1使电子部件移动,直至电子部件在一定距离内接近基板为止(即,在比一定距离远的范围内)。然后,以作为比速度V1慢的速度的速度(第2速度)V2使电子部件移动,直至电子部件向基板安装(搭载)为止,即,可以从电子部件在一定距离内接近基板直至搭载结束为止(即,在一定距离内的范围内)。由此,可以在不对基板造成影响的范围内使电子部件快速移动,在可能对基板产生影响的范围内使电子部件缓慢移动。由此,可以在维持向基板上搭载的精度的同时,缩短搭载所花费的时间。此外,电子部件安装装置10通过以在电子部件和基板接触后还按照固定速度移动后停止的方式,确定时间t3,从而可以将电子部件向基板按压,可以在规定的按压下使基板上的焊料和电子部件接触。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can move the electronic component at a speed (first speed) V1 within a time t1 by moving the electronic component in the movement pattern shown in FIG. 103 until the electronic component approaches the substrate within a certain distance (that is, at a range farther than a certain distance). Then, the electronic component is moved at a speed (second speed) V2 that is slower than the speed V1 until the electronic component is mounted (mounted) on the substrate, that is, until the electronic component can approach the substrate within a certain distance until the mounting is completed. (i.e., within a range of a certain distance). Thereby, the electronic component can be moved quickly within a range not affecting the substrate, and the electronic component can be moved slowly within a range capable of affecting the substrate. Accordingly, the time required for mounting can be shortened while maintaining the accuracy of mounting on the substrate. In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can press the electronic component to the substrate by determining the time t3 so that the electronic component moves at a constant speed and then stops after contacting the substrate, and the solder on the substrate can be pressed under a predetermined pressure. contact with electronic components.
下面,使用图104至图107,对步骤S508的处理即基于第2速度基准计算Z轴方向的移动模式的方法进行说明。图104是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。图105是表示吸嘴的移动速度和时间之间的关系的说明图。图106及图107分别是用于说明电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的说明图。在这里,步骤S508在判定为处于下述情况下执行:电子部件为引线型电子部件,引线没有成型,即,为将引线向插入孔中插入的引线型电子部件、且引线为直线形状。即,在处理对象的电子部件为没有成型的引线型电子部件的情况下执行。Next, the method of calculating the movement pattern in the Z-axis direction based on the second velocity reference, which is the process of step S508, will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107 . Fig. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. Fig. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the moving speed of the suction nozzle and time. 106 and 107 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting apparatus, respectively. Here, step S508 is executed when it is determined that the electronic component is a lead type electronic component, the lead is not molded, that is, it is a lead type electronic component in which the lead is inserted into the insertion hole, and the lead is linear. That is, it is executed when the electronic component to be processed is an unmolded lead-type electronic component.
在电子部件安装装置10中,作为步骤S530,取得部件高度。具体地说,取得电子部件高度的信息。引线型电子部件的高度是电子部件的Z轴方向的高度,即,如图106所示,是电子部件的主体82和引线84的高度相加后的部件高度87。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S530中取得部件高度(部件长度)后,作为步骤S532,取得引线长度。在这里,所谓引线长度是引线84的Z轴方向的高度,即,如图106所示,是电子部件的引线84的长度86。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S532中取得引线长度86后,作为步骤S534,对安装位置和吸嘴之间的Z轴方向的距离进行计算。具体地说,计算在搭载头移动至安装位置并使吸嘴沿Z轴方向移动时的安装位置和吸嘴之间的距离。此外,步骤S530、步骤S532和步骤S534的处理顺序可以相反。另外,步骤S530、步骤S532、步骤S534的信息可以基于预先输入的条件而取得,也可以通过测量取得。In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, a component height is acquired as step S530. Specifically, information on the height of the electronic component is acquired. The height of the lead type electronic component is the height of the electronic component in the Z-axis direction, that is, the component height 87 obtained by adding the heights of the main body 82 and the leads 84 of the electronic component as shown in FIG. 106 . After acquiring the component height (component length) in step S530, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 acquires the lead wire length as step S532. Here, the lead wire length is the height of the lead wire 84 in the Z-axis direction, that is, the length 86 of the lead wire 84 of the electronic component as shown in FIG. 106 . After acquiring the lead wire length 86 in step S532, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 calculates the distance in the Z-axis direction between the mounting position and the suction nozzle as step S534. Specifically, the distance between the mounting position and the suction nozzle when the mounting head is moved to the mounting position and the suction nozzle is moved in the Z-axis direction is calculated. In addition, the processing order of step S530, step S532 and step S534 may be reversed. In addition, the information in step S530, step S532, and step S534 may be obtained based on pre-input conditions, or may be obtained through measurement.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S534中对安装位置和吸嘴之间的Z轴方向距离进行计算后,作为步骤S536,对从速度V1向速度V3减速的条件进行确定,作为步骤S538,基于引线长度,对从速度V3减速的条件进行确定,结束本处理。在这里,所谓速度V1、V3是Z轴方向的移动速度。所谓从速度(第1速度)V1向速度(第2速度)V3减速的条件,是在向Z轴方向移动时使吸嘴的移动速度从速度V1向速度V3减速的条件。在电子部件安装装置10中,所谓从速度V3减速的条件,是在向Z轴方向移动时使吸嘴的移动速度从速度V3进一步减速的条件。此外,速度V3是比上述速度V2慢的速度。After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 calculates the distance in the Z-axis direction between the mounting position and the suction nozzle in step S534, as step S536, the condition for decelerating from the speed V1 to the speed V3 is determined, and as step S538, based on the length of the lead wire , the conditions for decelerating from the speed V3 are determined, and this process ends. Here, the speeds V1 and V3 are moving speeds in the Z-axis direction. The condition for decelerating from the speed (first speed) V1 to the speed (second speed) V3 is a condition for decelerating the moving speed of the suction nozzle from the speed V1 to the speed V3 when moving in the Z-axis direction. In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, the condition to decelerate from the velocity V3 is a condition to further decelerate the moving velocity of the suction nozzle from the velocity V3 when moving in the Z-axis direction. In addition, the speed V3 is slower than the speed V2 described above.
在电子部件安装装置10中,通过在步骤S536和步骤S538中,对使吸嘴的移动速度变更(减速)的条件进行确定,从而对图105所示的吸嘴的移动模式进行确定。在图105中,示出了吸嘴的移动速度和时间之间的关系,即各时间的吸嘴的移动速度。图105所示的基于第2速度基准的移动模式为,如果吸嘴开始向安装位置移动(吸嘴的下降),则加速至速度V1,然后,直至时间t4为止以速度V1移动。然后,吸嘴在时间t4开始减速,在时间t5减速至速度V3。在这里,时间t5如图106所示,是使电子部件的下端(即,引线84的下端)和基板之间的距离成为所设定的距离的时间。具体地说,是电子部件的下端和基板接近至一定距离的时间。然后,吸嘴直至时间t6为止以固定速度移动,在时间t6开始减速,然后停止。在这里,电子部件安装装置10在以图105所示的移动模式安装电子部件的情况下,在时间t5和时间t6之间,如图107所示将引线84向基板的插入孔中插入。In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , the movement pattern of the suction nozzle shown in FIG. 105 is specified by specifying the conditions for changing (decelerating) the movement speed of the suction nozzle in steps S536 and S538 . In FIG. 105 , the relationship between the moving speed of the suction nozzle and time, that is, the moving speed of the suction nozzle at each time is shown. The movement pattern based on the second speed reference shown in FIG. 105 is to accelerate to the speed V1 when the nozzle starts to move to the mounting position (decline of the nozzle), and then move at the speed V1 until time t4. Then, the suction nozzle starts to decelerate at time t4 and decelerates to speed V3 at time t5. Here, the time t5 is the time for making the distance between the lower end of the electronic component (that is, the lower end of the lead wire 84 ) and the substrate a set distance as shown in FIG. 106 . Specifically, it is the time when the lower end of the electronic component and the substrate approach to a certain distance. Then, the suction nozzle moves at a constant speed until time t6, starts to decelerate at time t6, and then stops. Here, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 inserts the lead wire 84 into the insertion hole of the substrate as shown in FIG. 107 between time t5 and time t6 when mounting the electronic component in the movement pattern shown in FIG. 105 .
电子部件安装装置10通过以图107的移动模式使电子部件移动,从而可以在时间t4内,以速度(第1速度)V1使电子部件移动,直至电子部件以在一定距离内接近基板为止(即,比一定距离远的范围内)。然后,以作为比速度V1慢的速度的速度(第2速度)V3使电子部件移动,直至电子部件向基板安装(搭载)为止,即,可以从电子部件在一定距离内接近基板,直至将引线向插入孔中插入并结束搭载为止(即,在一定距离内的范围内)。由此,可以在不对基板造成影响的范围内使电子部件快速移动,在可能对基板产生影响的范围内使电子部件缓慢移动。由此,可以在维持向基板上搭载的精度的同时,缩短搭载所花费的时间。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can move the electronic component at the speed (first speed) V1 within the time t4 by moving the electronic component in the movement pattern shown in FIG. 107 until the electronic component approaches the substrate within a certain distance (i.e. , within a range farther than a certain distance). Then, the electronic component is moved at a speed (second speed) V3 that is slower than the speed V1 until the electronic component is mounted (mounted) on the substrate, that is, the electronic component can approach the substrate within a certain distance until the lead wire Insert it into the insertion hole and finish loading (that is, within a certain distance). Thereby, the electronic component can be moved quickly within a range not affecting the substrate, and the electronic component can be moved slowly within a range capable of affecting the substrate. Accordingly, the time required for mounting can be shortened while maintaining the accuracy of mounting on the substrate.
电子部件安装装置10通过基于引线长度对从速度V3减速的定时进行检测,即,通过对时间t5至时间t6的间隔进行确定,从而可以稳定地将引线向基板插入。另外,可以至主体82和基板以一定距离接近为止,使电子部件移动。即,电子部件安装装置10通过将引线长度用作判定基准,从而可以对仅基于部件高度无法调整的、将引线向插入孔中插入时的电子部件的移动条件进行调整。具体地说,如果将引线型电子部件的主体82的高度作为部件高度,则存在在引线与基板接触后减速的情况,如果将引线型电子部件的部件高度87作为部件高度,则需要针对各部分部件调整压入量,但在本实施方式中,通过将引线长度作为参数而输入,从而可以与其长度相对应而确定各种条件。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can stably insert the lead into the board by detecting the timing of deceleration from the speed V3 based on the lead length, that is, by determining the interval from time t5 to time t6 . In addition, the electronic component may be moved until the main body 82 and the substrate approach each other at a certain distance. That is, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can adjust the movement condition of the electronic component when the lead wire is inserted into the insertion hole, which cannot be adjusted only based on the component height, by using the lead wire length as a criterion for determination. Specifically, if the height of the main body 82 of the lead-type electronic component is taken as the component height, there is a case where the lead wire is decelerated after contacting the substrate. If the component height 87 of the lead-type electronic component is taken as the component height, it is necessary to The press-fit amount is adjusted for components, but in this embodiment, various conditions can be determined according to the length by inputting the length of the lead wire as a parameter.
另外,电子部件安装装置10在引线型电子部件的情况下,通过对时间t6的定时进行调整,可以对在电子部件和基板接触后将电子部件的主体向基板按压的按压进行调整。由此,对于向焊料上按压端子的搭载型电子部件,可以以不同的条件使主体向基板移动。Also, in the case of lead type electronic components, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can adjust the pressing force for pressing the main body of the electronic component against the substrate after the electronic component contacts the substrate by adjusting the timing of time t6. Thereby, the main body can be moved to the board|substrate under different conditions with respect to the mount-type electronic component which presses the terminal to the solder.
下面,使用图108及图109,对步骤S510的处理即基于第3速度基准计算Z轴方向移动模式的方法进行说明。图108是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。图109是表示吸嘴的移动速度和时间之间的关系的说明图。在这里,步骤S510在判定为下述情况时执行:电子部件为引线型电子部件,引线进行了成型,即,是将引线向插入孔中插入的引线型电子部件,且引线不是直线形状。即,在处理对象的电子部件为进行了成型的引线型电子部件的情况下执行。Next, the process of step S510, that is, the method of calculating the movement pattern in the Z-axis direction based on the third speed reference will be described using FIG. 108 and FIG. 109 . Fig. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. Fig. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the moving speed of the suction nozzle and time. Here, step S510 is executed when it is determined that the electronic component is a lead type electronic component, the lead is molded, that is, the lead is inserted into the insertion hole, and the lead is not linear. That is, it is executed when the electronic component to be processed is a molded lead-type electronic component.
在电子部件安装装置10中,作为步骤S540,取得部件高度。具体地说,取得电子部件高度的信息。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S540中取得部件高度后,作为步骤S541,取得引线长度。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S541中取得引线长度后,作为步骤S542,对安装位置和吸嘴之间的Z轴方向距离进行计算。具体地说,计算在搭载头移动至安装位置并使吸嘴沿Z轴方向移动时的安装位置和吸嘴之间的距离。此外,步骤S540、步骤S541、步骤S542的处理顺序可以相反。另外,步骤S540、步骤S541、步骤S542的信息可以基于预先输入的条件而取得,也可以通过测量取得。In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, a component height is acquired as step S540. Specifically, information on the height of the electronic component is acquired. After obtaining the component height in step S540, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 obtains the lead wire length as step S541. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 calculates the distance in the Z-axis direction between the mounting position and the suction nozzle as step S542 after acquiring the lead wire length in step S541. Specifically, the distance between the mounting position and the suction nozzle when the mounting head is moved to the mounting position and the suction nozzle is moved in the Z-axis direction is calculated. In addition, the processing order of step S540, step S541, and step S542 may be reversed. In addition, the information in step S540, step S541, and step S542 may be obtained based on pre-input conditions, or may be obtained through measurement.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S542中对安装位置和吸嘴之间的距离进行计算后,作为步骤S544,对从速度V1向速度V4减速的条件进行确定,作为步骤S546,基于引线长度,对从速度V4减速的条件进行确定,结束本处理。在这里,所谓速度V1、V4是Z轴方向的移动速度。所谓从速度(第1速度)V1向速度(第4速度)V4减速的条件,是在向Z轴方向移动时使吸嘴的移动速度从速度V1向速度V4减速的条件。在电子部件安装装置10中,所谓从速度V4减速的条件,是在向Z轴方向移动时使吸嘴的移动速度从速度V4进一步减速的条件。此外,速度(第4速度)V4是比上述速度(第2速度)V3慢的速度。After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 calculates the distance between the mounting position and the suction nozzle in step S542, as step S544, the condition for decelerating from the speed V1 to the speed V4 is determined, and as step S546, based on the length of the lead wire, The conditions for the deceleration of the speed V4 are determined, and this process ends. Here, the speeds V1 and V4 are moving speeds in the Z-axis direction. The condition for decelerating from the speed (first speed) V1 to the speed (fourth speed) V4 is a condition for decelerating the moving speed of the suction nozzle from the speed V1 to the speed V4 when moving in the Z-axis direction. In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , the condition for decelerating from the speed V4 is a condition for further decelerating the moving speed of the suction nozzle from the speed V4 when moving in the Z-axis direction. In addition, the speed (fourth speed) V4 is slower than the speed (second speed) V3 described above.
在电子部件安装装置10中,通过在步骤S544和步骤S546中,对使吸嘴的移动速度变更(减速)的条件进行确定,从而对图109所示的吸嘴移动模式进行确定。在图109中,示出了吸嘴的移动速度和时间之间的关系、即各时间的吸嘴的移动速度。图109所示的基于第3速度基准的移动模式为,如果吸嘴开始向安装位置移动(吸嘴的下降),则加速至速度V1,然后,直至时间t7为止以速度V1移动。然后,吸嘴在时间t7开始减速,在时间t8减速至速度V4。在这里,时间t8是使电子部件的下端(即,引线的下端)和基板之间的距离成为所设定的距离的时间。具体地说,是电子部件的下端和基板接近至一定距离为止的时间。然后,吸嘴直至时间t9为止以固定速度移动,在时间t9开始减速,然后停止。In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , the nozzle movement pattern shown in FIG. 109 is determined by specifying conditions for changing (decelerating) the movement speed of the nozzle in steps S544 and S546 . In FIG. 109 , the relationship between the moving speed of the suction nozzle and time, that is, the moving speed of the suction nozzle at each time is shown. The movement pattern based on the third speed reference shown in FIG. 109 is to accelerate to the speed V1 when the nozzle starts to move to the mounting position (decline of the nozzle), and then move at the speed V1 until time t7. Then, the suction nozzle starts to decelerate at time t7 and decelerates to speed V4 at time t8. Here, the time t8 is the time for bringing the distance between the lower end of the electronic component (that is, the lower end of the lead) and the substrate to a set distance. Specifically, it is the time until the lower end of the electronic component and the substrate approach to a certain distance. Then, the suction nozzle moves at a constant speed until time t9, starts to decelerate at time t9, and then stops.
电子部件安装装置10通过以图109的移动模式使电子部件移动,从而可以与图105的情况相同地,在时间t7内,以速度(第1速度)V1使电子部件移动,直至电子部件以在一定距离内接近基板为止(即,比一定距离远的范围内)。然后,以作为比速度V1慢的速度的速度(第4速度)V4使电子部件移动,直至电子部件向基板安装(搭载)为止,即,可以从电子部件在一定距离内接近基板,直至将引线向插入孔中插入并结束搭载为止(即,在一定距离内的范围内)。由此,可以在不对基板造成影响的范围内使电子部件快速移动,在可能对基板产生影响的范围内使电子部件缓慢移动。由此,可以在维持向基板上搭载的精度的同时,缩短搭载所花费的时间。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can move the electronic component at the speed (first speed) V1 within the time t7 similarly to the case of FIG. 105 by moving the electronic component in the movement pattern shown in FIG. Close to the substrate within a certain distance (that is, within a range farther than a certain distance). Then, the electronic component is moved at a speed (fourth speed) V4 that is slower than the speed V1 until the electronic component is mounted (mounted) on the substrate, that is, the electronic component can approach the substrate within a certain distance until the lead wire Insert it into the insertion hole and finish loading (that is, within a certain distance). Thereby, the electronic component can be moved quickly within a range not affecting the substrate, and the electronic component can be moved slowly within a range capable of affecting the substrate. Accordingly, the time required for mounting can be shortened while maintaining the accuracy of mounting on the substrate.
电子部件安装装置10通过基于引线长度对从速度V4减速的定时进行检测,即,通过对从时间t8至时间t9的间隔进行确定,从而可以与上述相同地,稳定地将引线向基板插入。另外,可以直至主体82和基板以一定距离接近为止,使电子部件移动。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 detects the timing of deceleration from the speed V4 based on the length of the lead, that is, determines the interval from time t8 to time t9 , thereby stably inserting the lead into the board as described above. In addition, the electronic component may be moved until the main body 82 and the substrate approach each other at a certain distance.
另外,电子部件安装装置10在引线型电子部件的情况下,通过对时间t9的定时进行调整,从而可以对在电子部件和基板接触后将电子部件的主体向基板按压的按压进行调整。由此,对于向焊料上按压端子的搭载型电子部件,可以以不同的条件使主体向基板移动。Also, in the case of lead type electronic components, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can adjust the pressing force for pressing the main body of the electronic component against the substrate after the electronic component contacts the substrate by adjusting the timing of time t9. Thereby, the main body can be moved to the board|substrate under different conditions with respect to the mount-type electronic component which presses the terminal to the solder.
另外,电子部件安装装置10在引线进行了成型、向插入孔中插入时会产生更大的滑动阻力的情况下,通过将向插入孔中插入引线时的移动速度设为比速度V3慢的速度V4,从而可以将成型后的引线适当地向插入孔中插入。由此,可以将对引线进行了成型的电子部件适当地向基板安装。In addition, in the electronic component mounting apparatus 10, when the lead wire is molded and a larger sliding resistance occurs when the lead wire is inserted into the insertion hole, by setting the moving speed when the lead wire is inserted into the insertion hole to be slower than the speed V3 V4, so that the molded lead wire can be properly inserted into the insertion hole. Thereby, the electronic component which molded the lead wire can be mounted suitably on a board|substrate.
电子部件安装装置10如图100至图109所示,通过与电子部件的种类对应地、具体地说针对是引线型电子部件还是搭载型电子部件,对电子部件的Z轴方向移动模式进行调整,从而可以以与各电子部件对应的移动模式将电子部件向基板安装。另外,在引线型电子部件的情况下,通过针对是否进行了成型,对电子部件的Z轴方向移动模式进行调整,从而可以以与各电子部件对应的移动模式,将电子部件向基板安装。As shown in FIGS. 100 to 109 , the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 adjusts the movement pattern of the electronic component in the Z-axis direction according to the type of the electronic component, specifically whether it is a lead type electronic component or a mountable electronic component. Accordingly, the electronic components can be mounted on the substrate in a movement pattern corresponding to each electronic component. Also, in the case of lead-type electronic components, by adjusting the movement pattern of the electronic component in the Z-axis direction according to whether or not it is molded, the electronic component can be mounted on the substrate with a movement pattern corresponding to each electronic component.
电子部件安装装置10通过将在电子部件接近基板附近的范围内的移动速度,设为引线型电子部件的情况下的移动速度V3比搭载型电子部件的情况下的移动速度V2更慢,从而可以更可靠地将引线型电子部件向基板安装。另外,电子部件安装装置10通过将在电子部件接近基板附近的范围内的移动速度,设为引线成型后的电子部件的移动速度V4比引线没有成型的电子部件的情况下的移动速度V3更慢,从而可以更可靠地将成型后的引线向插入孔中插入。由此,可以进一步提高安装电子部件的可靠度。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can set the moving speed V3 in the case of the lead-type electronic component slower than the moving speed V2 in the case of the mount-type electronic component in the range where the electronic component approaches the vicinity of the substrate. More reliable mounting of lead-type electronic components on boards. In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 makes the moving speed V4 of the electronic component after the lead forming is slower than the moving speed V3 of the electronic component without the lead forming by setting the moving speed in the range of the electronic component close to the substrate. , so that the formed lead can be inserted into the insertion hole more reliably. Thereby, the reliability with which electronic components are mounted can be further improved.
另外,在如上述所示安装引线电子部件的情况下,通过基于引线长度而设定移动模式,从而可以将引线更适当地向插入孔中插入,可以更高精度且高效地将电子部件向基板安装。In addition, in the case of mounting electronic components with leads as described above, by setting the movement pattern based on the length of the leads, the leads can be inserted into the insertion holes more appropriately, and the electronic components can be placed on the substrate with higher accuracy and efficiency. Install.
另外,优选电子部件安装装置10如图100所示,根据电子部件的种类变更速度基准,以与种类对应的移动模式进行计算,但并不限定于此。电子部件安装装置10在为仅安装引线型电子部件的结构的情况下,也可以每次执行步骤S504的处理。另外,也可以反复进行图100的步骤S506、步骤S508、步骤S510的处理。另外,对于电子部件安装装置10,作为移动模式而示出了速度和时间之间的关系,但也可以根据速度和位置、速度和距离的关系对移动模式进行计算。In addition, it is preferable that the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 changes the speed reference according to the type of electronic component as shown in FIG. 100 and performs calculation in a movement pattern corresponding to the type, but the present invention is not limited thereto. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 is configured to mount only lead type electronic components, the process of step S504 may be executed each time. In addition, the processing of step S506, step S508, and step S510 in FIG. 100 may be repeated. In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 shows the relationship between speed and time as the movement pattern, but the movement pattern may be calculated from the relationship between speed and position, and between speed and distance.
下面,使用图110,对电子部件的搭载时的处理动作的一个例子进行说明。图110是表示电子部件安装装置的动作的一个例子的流程图。电子部件安装装置10在每次利用搭载头的吸嘴进行吸附电子部件的动作时,执行图110的处理。此外,图110的处理基本上是在作为电子部件将引线型电子部件和搭载型电子部件这两者向基板安装的情况下的处理。在电子部件安装装置10中,作为步骤S910,对保持的电子部件进行确定,作为步骤S912,对保持对象的部件是否为引线型电子部件进行判定。Next, an example of processing operation at the time of mounting an electronic component will be described using FIG. 110 . FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting device. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 executes the process of FIG. 110 every time the suction nozzle of the mounting head performs an operation of picking up an electronic component. In addition, the process of FIG. 110 is basically the process in the case where both a lead type electronic component and a mount type electronic component are mounted on a board|substrate as an electronic component. In the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , as step S910 , the electronic component to be held is specified, and as step S912 , it is determined whether or not the component to be held is a lead type electronic component.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S912中判定为引线型电子部件(是)的情况下,作为步骤S914,利用吸嘴对电子部件供给装置的引线型电子部件进行保持。即,电子部件安装装置10利用吸嘴对向电子部件供给装置100、402、404、406等的保持位置(第2保持位置)供给的引线型电子部件进行保持。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S914中利用吸嘴对引线型电子部件进行保持后,作为步骤S916,将引线型电子部件的引线向插入孔中插入,并向基板安装。When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S912 that it is a lead type electronic component (Yes), as step S914 , the lead type electronic component of the electronic component supply apparatus is held by the suction nozzle. That is, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 holds the lead-type electronic components supplied to the holding positions (second holding positions) of the electronic component supplying apparatuses 100 , 402 , 404 , 406 and the like with suction nozzles. After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 holds the lead type electronic component by the suction nozzle in step S914, as step S916, the lead wire of the lead type electronic component is inserted into the insertion hole, and mounted on the board.
电子部件安装装置10在步骤S912中判定为不是引线型电子部件(否)的情况下,作为步骤S917,利用吸嘴对电子部件供给装置的搭载型电子部件进行保持。即,电子部件安装装置10利用吸嘴对向电子部件供给装置100a等的保持位置(第1保持位置)供给的搭载型电子部件进行保持。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S917中利用吸嘴对搭载型电子部件进行保持后,作为步骤S918,将搭载型电子部件向基板安装。即,电子部件安装装置10不将搭载型电子部件向插入孔中插入而向基板安装。When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S912 that it is not a lead type electronic component (No), as step S917 , the electronic component supply apparatus holds the mountable electronic component by the suction nozzle. That is, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 holds the mount-type electronic component supplied to the holding position (first holding position) of the electronic component supply apparatus 100a etc. with a suction nozzle. After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 holds the mount-type electronic component with the suction nozzle in step S917 , as step S918 , mounts the mount-type electronic component on the board. That is, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 mounts the mount-type electronic component on the board without inserting it into the insertion hole.
电子部件安装装置10在执行步骤S916或者步骤S918的处理、即对电子部件进行安装后,作为步骤S919,对所有电子部件的安装是否结束进行判定。电子部件安装装置10在步骤S919中判定为安装没有结束(否)的情况下,进入步骤S910,对下一个安装的电子部件进行确定,对该确定后的电子部件执行上述处理。电子部件安装装置10如果在步骤S919中判定为安装结束(是),则结束本处理。After the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 executes the process of step S916 or step S918 , that is, mounts electronic components, it determines whether or not mounting of all electronic components has been completed as step S919 . When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines in step S919 that the mounting has not been completed (No), it proceeds to step S910 , specifies the next electronic component to be mounted, and executes the above-described processing on the specified electronic component. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 will complete this process, if it determines with mounting completion (Yes) in step S919.
电子部件安装装置10如图110所示,可以利用1个搭载头将搭载型电子部件和引线型电子部件向基板安装。另外,电子部件安装装置10可以利用同一个吸嘴,对搭载型电子部件和引线型电子部件这两者进行搭载。在这里,电子部件安装装置10通过对引线型电子部件的主体进行保持(吸附或者抓持),从而可以与搭载型电子部件利用同一个吸嘴进行输送、安装。另外,电子部件安装装置10通过对是搭载型电子部件还是引线型电子部件进行判定,分别相应地对将引线向插入孔中插入或不插入进行切换,从而即使在利用相同搭载头或相同吸嘴进行安装的情况下,也可以以与各个电子部件相适应的条件向基板安装。由此,不必对吸嘴进行更换就可以对搭载型电子部件和引线型电子部件进行安装。另外,由于可以不对搭载型电子部件和引线型电子部件进行区分而混合搭载,所以可以使搭载顺序的限制变得更少,可以进一步提高安装效率。As shown in FIG. 110 , the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can mount mount-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components on a board by using one mounting head. In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can mount both mount-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components using the same suction nozzle. Here, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can carry out conveyance and mounting by the same suction nozzle as the mountable electronic component by holding (absorbing or gripping) the main body of the lead type electronic component. In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines whether it is a mount-type electronic component or a lead-type electronic component, and switches whether to insert the lead wire into the insertion hole or not, so that even when using the same mounting head or the same suction nozzle, When mounting, it is also possible to mount on the substrate under conditions suitable for each electronic component. Thereby, the mount-type electronic component and the lead-type electronic component can be mounted without replacing the suction nozzle. In addition, since mount-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components can be mixed and mounted without distinguishing between them, restrictions on the order of mounting can be reduced, and mounting efficiency can be further improved.
在这里,电子部件安装装置10通过作为引线型电子部件,如上述所示使用由电子部件供给装置100供给的径向引线型电子部件,从而可以更适当地得到上述效果。电子部件安装装置10通过利用吸嘴对在电子部件供给装置100中将引线切断为规定长度后的径向引线型电子部件进行保持,更具体地说,对主体进行吸嘴保持、输送,将引线向插入孔中插入,从而向基板安装。如上述所示,电子部件安装装置10由于对电子部件的主体进行保持,所以可以缩短引线长度。另外,电子部件安装装置10由于构成为利用保持带主体进行输送,并在进行保持之前将引线切断,所以可以在将径向引线型电子部件的引线中为了进行输送而由保持带保持的部分去除后的状态下,向基板安装。由此,可以缩短径向引线型电子部件的引线而向基板安装,可以在使电子部件稳定的状态下向基板安装。具体地说,由于可以缩短径向引线型电子部件的引线而向基板安装,所以可以减少在基板安装时引线与插入孔接触而对基板施加的振动。由此,即使以相同的工序对径向引线型电子部件和搭载型电子部件进行安装,也可以减少对彼此的安装造成的影响,即使在相同的工序中,即,利用相同的搭载头或相同的吸嘴连续地进行安装,也可以适当地对两种电子部件进行安装。Here, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can more appropriately obtain the above effects by using radial lead type electronic components supplied by the electronic component supply apparatus 100 as described above as lead type electronic components. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 holds the radial lead type electronic component after the lead wire has been cut into a predetermined length in the electronic component supply apparatus 100 by using the suction nozzle, more specifically, the main body is held and transported by the suction nozzle, and the lead wire is Insert it into the insertion hole to install it on the board. As described above, since the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 holds the main body of the electronic component, the lead length can be shortened. In addition, since the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 is configured to transport the main body of the holding belt and cut the lead wires before holding, it is possible to remove the portion of the lead wires of the radial lead type electronic components held by the holding belt for transport. In the last state, mount it on the board. Thereby, the lead wire of a radial lead type electronic component can be shortened and mounted on a board|substrate, and it can mount to a board|substrate in the state which stabilized the electronic component. Specifically, since the leads of the radial lead type electronic component can be mounted on the substrate with shortened lengths, vibrations applied to the substrate due to the leads coming into contact with the insertion holes during substrate mounting can be reduced. As a result, even if the radial lead type electronic components and the mounting type electronic components are mounted in the same process, the influence on the mounting of each other can be reduced. Even in the same process, that is, using the same mounting head or the same The suction nozzles can be installed continuously, and two kinds of electronic components can also be installed appropriately.
在这里,上述实施方式的电子部件安装装置10构成为,作为部件供给单元14f,具有使用碗式供给器的碗式供给器装置90,作为部件供给单元14r,具有径向供给器的电子部件供给装置100,但并不限定于此。电子部件安装装置10可以使部件供给单元成为各种组合。例如,也可以在前侧、后侧两个部件供给单元上设置碗式供给器的电子部件供给装置,也可以在前侧、后侧两个部件供给单元上设置径向供给器的电子部件供给装置。另外,如上述所示,作为部件供给单元,也可以包含利用电子部件保持带供给搭载型电子部件的电子部件供给装置(芯片部件供给器)100a。另外,也可以将前侧、后侧中的一个部件供给单元的电子部件供给装置,全部设置为电子部件供给装置(芯片部件供给器)100a。即,也可以设置为,前侧、后侧中的一个部件供给单元供给引线型电子部件(向基板插入的电子部件),另一个供给无引线电子部件(向基板搭载的电子部件)。另外,在电子部件安装装置中,作为电子部件安装装置,也可以使用所谓托盘式供给器。另外,在电子部件安装装置中,作为电子部件供给装置,也可以使用轴向供给器,该轴向供给器在将保持带上保持的轴向型电子部件的引线如上述所示切断为向基板下方较短地露出并弯折为“コ”字型的状态下,向保持位置进行供给。在此情况下,电子部件安装装置在利用吸嘴对轴向供给器的保持位置的轴向型电子部件主体进行保持后,对引线间隔是否良好进行判别,将判定为良好的轴向型电子部件向插入孔(基板孔)中插入。电子部件安装装置10无论是由哪个电子部件供给装置供给的电子部件,均可以通过对电子部件进行吸附或者抓持而向基板搭载或者插入。此外,在供给引线型电子部件的电子部件供给装置中,以主体配置于引线的铅垂方向上侧的朝向,即,引线配置于主体的铅垂方向下侧的朝向,将引线型电子部件向利用吸嘴实施保持的保持位置供给。在这里,电子部件安装装置10优选如本实施方式所示,将具有碗式供给器的部件供给单元、其他种类的电子部件供给装置,例如上述径向供给器、上述轴向供给器、搭载型电子部件保持带供给器、杆式供给器、托盘式供给器等部件供给单元,配置在经由基板输送部12而相对的位置、即前侧和后侧。由此,可以抑制碗式供给器的振动对其他种类的部件供给单元造成影响的情况,所以可以使针对其他种类的电子部件供给装置在保持位置供给的电子部件的吸嘴保持作用稳定。Here, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 of the above-described embodiment is configured to include a bowl feeder device 90 using a bowl feeder as the component supply unit 14f, and an electronic component supplying unit including a radial feeder as the component supply unit 14r. device 100, but is not limited thereto. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can have various combinations of component supply units. For example, an electronic component supply device in which a bowl-type feeder is installed on the two component supply units on the front side and a rear side, or an electronic component supply device in which a radial feeder is installed on the two component supply units on the front side and the rear side may also be used. device. In addition, as described above, an electronic component supply device (chip component feeder) 100 a that supplies mountable electronic components using an electronic component holding tape may be included as the component supply unit. In addition, all the electronic component supply devices of one component supply unit on the front side and the rear side may be provided as the electronic component supply device (chip component feeder) 100 a. That is, one of the front and rear component supply units may supply lead-type electronic components (electronic components inserted into the substrate), and the other may supply leadless electronic components (electronic components mounted on the substrate). In addition, in the electronic component mounting apparatus, a so-called tray feeder can also be used as the electronic component mounting apparatus. In addition, in the electronic component mounting apparatus, as the electronic component supply device, an axial feeder that cuts the lead wires of the axial type electronic components held on the holding tape to the substrate as described above may be used. Supply to the holding position with the lower part exposed and bent into a "U" shape. In this case, after the electronic component mounting device holds the main body of the axial type electronic component at the holding position of the axial feeder with the suction nozzle, it judges whether the spacing between the lead wires is good or not, and judges that the axial type electronic component is good. Insert into the insertion hole (board hole). The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can mount or insert an electronic component on a board by suctioning or gripping the electronic component, regardless of which electronic component supply device is supplied. In addition, in an electronic component supply device that supplies lead-type electronic components, the lead-type electronic components are placed in an orientation in which the main body is arranged on the upper side in the vertical direction of the leads, that is, in an orientation in which the leads are arranged on the lower side in the vertical direction of the main body. The holding position supply is carried out by the suction nozzle. Here, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 is preferably a component supply unit having a bowl type feeder, or other types of electronic component supply devices, such as the above-mentioned radial feeder, the above-mentioned axial feeder, and a mount-type feeder, as shown in this embodiment. Component supply units such as an electronic component holding tape feeder, a bar feeder, and a tray feeder are arranged at positions facing each other via the substrate conveyance unit 12 , that is, the front side and the rear side. This prevents the vibration of the bowl feeder from affecting other types of component supply units, so that the holding action of the suction nozzles for electronic components supplied at the holding positions by other types of electronic component supply devices can be stabilized.
此外,在本实施方式中,将部件供给单元作为部件供给单元14f、14r这两个而进行了说明,但数量并不限定。另外,也可以将2个部件供给单元14f、14r视为1个部件供给单元,将部件供给单元14f、14r分别视为第1部件供给部、第2部件供给部。例如,可以视为构成为,如上述实施方式所示1个部件供给单元具有碗式供给器(部件供给单元14f、第1部件供给部)和径向供给器(部件供给单元14r、第2部件供给部)。在此情况下,第1部件供给部和第2部件供给部,配置在隔着基板配置位置而相对的位置上。另外,也可以视为在1个部件供给单元14f上具有第1部件供给部、第2部件供给部。例如,如上述所示,可以视为构成为,1个部件供给单元14f具有径向供给器(第1部件供给部)和芯片部件供给器(第2部件供给部)。如上述所示,电子部件安装装置10可以不依赖于组合,而采用具有多种电子部件供给装置的结构。In addition, in this embodiment, although the component supply means was demonstrated as two components supply means 14f and 14r, the number is not limited. In addition, the two component supply units 14f and 14r may be regarded as one component supply unit, and the component supply units 14f and 14r may be regarded as a first component supply unit and a second component supply unit, respectively. For example, it can be considered that one component supply unit has a bowl feeder (component supply unit 14f, first component supply unit) and a radial feeder (component supply unit 14r, second component supply unit) as shown in the above-mentioned embodiment. supply department). In this case, the first component supply unit and the second component supply unit are disposed at positions facing each other across the substrate arrangement position. In addition, it can also be considered that one component supply unit 14f has a first component supply unit and a second component supply unit. For example, as described above, it can be considered that one component supply unit 14 f has a radial feeder (first component supply unit) and a chip component feeder (second component supply unit). As described above, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 may employ a configuration including a plurality of electronic component supplying apparatuses regardless of combination.
在这里,作为径向供给器即电子部件供给装置100所供给的电子部件,存在可以利用保持带保持引线的各种径向引线型电子部件。电子部件供给装置100可以供给例如铝电解电容器、电感器、陶瓷电容器、薄膜电容器等。另外,作为碗式供给器即电子部件供给装置402、404、406所供给的电子部件,存在封装部件的各种引线型电子部件。电子部件供给装置402、404、406可以供给例如固态继电器、DIP型电子部件、SIP型电子部件、连接器、变压器等。Here, as electronic components supplied by the electronic component supply apparatus 100 which is a radial feeder, there are various radial lead type electronic components in which leads can be held by holding tapes. The electronic component supply apparatus 100 can supply, for example, aluminum electrolytic capacitors, inductors, ceramic capacitors, film capacitors, and the like. In addition, as electronic components supplied by the electronic component supply devices 402 , 404 , and 406 which are bowl-type feeders, there are various lead-type electronic components of packaged components. The electronic component supply devices 402 , 404 , and 406 can supply, for example, solid state relays, DIP type electronic components, SIP type electronic components, connectors, transformers, and the like.
另外,对于本实施方式的搭载头15,在为了可以利用1台搭载头安装更多种类的电子部件而具有多个吸嘴的情况下,可以使用上述吸嘴自动更换装置(在本实施方式中为通过更换吸嘴保持机构和搭载头主体的组合而实现的搭载头更换动作),在安装生产中将各吸嘴更换为各种吸嘴、抓持吸嘴。电子部件安装装置10根据与搭载型电子部件以及引线型电子部件对应的大小、重量、部件主体上表面是否具有可吸附的平面、以及是否可以抓持部件主体等部件条件,针对每个部件,指定具有适当吸附孔径的吸嘴或者适当形状的抓持部件的抓持吸嘴,并存储在生产程序中。电子部件安装装置10基于生产程序中存储的电子部件和吸嘴之间的对应关系,对在搭载头上安装的吸嘴进行切换,或在搭载头内对保持该电子部件的吸嘴进行确定。In addition, when the mounting head 15 of this embodiment has a plurality of suction nozzles in order to be able to mount more types of electronic components with one mounting head, the above-mentioned suction nozzle automatic changing device (in this embodiment In order to replace the mounting head by replacing the combination of the nozzle holding mechanism and the mounting head body), each nozzle is replaced with a variety of nozzles and gripping nozzles during installation and production. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 specifies, for each component, according to component conditions such as the size and weight corresponding to the mountable electronic component and the lead type electronic component, whether the upper surface of the component body has a plane that can be sucked, and whether the component body can be gripped. Suction nozzles with suitable suction apertures or gripping nozzles with gripping parts of suitable shape and stored in the production program. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 switches the nozzles to be mounted on the mounting head based on the correspondence between the electronic components and the nozzles stored in the production program, or specifies the nozzles holding the electronic components in the mounting head.
其结果,电子部件安装装置10例如在基板安装中将由吸嘴保持的电子部件从搭载型电子部件变更为引线型电子部件的情况下,产生利用与保持搭载型电子部件的吸嘴相同的吸嘴对引线型电子部件进行保持的情况,以及利用不同的吸嘴对引线型电子部件进行保持的情况。电子部件安装装置10在上述吸嘴不同的情况下,在准备工序时或者生产中,搭载的电子部件发生变更时,利用上述吸嘴自动更换装置,自动地更换吸嘴。即,持续进行下述动作:在生产中向基板安装的电子部件为例如搭载型电子部件时,选择与该电子部件相适应的吸嘴(吸附吸嘴或者抓持吸嘴),使吸嘴移动至位于供给该电子部件的电子部件供给装置的保持位置上的搭载型电子部件,对电子部件进行保持并向基板的规定位置移动,在使电子部件进行下降速度控制的同时进行搭载动作。电子部件安装装置10在规定数量的该电子部件的安装结束,将下一个应安装的电子部件变更为引线型电子部件时,对吸嘴相同还是不同进行判别。电子部件安装装置10在判定为吸嘴相同的情况下,由于不需要更换吸嘴,所以将相同的吸嘴作为该引线型电子部件用的吸嘴。另外,电子部件安装装置10在判定为吸嘴不同的情况下,在搭载头上安装的其他吸嘴中存在可以使用的吸嘴的情况下,将该吸嘴作为该引线型电子部件用的吸嘴,在其他吸嘴中没有可以利用的吸嘴的情况下,通过上述吸嘴自动更换装置,自动地更换为该引线型电子部件用吸嘴。电子部件安装装置10在这样准备好引线型电子部件用的吸嘴后,使搭载头移动,使该吸嘴向引线型电子部件供给装置的保持位置移动。电子部件安装装置10利用供给引线型电子部件的电子部件供给装置,将具有由内置的切断装置(切断单元)从电子部件带(电子部件保持带)预先切断为较短的规定长度的引线的引线型电子部件,设置在保持位置上。电子部件安装装置10通过利用上述吸嘴对引线型电子部件进行吸附或抓持,从而进行保持,通过利用检测单元(激光识别装置38)对引线间隔进行判别,并且对位置偏移进行判别,从而对向基板移动并向插入孔(基板孔)插入的电子部件进行筛选,在向插入孔中插入时对引线进行位置偏移校正,并且进行使插入时的下降速度与引线的切断长度相对应而逐渐减速的切换控制,同时进行安装。As a result, for example, when the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 changes the electronic component held by the suction nozzle from the mount-type electronic component to the lead-type electronic component during board mounting, the use of the same suction nozzle as the suction nozzle holding the mount-type electronic component may occur. A case of holding a lead type electronic component, and a case of holding a lead type electronic component with a different suction nozzle. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 uses the automatic nozzle replacement device to automatically replace the suction nozzles when the electronic components to be mounted are changed during the preparation process or during production when the suction nozzles are different. That is, the following operation is continuously performed: when the electronic component mounted on the substrate during production is, for example, a mount-type electronic component, a suction nozzle (suction nozzle or gripping nozzle) suitable for the electronic component is selected, and the suction nozzle is moved. The mounted electronic component is held at the holding position of the electronic component supply device that supplies the electronic component, and the electronic component is held and moved to a predetermined position on the substrate, and the electronic component is mounted while controlling the descending speed. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines whether the suction nozzles are the same or different when the mounting of the predetermined number of electronic components is completed and the next electronic component to be mounted is changed to a lead type electronic component. When the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines that the suction nozzles are the same, since there is no need to replace the suction nozzles, the same suction nozzles are used as the suction nozzles for the lead-type electronic components. In addition, when the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines that the suction nozzles are different, if there is a usable suction nozzle among other suction nozzles mounted on the mounting head, the suction nozzle is used as the suction nozzle for the lead-type electronic component. When there is no usable nozzle among the other nozzles, the nozzle is automatically replaced with the nozzle for the lead-type electronic component by the above-mentioned automatic nozzle replacement device. After preparing the suction nozzles for lead-type electronic components in this way, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 moves the mounting head to move the suction nozzles to the holding position of the lead-type electronic component supply apparatus. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 utilizes an electronic component supply device that supplies lead-type electronic components, and uses a built-in cutting device (cutting unit) to pre-cut the lead wire from the electronic component tape (electronic component holding tape) to a short predetermined length. type electronic components, set in holding position. The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 holds the lead-type electronic component by sucking or gripping the lead-type electronic component with the above-mentioned suction nozzle, and distinguishes the distance between the lead wires and the positional deviation by using the detection unit (laser recognition device 38 ), thereby Electronic components moved to the substrate and inserted into the insertion hole (substrate hole) are screened, and the positional deviation of the lead wire is corrected when inserted into the insertion hole, and the descending speed at the time of insertion corresponds to the cut length of the lead wire. Gradually decelerates the switching control while proceeding with the installation.
另外,搭载头15在具有多个吸嘴的情况下,只要至少具有一个可以对引线型电子部件(插入型电子部件)进行保持、搭载的吸嘴即可,吸嘴的结构可以采用各种结构。例如,搭载头15也可以使一部分的吸嘴为对引线型电子部件进行保持的吸嘴,使其余的吸嘴为对搭载型电子部件进行保持的吸嘴。在此情况下,电子部件安装装置在利用吸嘴对搭载型电子部件进行保持的情况下,进行对该搭载型电子部件进行基板搭载的安装控制,在对引线型电子部件进行保持的情况下,进行将该引线型电子部件向插入孔(基板孔)中插入的安装控制。另外,搭载头15也可以将全部的吸嘴设为对引线型电子部件进行保持的吸嘴。另外,电子部件安装装置10基于生产程序,对吸附搭载对象的电子部件的吸附吸嘴(或者进行抓持的抓持吸嘴)进行确定时,根据电子部件的种类,对保持安装该电子部件的吸嘴进行确定。电子部件安装装置10如上述所示,准备可以在一台搭载头上安装的多个吸嘴,通过根据基于生产程序的指令,在生产中使吸嘴自动更换装置动作,将安装在搭载头上的吸嘴可拆卸地更换为与下一次生产的电子部件(安装的电子部件)相对应的吸嘴,从而在基板上保持插入引线型电子部件,并且通过对搭载型电子部件进行基板搭载,从而可以依次进行基板安装。In addition, when the mounting head 15 has a plurality of suction nozzles, it is only necessary to have at least one suction nozzle capable of holding and mounting lead-type electronic components (plug-in type electronic components), and various structures of the suction nozzles can be adopted. . For example, in the mounting head 15 , some of the suction nozzles may be used to hold lead-type electronic components, and the remaining suction nozzles may be used to hold mount-type electronic components. In this case, the electronic component mounting apparatus performs mounting control of substrate mounting of the mounted electronic component when holding the mounted electronic component with the suction nozzle, and performs mounting control of the mounted electronic component when holding the lead type electronic component. Mounting control for inserting the lead type electronic component into the insertion hole (substrate hole) is performed. In addition, the mounting head 15 may use all the suction nozzles as the suction nozzles which hold a lead type electronic component. In addition, when the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 determines the suction nozzle (or the gripping nozzle for gripping) to suction the electronic component to be mounted based on the production program, the electronic component is held and mounted according to the type of the electronic component. The suction nozzle is confirmed. As described above, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 prepares a plurality of suction nozzles that can be mounted on one mounting head, operates the suction nozzle automatic changing device during production according to the instructions based on the production program, and mounts the nozzles on the mounting head. The suction nozzles are detachably replaced with those corresponding to the electronic parts to be produced next time (mounted electronic parts), so that the lead type electronic parts are kept inserted on the board, and by board mounting of the mount-on type electronic parts, thus Substrate mounting can be performed sequentially.
下面,使用图111和图112,对使用上述电子部件安装装置的电子部件安装系统(安装系统)的一个例子进行说明。图111是表示电子部件安装系统的概略结构的示意图。图111所示的电子部件安装系统(以下也称为“安装系统”)1具有图案形成装置2、回流处理装置4、输送装置6、7以及电子部件安装装置10。在安装系统1中,以图案形成装置2、输送装置6、电子部件安装装置10、输送装置7、回流处理装置4的顺序,对各部分进行配置,以输送基板。Next, an example of an electronic component mounting system (mounting system) using the electronic component mounting apparatus described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112 . FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of the electronic component mounting system. An electronic component mounting system (hereinafter also referred to as “mounting system”) 1 shown in FIG. 111 includes a pattern forming device 2 , a reflow processing device 4 , conveyance devices 6 and 7 , and an electronic component mounting device 10 . In the mounting system 1 , each part is arranged in order of the pattern forming device 2 , the conveying device 6 , the electronic component mounting device 10 , the conveying device 7 , and the reflow processing device 4 to convey the substrate.
图案形成装置2是在基板的表面形成焊料图案,向基板的插入孔中填充焊料的装置。回流装置4通过将基板加热至规定温度,使基板的焊料临时熔化,从而将与焊料接触的基板和电子部件粘接。即,回流装置4利用图案的焊料,将在基板的表面形成的焊料的图案上安装的搭载型电子部件和基板粘接,将引线插入至插入孔中的引线型电子部件和引线插入孔,利用插入孔中填充的焊料进行粘接。The pattern forming device 2 is a device that forms a solder pattern on the surface of the substrate and fills the insertion holes of the substrate with solder. The reflow device 4 heats the substrate to a predetermined temperature to temporarily melt the solder on the substrate, thereby bonding the substrate and the electronic component in contact with the solder. That is, the reflow device 4 uses the patterned solder to bond the mounted electronic component mounted on the solder pattern formed on the surface of the substrate to the substrate, inserts the lead into the lead type electronic component and the lead insertion hole in the insertion hole, and uses Insert the solder filled in the hole for bonding.
输送装置6、7是输送基板的装置。输送装置6将在图案形成装置2中进行处理并搬出的基板,向电子部件安装装置10搬入。输送装置7将在电子部件安装装置10中处理并搬出的基板,向回流处理装置4搬入。The transfer devices 6 and 7 are devices for transferring substrates. The conveying device 6 carries the substrate processed and carried out by the pattern forming device 2 into the electronic component mounting device 10 . The transport device 7 carries the substrate processed and carried out by the electronic component mounting device 10 into the reflow processing device 4 .
电子部件安装装置10如上述所示,向基板安装电子部件。在这里,电子部件安装装置10作为电子部件,可以安装引线型电子部件。另外,电子部件安装装置10作为电子部件,也可以安装引线型电子部件和搭载型电子部件这两者。安装系统1为上述结构。The electronic component mounting apparatus 10 mounts electronic components on a board as described above. Here, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 can mount lead type electronic components as electronic components. In addition, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 may mount both lead-type electronic components and mount-type electronic components as electronic components. The installation system 1 has the above-mentioned structure.
图112是表示电子部件安装系统的动作的一个例子的流程图。在安装系统1中,作为步骤S960,向基板上印刷焊料。即,在安装系统1中,作为步骤S960,利用图案形成装置在基板的表面形成焊料的图案,向插入孔中填充焊料。在安装系统1中,在步骤S960中向基板上印刷焊料后,利用输送装置6将基板向电子部件安装装置10搬入,作为步骤S962,利用电子部件安装装置10向基板安装引线型电子部件以及搭载型电子部件。在安装系统1中,在步骤S962中向基板安装电子部件后,利用输送装置7将安装有电子部件的基板向回流处理装置4搬入,作为步骤S964,执行回流处理,结束本处理。FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic component mounting system. In the mounting system 1, as step S960, solder is printed on the substrate. That is, in the mounting system 1 , as step S960 , a solder pattern is formed on the surface of the substrate by the patterning device, and the insertion hole is filled with solder. In the mounting system 1, after solder is printed on the substrate in step S960, the substrate is carried into the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 by the conveyance device 6, and as step S962, the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 is used to mount lead type electronic components on the substrate and mount them. type electronic components. In the mounting system 1, after mounting the electronic components on the substrate in step S962, the substrate mounted with the electronic components is carried into the reflow processing device 4 by the conveyance device 7, and the reflow processing is performed in step S964, and this process ends.
在安装系统1中,如上述所示,通过利用电子部件安装装置10对引线型电子部件以及搭载型电子部件进行安装,从而可以利用1次回流处理,将引线型电子部件以及搭载型电子部件这两者固定在基板。由此,在安装系统1中,可以简化制造线的结构。In the mounting system 1, as described above, by using the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 to mount the lead-type electronic components and the mount-type electronic components, the lead-type electronic components and the mount-type electronic components can be mounted with one reflow process. Both are fixed to the substrate. Thereby, in the installation system 1, the structure of a manufacturing line can be simplified.
另外,通过利用电子部件安装装置10对引线型电子部件以及搭载型电子部件进行安装,从而如上述所示,可以在缩短径向引线型电子部件的引线的状态下进行安装。由此,在安装系统1中,即使在相同的工序中对引线型电子部件以及搭载型电子部件进行安装,对引线型电子部件以及搭载型电子部件同时执行回流,也可以适当地将电子部件粘接在基板上。由此,可以提高基板的生产效率。In addition, by mounting the lead type electronic component and the mount type electronic component using the electronic component mounting apparatus 10 , as described above, the radial lead type electronic component can be mounted with the lead wires shortened. Thus, in the mounting system 1, even if the lead type electronic component and the mount type electronic component are mounted in the same process, and the lead type electronic component and the mount type electronic component are reflowed at the same time, the electronic component can be bonded appropriately. connected to the substrate. Thereby, the production efficiency of a board|substrate can be improved.
另外,在电子部件安装系统1中,通过向插入孔中预先填充或者涂敷焊料,从而经由焊料将插入后的引线临时固定在插入孔中,因此,可以不使用当前执行的、为了固定部件而在基板背面侧将部件弯折的部件弯折工序,因此可以缩短引线,由此,可以在现有的基板插入的专用安装装置中,省略在基板背面侧设置的引线弯折装置。另外,可以将在现有的电子部件安装装置(芯片贴装机)中利用的、支撑基板的支撑销,配置在任意的位置,利用搭载头进行基板搭载以及向插入孔中插入。In addition, in the electronic component mounting system 1, the lead wire after insertion is temporarily fixed in the insertion hole via solder by prefilling or applying solder into the insertion hole. The component bending process of bending components on the back side of the board can shorten the lead wires, thereby eliminating the need for a lead bending device provided on the back side of the board in an existing dedicated mounting device for board insertion. In addition, support pins for supporting substrates used in conventional electronic component mounting devices (die mounters) can be arranged at arbitrary positions, and the substrates can be mounted and inserted into the insertion holes by the mounting head.
此外,用于使图111、图112所示的安装系统1可以得到上述效果的具有优选结构的电子部件安装装置的安装系统并不限定于此。例如安装系统也可以构成为,具有多台电子部件安装装置10。另外,在安装系统中,也可以将电子部件安装装置10作为仅安装引线型电子部件的安装装置使用。另外,电子部件安装装置10是可以适当地安装引线型电子部件的装置,但也可以用作为暂时仅安装搭载型电子部件的装置使用。In addition, the mounting system of the electronic component mounting apparatus which has a preferable structure for making the mounting system 1 shown in FIG. 111, FIG. 112 obtain the said effect is not limited to this. For example, the mounting system may be configured to have a plurality of electronic component mounting apparatuses 10 . In addition, in the mounting system, the electronic component mounting device 10 may be used as a mounting device for mounting only lead-type electronic components. In addition, the electronic component mounting device 10 is a device capable of appropriately mounting lead type electronic components, but may also be used as a device for temporarily mounting only mountable electronic components.
Claims (13)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2012025616A JP5925510B2 (en) | 2012-02-08 | 2012-02-08 | Electronic component mounting apparatus and electronic component mounting method |
JP2012-025616 | 2012-02-08 |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CN103249292A CN103249292A (en) | 2013-08-14 |
CN103249292B true CN103249292B (en) | 2017-07-07 |
Family
ID=48928414
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CN201310049297.6A Active CN103249292B (en) | 2012-02-08 | 2013-02-07 | Electronic component mounting apparatus and electronic component mounting method |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP5925510B2 (en) |
CN (1) | CN103249292B (en) |
Families Citing this family (9)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP6019410B2 (en) * | 2013-11-13 | 2016-11-02 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Electronic component mounting apparatus and electronic component mounting method |
JP6236298B2 (en) * | 2013-11-15 | 2017-11-22 | 日本トムソン株式会社 | Vertical axis slide device with built-in moving coil linear motor |
JP6295431B2 (en) * | 2014-09-08 | 2018-03-20 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Insert head, component insertion device and component mounting line |
JPWO2017051446A1 (en) * | 2015-09-22 | 2018-07-05 | 株式会社Fuji | Parts supply system |
CN107825444A (en) * | 2016-09-16 | 2018-03-23 | 天津思博科科技发展有限公司 | Surface note machine hand based on machine vision technique |
US11064641B2 (en) * | 2017-01-30 | 2021-07-13 | Fuji Corporation | Component mounting machine |
CN113170610B (en) * | 2018-12-03 | 2022-10-11 | 松下知识产权经营株式会社 | Component mounting system, tape feeder, and component mounting device |
CN109996433B (en) * | 2019-04-11 | 2020-10-27 | 台州学院 | Safety capacitor installing machine and safety capacitor installing method |
CN112276973B (en) * | 2020-12-30 | 2021-04-06 | 季华科技有限公司 | Connector clamping distribution method and device, electronic equipment and system |
Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN1325612A (en) * | 1998-10-27 | 2001-12-05 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Component mounting method and apparatus |
JP2006268936A (en) * | 2005-03-23 | 2006-10-05 | Denon Ltd | Audio signal reproducing device |
Family Cites Families (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH08272421A (en) * | 1995-03-29 | 1996-10-18 | Canon Inc | Robot controller and its control method |
JP2006286936A (en) * | 2005-03-31 | 2006-10-19 | Ricoh Microelectronics Co Ltd | Method of manufacturing electronic circuit board and system thereof, and component mounting apparatus |
-
2012
- 2012-02-08 JP JP2012025616A patent/JP5925510B2/en active Active
-
2013
- 2013-02-07 CN CN201310049297.6A patent/CN103249292B/en active Active
Patent Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN1325612A (en) * | 1998-10-27 | 2001-12-05 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Component mounting method and apparatus |
JP2006268936A (en) * | 2005-03-23 | 2006-10-05 | Denon Ltd | Audio signal reproducing device |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN103249292A (en) | 2013-08-14 |
JP2013162105A (en) | 2013-08-19 |
JP5925510B2 (en) | 2016-05-25 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
CN103249294B (en) | Electronic part supplying device and electric part installing device | |
CN103249292B (en) | Electronic component mounting apparatus and electronic component mounting method | |
CN103249293B (en) | Electronic component mounting apparatus, electronic component mounting system and electronic component mounting method | |
CN103249295B (en) | Electronic component mounting method, electronic component mounting apparatus and electronic component mounting system | |
CN103108537B (en) | Electronic component mounting apparatus and electronic component mounting method | |
JP6240730B2 (en) | Electronic component mounting apparatus and electronic component mounting method | |
CN103517626B (en) | Electronic component mounting apparatus | |
CN103687469B (en) | Electronic component mounting apparatus | |
CN102958342B (en) | Electronic unit automatic supplier and electronic component mounting apparatus | |
CN103857269A (en) | Management system | |
JP5922904B2 (en) | Electronic component supply device and electronic component mounting device | |
JP2014130960A (en) | Electronic component mounting device and electronic component mounting method | |
CN103298326B (en) | Electronic component supply device and electronic component installation apparatus | |
CN103889201A (en) | Electronic part installation apparatus | |
CN103929940B (en) | Bowl formula feeder assembly and electronic component mounting apparatus | |
JP6120932B2 (en) | Electronic component mounting equipment | |
JP6154456B2 (en) | Electronic component mounting method and electronic component mounting apparatus | |
CN105592683B (en) | Electronic component conveying suction nozzle and electronic component mounting device with same | |
JP5864294B2 (en) | Electronic component mounting method and electronic component mounting apparatus | |
CN103249296B (en) | Bowl formula feeder unit, bowl formula feeder assembly and electronic component mounting apparatus | |
JP6435086B2 (en) | Electronic component mounting apparatus and electronic component supply method |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
C06 | Publication | ||
PB01 | Publication | ||
C10 | Entry into substantive examination | ||
SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
GR01 | Patent grant | ||
GR01 | Patent grant |